Catalogue of Watson microscopes

• NOTICE DÉTAILLÉE
• ACCÈS AUX IMAGES
• TABLE DES MATIÈRES ABRÉGÉE
• TABLE DES MATIÈRES INTÉGRALE
• TEXTE OCÉRISÉ
• EXPORT
• NOTE DE PRÉSENTATION
• RECHERCHER DANS CE TITRE

TOME 1

• •  
    • CATALOGUE OF MICROSCOPES
    • MICROSCOPES
    • AND
    • ACCESSORIES
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. LONDON
    • 36tfa EDITION
  • n.n. - vue 1/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • %
    • 3
    • %
    • Z
    • 3
    • it
    • CONTENTS
    • PAGE
    • Depots and Agencies ... ... ... 2
    • Conduct of Business ... ... -. 3 Introduction ... ... ... ... 4 The Compound Microscope ... ... 5 Objectives ... ... ... ... 6 The Choice of Objectives ... ... 8 Apochromatic Objectives ... ... 11 Holoscopic Objectives ... ... ... 12 Parachromatic Objectives ... ... 14 Objectives for Special Purposes ... 16 Magnifying Powers of Objectives ... 17 Eyepieces or Oculars ... ... ... 18
    • Holoscopic Eyepieces, Projection Eye-piece ... ... ... ... 19 Comparator and Angle Eyepieces ... 20 Duplex Eyepiece ... ... ... 21 Demonstration Eyepiece ... ... 21 Nosepieces, various types ... ... 22 Condensers—Substage ... ... ... 23
    • Low-power Condensers, Expanding Stop... ... ... 25 Universal Condenser ... ... ... 26
    • Holoscopic and Parachromatic Conden-sers ... ... ... ... ... 27 Abbe Condenser and Mounts ... ... 28 Holoscopic Immersion Paraboloid ... 29
    • Cassegrain Dark Ground Condenser ... 30
    • Zonal Dark Ground Condenser, Hang-ing Drop Slide Condenser Mounts 31 Electric Light Attachment ... ... 32 Diagram of Microscope... ... ... 33
    • The Construction of Watson Micro® scopes ... ... ... ... 34 Carriers for Condensers ... ... ... 40 Condenser Changers ... ... ... 43 Microscope Mirrors ... ... ... 44 Mechanical Stages ... ... ... 47 Attachable Rackwork Drawtube ... 51 Guarantee of Quality ... ... ... 52
    • PAGE
    • Reasons for choosing a Watson Micro-scope ... ... ... ... 53 The " Myral" Microscope ... ... 54 The " Kima ” Microscope ... ... 56 The " Service ” Microscope ... ... 59 Physician’s Outfit ... ... ... 62 The " Bactil " Microscope ... ... 63 The " Patna" Microscope ... ... 66 Microscopes for Research ... ... 68 Edinburgh Student’s Microscope ... 69 The " Research ” Microscope... ... 72
    • Accessories for Edinburgh Student’s and other Microscopes ... ... ... 74 Mechanical Stages ... ... ... 75 The " Royal" Microscope ... ... 77
    • The " Royal ” Microscope, suggested General Outfit ... ... ... 80 The " Van Heurck ” Microscope ... 81
    • Ultra-Violet Light Microscope Equipment ... ... ... ... 90 The “ Horizontal" Microscope... ... 94 The " Ramsden" Micrograph ... ... 95 The Horizontal Reading Microscope ... 96 The 46 Vernier ” Microscope ... ... 97
    • The " Museum ” Microscope, patterns 1&2 ... ... 98
    • The " Museum ” Microscope, pattern 3 99 The " Club " Portable Microscope ... 100 The " McArthur” Portable Microscope 102 " Wenham " Binocular Body ... 103 The Universal Binocular Body ... 104 The Inclining Unit ... ... ... 107
    • The Sir Herbert Jackson Tube Length Corrector ... ... ... ... 107 64 Greenough ” Binocular Microscopes, patterns ... ... ... ... 108
    • 44 Greenough” Binocular Microscope, pattern 4, Inclined ... ... 109
    • Low-power Dissecting Binocular Micro-scope ............ 113 Long Arm Stand ... ... ... 115
    • Accessory Stage ... ... ... ... 116
  • n.n. - vue 2/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 5
    • 2
    • 36th Edition
    • ERVATI A
    • CATALOGUE
    • of
    • WATSON MICROSCOPES
    • PART 1
    • Microscopes, Fittings and Optical Parts for all the Biological Sciences
    • The Instruments described are suitable for study and research in
    • Agriculture Bacteriology Bio-chemistry BOTANY
    • Cytology Histology Hygiene PATHOLOGY
    • Physiology Pharmacology Phytopathology ZOOLOGY
    • for the work of the amateur and for many technical purposes.
    • The complete Catalogue of Watson Microscopes is issued as follows:
    • PART I. PART 2. PARTS 1 & 2. PART 3. PART 4. PART 5. PART 6. PART 7. Microscopes, Fittings and Optical Parts. Microscope Accessories. Microscopes and Accessories. Objects for the Microscope. Metallurgical Microscopes and Accessories. Photomicrographic Cameras and Accessories. Petrological Microscopes and Accessories. Microscopes for Industrial purposes and specialised apparatus.
    • PUBLICATIONS AND LEAFLETS
    • Microscope Record, pubd. three times annually, gratis.
    • Dark Ground Illumination.
    • Magnifiers and Mountings.
    • The Book of the Watson Microscope.
    • Microscopes for Students and Research.
    • Any of the above will be sent post-free on request.
  • n.n. - vue 3/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 5
    • o
    • 3
    • 2
    • 0
    • Lu
    • 2 (
    • = 1
    • 0 V
    • 2 (A
    • — (
    • Ll V
    • T
    • o
    • 45
    • ( 0
    • o
    • %
    • co
    • a
    • 2 7
    • %
    • NINE TIMES PLACED HIGHER
    • THAN ANY OTHER COMPETITOR.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, Ltd.
    • OPTICIANS
    • To H.M. Government, The Admiralty, War Office, Royal Air Force, India Office, Colonial and many Foreign Governments
    • ESTABLISHED 1837
    • Head Offices and Show Rooms:
    • 313 High Holborn, LONDON, W.C. 1, ENGLAND
    • Two doors from Chancery Lane and one minute from the Chancery Lane Tube Station
    • Telephones : Holborn 2767 and 2768
    • Cables and Telegrams :
    • " Optics, Holb., London ” (2 words)
    • Hours of Business
    • - 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.
    • Saturdays - 9 a.m. to I p.m.
    • Works : BARNET, HERTS., ENGLAND
    • ENGLAND.
    • SCOTLAND.
    • IRELAND.
    • AUSTRALIA.
    • CANADA.
    • S. AFRICA.
    • INDIA.
    • NEW ZEALAND.
    • EGYPT.
    • FRANCE. FINLAND. HOLLAND.
    • JAPAN.
    • LATVIA.
    • POLAND.
    • Depots and Agencies:
    • BIRMINGHAM : Watson & Glover, 2 Easy Row.
    • LANCASHIRE, CHESHIRE : J. D. Casartelli, Lyme View, Romiley.
    • MANCHESTER : J. Woolley, Sons & Co., Ltd., Victoria Bridge.
    • ESSEX, LINCOLNSHIRE, NORFOLK, SUFFOLK: Chas. Hawksley, Bulmer, Sudbury, Suffolk.
    • GLASGOW : A. Woodger, 530 Great Western Road.
    • BELFAST : S. E. Dickson, 9 Donegall Square West.
    • ADELAIDE : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 9 Graham Street.
    • BRISBANE : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 105 Eagle Street.
    • MELBOURNE : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 117 Collins Street.
    • NEWCASTLE: Wm. Watson & Sons, Ltd., Carrington Chambers, Watt St.
    • PERTH : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 205 St. George’s Terrace.
    • SYDNEY : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., Watson House, Bligh St.
    • OTTAWA : Instruments Ltd., 240 Sparks Street.
    • TORONTO : Wilson Instrument Co. , 59/60 Wellington Street, West.
    • DURBAN : British Instruments & Chemicals Ltd., 350 West St.
    • BOMBAY: A. H. Whelan, Commerce House, Currimbhoy Road, Ballard Estate.
    • , AUCKLAND: W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., Lister Building, Victoria Street.
    • WELLINGTON : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 16 The Terrace.
    • CHRISTCHURCH : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 137 Cambridge Terrace, C. 1.
    • CAIRO: A. G. Casdagli, 16, Sh. Sheikh Hamza, P.O. Box 885.
    • PARIS : F. C. Dannatt, 198 Rue Saint-Jacques (5e).
    • HELSINGFORS: 0. Y. Chester, A. B. Kaisaniemugatan 5.
    • UTRECHT: F. Kooijman, Korte Smeestraat, 9-11.
    • • TOKYO : A. Buckney & Co., P.O. Box 141 Central.
    • Thiseido Building Ginza, Nishi-nanachome Kyobashi-Ku.
    • RIGA: Valsts Electrotecknisha Fabrika.
    • WARSAW : Inz Feliks Lachman, 3 Szpitalna.
  • n.n. - vue 4/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 3
    • CONDUCT OF BUSINESS
    • TERMS.
    • Prices in this Catalogue are net for Cash ; there is no Discount.
    • Carriage, packing and insurance are not included in these prices, but are charged extra at cost.
    • ORDERING.
    • In ordering from this catalogue the edition should be stated, viz. : Thirty-sixth Edition.
    • Orders should be accompanied by a remittance in full or by two London trade references.
    • Names and addresses of customers should be written very distinctly.
    • ILLUSTRATIONS in this list are intended only as a general guide to the appearance and construction. Alterations and improvements are introduced from time to time and may necessitate corresponding changes in the models. In every case the instruments supplied will be of the latest and best design.
    • ORDERS BY CABLE.
    • Cable and Wireless messages may be sent at full rates by A.B.C. Code 4th and Sth editions, Bentley’s Code, or by Code Words to be found against items in this catalogue. A quantity number or word should precede each code word. Where no quantity is stated it will be assumed that only one article is required. A combination of code words, if the total number of letters does not exceed ten, may be sent as one word.
    • Deferred cables at reduced rates are often sufficiently expeditious. Code words are not always allowed in such cables, but the catalogue numbers may be used.
    • PAYMENT.
    • A remittance to the value of the goods should accompany the order. Where delivery of the goods may not be immediate the remittance may be 25 per cent, of the value, the balance to be paid against delivery. Cheques and postal or money orders should be crossed Westminster Bank, Ltd. Postal or money orders should be payable at General Post Office, London. Customers residing abroad will find a banker’s draft drawn on a London agent at sight the most advantageous method of remitting. Such a draft may be obtained at any bank. Post office orders are also a convenient form of remittance.
    • PACKING.
    • Goods are expertly packed according to destination. The cost of packing is charged to the customer.
    • CARRIAGE AND SHIPMENT.
    • Goods for the British Isles are sent by passenger train unless the purchaser desires otherwise. For export shipments that route which appears the most secure, direct and economical is selected unless other instructions are given. Charges for carriage and insurance are payable by the purchaser.
    • RESPONSIBILITY.
    • Goods in transit are at the risk of the purchaser, but every precaution in packing, selection of route and insurance is taken before despatch.
    • 6 SE 84 80
    • Z 08 8008 88 z| 08 8 0)8 SEI 84
    • 8 8
  • n.n. - vue 5/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 4
    • INTRODUCTION
    • INTRODUCTION
    • Founded in the year 1837 by the late William Watson, the firm of W. Watson and Sons has become famous throughout the world for Optical Instruments of various kinds including Photographic Lenses, Prism Binoculars, Astronomical Telescopes and predominantly Microscopes.
    • The manufacture of Microscopes was undertaken by us about fifty years ago, and gradually the Microscope Department assumed increasing proportions until it has now been for several years the most important in our business. We are the largest makers of Microscopes, Objectives, and Accessory Apparatus in the British Empire.
    • The success that has attended our efforts is undoubtedly due to the keen appreciation which workers show for Microscopes which enable them to express their own individuality in their work, and to Objectives and Condensers which give results and afford conveniences which are unusual and in some cases unique.
    • Although the Microscope is not used for recreational purposes by the amateur to the same extent as formerly, there is still an active and growing section of such workers, and certain of our Microscopes suit their requirements in a special manner. In fact we are the only manufacturers in the world who cater for their needs.
    • On the other hand the Microscope is now recognised as essential in nearly every branch of Industry, and the variety of subjects for research connected with science and the medical profession causes a continual demand for instruments for the purpose. The demand for our productions shows a continued annual increase.
    • The notable advance in microscope design which ensures unsurpassed rigidity and durability announced in the last edition, has been an unqualified success. Full details will be found in the Section on mechanical construction. New instruments and accessories will be found in the present issue.
    • Our Works are situated at High Barnet, Hertfordshire, and present the most favourable conditions that can be desired and modern facilities provide, for the manufacture of scientific instruments. Our main works were rebuilt in 1910, substantial additions were made in 1914 to 1918, and in 1919, while further additions have been made in 1935/6.
    • To make a Microscope satisfactorily requires a peculiar and special talent, which can only be acquired with apprenticeship and long training to the work. We have in our works men who have been with us all their working lives, while the succession of highly intelligent and keen young craftsmen is assured by the training received from the older men, and ensures the continuance of that outstanding quality and pride of craftmanship for which our instruments are justly famous.
    • We are always pleased to receive suggestions in connection with our productions and to give such communications our most careful consideration, for we gratefully recognise that our increasing success is in no small measure due to the generous co-operation of our patrons, to whom we are indebted for many valuable suggestions and kind recommendations.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
    • AN INVITATION
    • An invitation is given to all who may be interested in microscopy or scientific instruments to visit our works. A representative, by appointment at the Head Office, will accompany them.
    • ^^/^^/7^///^/7///^^/^/^^^^^
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. i^/^/7/^/7/^/7/77/^/7/7/77^^^^^
    • ^/7/7////7/S////7/7//S//7/7//7/S/S//7/W^^
    • | 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • ^/77//7//7/7//77//7/^/7//^/^/7/7/7^/^^^
  • n.n. - vue 6/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • THE COMPOUND MICROSCOPE
    • 5
    • THE COMPOUND MICROSCOPE
    • The optical system of the Compound Microscope consists of Objective, Eyepiece and Condenser.
    • In the Compound Microscope a real image of the object is formed by the lens-system known as the Objective. This image is formed in air in the body tube of the Microscope at a distance of from 6 to 10 in. from the Objective and is then rendered visible and further enlarged by the Eyepiece. The essential optical elements of a Compound Microscope then are, the Objective and the Eyepiece.
    • The effective working of the Objective depends on the proper illumination of the Object which is under examination. For this purpose optical systems, known as Condensers, are employed for concentrating the light.
    • The Microscope Stand carries the optical system. The effective working and the facility with which objects can be viewed and measured depends on the accuracy of construction and the mechanical conveniences with which the stand is equipped, hence the variety of different models that are offered and described.
    • In this catalogue will be found a range of Objectives, Eyepieces, Condensers, and Microscope Stands, progressing in completeness of construction from the plain types which are suitable for the work of the student, to the advanced models that are necessary for the more ambitious worker and those who are engaged in original research, whose purpose cannot be served by anything but the best.
    • There are branches of investigation which necessitate special arrangements in the design of the Microscope stand, and models are made for such. Thus the special facilities that are offered in the Microscopes that are made for the Metallurgist and Petrologist are redundant to the Biologist. Separate catalogues of these are published as mentioned on page 1.
    • This microscope catalogue, as notified on page 1, is published in seven sections.
    • The descriptions of the optical components precede the Microscope stands, as these are necessary for use with all types of Microscope.
    • 9 g
    • IP 898 8 08 2| 8 sons
    • OS
    • 12: HI 848 5 Konoes
    • ^/^/7/^///////^/7/7/^^7/^M^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. ^/77/7//^//7/7/7/////7/7/7/7/^/7/7/7/7/7^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 7/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 6 OBJECTIVES
    • OBJ ECTIVES
    • However perfectly a Microscope stand may be constructed, the quality of the image seen depends upon the lenses that are used. The selection, therefore, of suitable Objectives for the class of work to be done is of the utmost importance. Consideration must be given to questions of numerical aperture, tube length, working distance, ability to stand high eyepieces, etc. In the following paragraphs we have endeavoured to give some guidance on these important points.
    • The large number and variety of the types of optical glass offer a wide choice in the computations of formulae, and the successful efforts of British optical glass manufacturers to meet the needs of opticians have resulted in the supply of glass which is unsurpassed for the purpose.
    • Great care has been taken by us to eliminate all glasses that are likely to oxidise or decompose. We use hard and durable types of glass, and should any of our Microscope Objectives made subsequent to 1920 exhibit traces of decomposition at any time, we undertake to correct this free of charge, provided that no other damage has been done to the Objective, and it has not been subjected to misuse or injury, and is in the hands of the original purchaser.
    • By constant refinement in methods of manufacture and unremitting severity of inspection the uniform excellence of the Objectives is always maintained at the high standard that is set for them. Only those who are conversant with the modern possibilities of optical work are aware of the wonderful accuracy and perfection of workmanship that is called for and obtained. The computations provide for constituent lenses of a certain thickness and curvature. These are scrupulously adhered to, the surfaces being tested by means of “ proof ” plates, which enable differences of less than one hundred-thousandth of an inch to be perceived, and finally when the components have been cemented together, they are mounted in the Objective mount with the surfaces at prescribed distances from, and accurately centred to, each other. So faithfully is this work carried out, that the number of Objectives that exhibit defects of manufacture or adjustment when subjected to the regular examination and testing, is very small.
    • Tube Length. It cannot be too strongly emphasised that if the Objective is to give its best result it must be used with the proper thickness of cover glass on the object, and with the precise tube length for which it has been adjusted. The expert eye can detect an error in tube length of a few millimetres by the lessened defining power that results.
    • Our standard Objectives, especially those for students’ use, are corrected for a tube length of 160 mm., and the thickness of cover glass for which all our Objectives are corrected is -007 in. (•18 mm.). It must always be remembered that the depth to which the object is embedded in the mountant is equivalent to an increase in cover glass thickness.
    • We are always prepared to supply any of our Objectives, corrected for any length of tube, or to work on uncovered specimens or any specified thickness of cover glass, without extra charge, if notice is given at time of ordering.
    • We usually have in stock in addition to the lenses having standard correction, a number of Objectives that are corrected for metallurgy—for use without cover glass and others to work on tube lengths of 200 and 250 mm.
    • Those who wish to wrest the best results from their equipment should from the commencement familiarise themselves with this most important factor in obtaining resolution. We are always glad to give instruction to those interested if they will visit us.
    • We realise that the more the recognition of quality in Objectives and manipulation of the micro-scope is understood the more the unique advantages of the Watson Microscopes will be appreciated.
    • 7S/rSSSS/SSSS/7S//S/W///SSS/7/SS///S///7////////S////7/7^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ,
    • ^^/7^/7/^/7^///7^/7/^^^/7/7/7y/^/^///i_y/77^^
    • SPANNA sos so
    • E 6 PI g IAS w^ IRI 2 a 0
    • L8
  • n.n. - vue 8/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • OBJECTIVES
    • 7
    • In order that the special and unique features which are incorporated in our Objectives may be more fully appreciated, we would submit the following remarks :—
    • Apochromatic Objectives. These are described on page 11. We recommend them because both visually and photographically they are truly apochromatic, their spherical corrections are such that the whole of their numerical apertures can be effectively used, they will stand deep eyepieces, they give brilliant crisp images. We believe them to be the best Objectives of their type available.
    • Holoscopic Series. The lenses of this series are referred to on pages 12 and 13.
    • These offer wide range of Objectives from 3 in. to 2 mm., computed with exceptionally wide effective apertures combining crisp definition and ability to stand deep 'eyepiecing. A feature of this series is that in common with our Apochromatic Series the back lens is a triple combination. These form a series of truly semi-apochromatic lenses and by the use of light screens which pass light of one range of colour only, are rendered equal in performance to Apochromatic Objectives.
    • Parachromatic Objectives. For general work, which represents probably 90 per cent, of microscopical observation, the lenses of this series are supreme.
    • These are the lenses universally employed in teaching institutions, laboratories, routine work, and by all not engaged on research or similar work necessitating the best optical systems available.
    • Certain conditions have to be satisfied, and performance that is irreproachable is maintained by rigid inspection. In this series we offer Objectives which are recognised throughout the world as yielding unsurpassed results. Their long working distances offer unique convenience in use. The outstanding feature of the Parachromatic series, apart from the general excellence of performance, is the adaptation of the colour correction to coloured objects on which they are almost invariably used.
    • A reference is made to these important features on page 14, but we would here emphasise the immense advantage that is conferred on the average student by the working distance of 1 mm. in the | in. Objective of this series. It enables him to work on bacteriological specimens, counting chambers, etc., with a freedom not associated with lenses having less working distance.
    • The T% in. Oil Immersion Objective (“ Versalic ”) has the same quality in a lesser degree. The maximum working distance is given that will allow of immersion contact being maintained between the cover glass and the front lens of the Objective.
    • Coloured Objects. It has been found in practice that an Objective that may give excellent definition on an uncoloured object does not necessarily perform so well on a stained specimen.
    • This matter has been the subject of long consideration, discussion and experiment; our Objectives are now corrected to yield fine definition on coloured objects, and it will be found that they are no less good on unstained specimens.
    • Flatness of Field. Flatness of field is so often asked for that we think it desirable to mention that this can never be obtained in other than Objectives of low power or low aperture, and this fact applies to Objectives by all makers.
    • 6 b
    • -sons
    • Z
    • 68 8 028
    • 68 z
    • 868 8 00s IES 84
    • 8
    • 8
    • 6
    • 8
    • 2
    • IAi 868 8 ms
    • R hi
    • E s co s 86 3 Soorood
  • n.n. - vue 9/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 8
    • OBJECTIVES
    • Theoretically and practically, all microscope lenses have a curved field, and with high-power Objectives the greater the excellence of the lens, the more particularly does this become apparent. It is possible, by altering the focus, to view separately every zone of the field, but when a specimen is focussed in the centre of the field, this part is absolutely sharp. Flatness of field can only be obtained by sacrificing the maximum sharpness at the focal point, and this produces inferior definition. The necessities of many classes of work render as great a degree of flatness of field as can be discreetly given desirable, and the judicious combination of that effect with the best possible definition in the circumstances is provided.
    • With low powers—1 in., 2 in., 3 in., etc., and those of less magnification, flatness of field can be secured over nearly the entire field, but under no circumstances can flatness of field be produced in a high power lens of large aperture and fine quality—it is an optical impossibility.
    • THE CHOICE OF OBJECTIVES
    • The Objectives that are to be chosen will depend on the class of work that is to be undertaken.
    • The ability of a lens to define fine structure is associated with its numerical aperture, the greater the numerical aperture the larger the number of lines per inch that can be divided. If the unknown is to be investigated, and the limits of resolving power are to be available, Objectives with the largest numerical aperture that can be obtained are essential.
    • The greater part of the work that is done, however, does not call for the use of such lenses. Generally the aim is to see with the utmost clearness, structure which is known and probably described, and for such, lenses of sufficient though comparatively low aperture are satisfactory. Our Parachromatic series meets these requirements in the best possible manner.
    • In choosing Objectives it must be borne in mind that wide numerical aperture necessitates reduction of working distance and increased curvature of field. As a general recommendation we should say that our Parachromatic series will be found to cover the wants of all those who are engaged in work of a general educational and recreational character, but for those who desire the best obtainable, or are doing research work, lenses of the Holoscopic or Apochromatic series must be chosen.
    • An indication of the resolving power yielded by the different apertures will be realised from the following table:
    • N.A. Resolving power in lines per inch. White light. Green light.
    • 1-37 132,082 143,170
    • 1-30 125,333 135,854
    • 0-95 91,590 99,278
    • 0-85 81,949 88,828
    • 0-70 67,487 73,152
    • 0-65 62,667 67,927
    • 0-45 43,385 47,026
    • 0-30 28,923 31,351
    • 0-28 26,995 29,261
    • The attainment of this resolving power is dependent upon the use of fully achroma-tised and aplanatised condensers, of aperture fully corrected and equal to that of the Objective.
    • y/^/^^///7///7/7/7/7^//^/^^^^
    • 3 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. |
    • f^/^/^/7^///^/7A/7/^^A/7^/7^^/7A//7/7/7^^^
    • SOWS di 8 5 RI 6 R pl 0 E sco 86 3 Sorsond
  • n.n. - vue 10/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • OBJECTIVES
    • 9
    • Where two or more Objectives are used for some particular kind of study, one of them is usually employed for the purpose of finding the object or detail, and this Objective should have qualities which make it useful for searching and for a general view of the object. The nature of the objects to be examined and the conditions under which they are viewed are therefore the factors which affect the choice of a set of Objectives for any particular work. In view of the special features associated with every kind of study it is impossible to give general rules which may be applied to the selection of Objectives. It seems better to state what Objectives are actually found most useful in different branches of Microscopy and the following list is offered as the result of considerable experience of expert workers and in accordance with the demands most frequently received.
    • Botany, Zoology and General Biology [2 in.], 3 in. and l in. (0-70 n.a,) Parachromatic. The 2 in. is not always included in sets, but it is a very desirable addition.
    • Animal and Human Histology, 3 in. and 1 in. (0-70 n.a.) Parachromatic.
    • Bacteriology, Serology, Haematology and Pathology, 3 in., J in. (0-70 n.a.) and 15 in. Parachromatic.
    • The eyepieces which would accompany these objectives would be No. 2 ( x 6) and No. 4 ( x 10) or if one only were taken No. 3 ( x 8).
    • In certain branches of these studies it may be advisable to depart from the above recommendations. For the study of the Foraminifera, for instance, a 2-in. and a 1-in. Objective would be more useful than those specified for general zoology. Again, in the study of certain organisms, such as the Rotifera, the inclusion of the 2 in. or an even lower power may be advisable.
    • In Petrography the usual Objectives are 1 in. and 1 in. Occasional use may be made of an immersion Objective. These may be of the Parachromatic series, but if the interference figures from very thin sections are to be examined the extra numerical aperture of the Holoscopic 2 mm. Objective will be useful.
    • In Metallurgy the 3 in. and l in. Parachromatic will be found generally satisfactory. To ensure the finest photomicrographs it is, however, better to adopt the Apochromatic 16 mm. and 4 mm. For the very finest detail the 2 mm. Apochromatic may be added. Metallographic Objectives are made in the same three series as the others, but differ from other Objectives in being corrected for use on an uncovered object. They are also mounted differently. We recommend that for this work a tube length of 200 mm. be used
    • For original research in any branch of study in which the discovery of delicate or very minute detail may be possible, the best Objectives which it is possible to obtain should be used. These are of the Apochromatic series. Visibility of very delicate structure may only be possible through perfect corrections in the Objective as well as to its numerical aperture, so that Apochromatic Objectives of low and medium power which approach perfection so closely are of the greatest value in the study of delicate and elusive details and particularly in Photomicrography where accurate colour rendering is essential.
    • The Amateur Microscopist, who wishes to be able to examine polyzoa one day and the finest structure on the diatomaceae the next, must necessarily be supplied with a wide range of Objectives. Usually, however, the amateur takes advantage of the lower prices of those Objectives which are most in demand, such as the 3 in. and l in. Parachromatic, and adds a lower or higher power as the need arises.
    • SANNA 8 g
    • IP 898 08 2 8 Los
    • OS 80 SH 848 5
    • ^/^/////7//////////^/7/7////7/^/y/7/7///7/77/7^/^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^/ZZ/ZZZZZZZZZ/Z/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/?
  • n.n. - vue 11/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 10
    • OBJECTIVES
    • For technical uses the Objectives which are to be used will depend upon the nature of material to be examined. For the examination of building and paving materials a 2-in. Objective (Para-chromatic) is very suitable. For textiles and paper-making a 2-in. and f-in. would be adequate, with the additions of a l-in. if more than routine work is intended. The same outfit would suit the agriculturalist, but if dairy work is in view a complete bacteriological set should be obtained.
    • If the purchaser is in doubt as to what Objectives should be included with a microscope for any special purpose, Watson’s will be pleased to give the benefit of their experience in meeting similar needs and, if desired, to demonstrate by means of specimens and Objectives what result may reasonably be expected. Such demonstrations may serve to reveal the great possibilities of microscopical methods for certain purposes and also occasionally save disappointment where too much is expected.
    • DARK GROUND ILLUMINATION.
    • High aperture oil immersion Objectives are now available with iris diaphragms incorporated for a small extra charge, obviating the use of the funnel stop.
    • THE PROPER USE OF OBJECTIVES.
    • Watson Objectives have been computed to perform at their best under given conditions. Except the Metallurgical Objectives they are arranged to give optimum results on objects covered with a glass 0-18 mm. in thickness, and require under such conditions that the draw-tube should be set at 160 mm. unless ordered otherwise. If the cover-glass actually used has less thickness than this, then, in the case of Objectives of 0-65 n.a. and more, it may be necessary to increase the tube length in order to obtain good definition. If the cover-glass is thicker than 0-18 mm. the tube should be shortened for best results The adjustment is made by inspection of the image and not by measurement.
    • The immersion Oil used with Watson Objectives should not be purchased elsewhere. A supply of oil is sent with every oil immersion Objective, and fresh supplies can be sent at a reasonable price. Several oils are sold for use with immersion lenses, and they differ greatly in refractive index and dispersive power from the standard article. They may be good oils if Objectives are computed for use with them, but they are not necessarily suited to Watson Objectives. Some immersion oils have a solvent effect on the cement which is used to hold in place the front lenses of Objectives of great numerical aperture. The oil supplied for Watson Objectives is free from this defect.
    • ON APPROVAL.
    • In order to ensure satisfactory selection of Objectives, a purchaser may have Objectives for examination for four days by sending a deposit to cover the value as per list. Those who have an account with Watson’s are not asked for a deposit.
    • ^^//^/^y^/X/^/X/y/y/^/^/^^/X^^
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • ^/////////////////// azez* XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/XXXXXXXXX^XXXXX^^^
    • gg Sos 8 6 1
    • E 6 E gi SHS S W § 820 8
    • 2 s SownoNS
  • n.n. - vue 12/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—OBJECTIVES
    • * *
    • APOCHROMATIC OBJECTIVES
    • 5
    • TUBE LENGTH 160. mmciiiiii’Il UUUiUllJjDiliijlj saga
    • In Objectives constructed entirely with optical glass, even in those of the finest quality such as the Holoscopic series, there remains one outstanding defect which is inherent in the material used, namely, the so-called secondary Spectrum. This arises from the fact that the distribution of colour in the Spectrum produced by the various optical glasses varies with their density, the red end being relatively too long in glasses of low dispersion, and the blue end too long in glasses of high dispersion, the result being that when such glasses are combined to obtain the best achromatism for the brightest part of the visual Spectrum, both the ends of the Spectrum, namely, the red and violet, are refracted too little or, in other words, come to a focus at a greater distance than the middle of the Spectrum; the chief inconvenience arising from the presence of this secondary Spectrum is that the Objectives cannot be used for photographing in white light on ordinary plates, but will only give satisfactory results if Orthochromatic plates and effective colour screens are used. Occasionally the secondary Spectrum also interferes with delicate visual observations because the faint halo of purple light due to it falsifies the true colour of small detail.
    • In Apochromatic Microscope Objectives the removal of the secondary Spectrum depends upon the use of fluorite. We are in possession of optically perfect fluorite and produce Objectives of outstanding merit.
    • In photomicrography of stained or unstained specimens the colour freedom of Apochromatic Objectives ensures outstandingly pure results. Objectives that are truly Apochromatic can be used with a variety of colour filters without need for refocussing.
    • The 16 mm. Apochromatic is not exceptional in aperture. The images given by Objectives of this power in the Parachromatic and Holoscopic series are so sharply defined and so free from colour defects that only the very finest performance can justify an apochromatic 16 mm. The Watson objective does not fall short of this justification, and no images have ever been produced finer than those given by this lens.
    • The 8 mm. Objective offers unique convenience to the busy worker. Its numerical aperture, 0-65, is equivalent to that of many achromatic t” Objectives. With a range of Eyepieces it is therefore possible to use the Objective for surveying a relatively wide area and then by increasing the power of the Eyepiece to concentrate upon any given spot, examining minutely. The perfection of correction both spherically and chromatically will be realised when tests with X50 Eyepieces are carried out. It will be found that no deterioration in the image takes place. This lens is as nearly perfect as possible.
    • With a view to making the 4 mm. Objective most generally useful its numerical aperture has been reduced to 0-85, although it has been customary to make such an Objective to 0-95 n.a. Professor Conrady has shown that the effective aperture of a dry 4 mm. Objective is limited by considerations of critical angle, relation between R.I. of object and mountant. In addition errors increase rapidly as the n.a. approaches 0-95, the depth of focus becomes nil, and the tube length adjustment becomes an operation requiring extreme skill.
    • With the slightly lower n.a. these difficulties are reduced so as to be almost negligible and in the 4 mm. Apochromatic microscopists are offered a lens not only of superb performance, but easy to use.
    • 2 mm. Objective n.a. 1-37. This aperture has been deliberately selected as being the one which permits a relatively firm mounting for the front lens, a working distance such that an object beneath a No. 3 cover glass may be focussed, and ability to stand high eyepieces without breaking down. Finally the whole of the numerical aperture of the Objective can be employed. In every way this Objective is unsurpassed.
    • Code Word. Image distance Equivalent Focal length. Initial Power. Numerical Price. No. Inches. mm. 10 inches. Aperture. £ s. d.
    • Match. Matoa. Mater. Mathe. Matho.* 11101 3 16 15 0-30 5 0 0 11102 3 8 30 0-65 7 0 0 11103 1 4 60 0-85 9 0 0 11104 1 2 120 1'37 Oil Immersion 17 10 0 11105 1: 2 120 1-37 do. 18 10 0 * With iris diaphragm for dark ground illumination incorporated The above may be supplied corrected for any tube length to order.
    • For particulars of mechanical correction for cover glass thickness see page IO.
    • It is essential that compensating or Holoscopic Eyepieces be used with the above Objectives, see page 19.
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 3
    • ^^//7///777^^^7/y/>/7/7/7//7/7///7/^/777/7/7/7/7/7^^^
    • &% Soo § joss ins 8 = s
    • EI Its SHS S wo s 82 s
    • 2 hl Sooooss
  • n.n. - vue 13/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 12
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—OBJECTIVES
    • OBJECTIVES—THE HOLOSCOPIC SERIES (SEMI-APOCHROMATIC)
    • A reference to the illustration will show that the construction of this series of Objectives is not of the usual type, the correction in all Objectives other than those of lower power than 24 mm. depending largely on a cemented triple back combination.
    • The special factors which have made these Objectives famous will be best appreciated from the following considerations.
    • When dealing with the wide-angled pencils and consequent great angles of incidence which occur in microscope Objectives, the usual methods for correcting chromatic and spherical aberration prove inadequate ; their shortcomings lead to the presence in Objectives, produced by their use, of heavy residuals of aberration, known to microscopists as spherical zones, and as spherical difference of chromatic aberration. The former of these defects leads to the formation of untrustworthy images, because the required phase-relation of the light forming the image is falsified, whilst the chromatic residual prevents the taking of presentable photographs of objects ; for it amounts to this, that the Objective although tolerably free from spherical aberration for the visually strongest rays, is affected with heavy spherical aberration for other colours, such as those acting most strongly on a photographic plate.
    • In the Holoscopic Objectives both these defects are minimised ; the spherical correction is carried to high perfection by so determining the data that the rays which are geometrically united in the focus arrive there in exactly equal phase and are thus in the relation theoretically demanded, but not hitherto realised in practice. The exceptionally perfect spherical correction attained in this manner has often been noticed by expert workers and renders the Holoscopic Objectives extremely valuable for all delicate observations, for it reduces the possibility of spurious images to a minimum.
    • Similar perfection has been aimed at in the correction of chromatic aberration, thus rendering the Holoscopic Objective capable of yielding very excellent photographs of microscopical objects, and in order to secure this it was found necessary to adopt entirely new types of Objectives to realise the perfection aimed at, and to produce Objectives equal to the best Apochromatics, except in freedom from secondary colour.
    • These Objectives have been highly praised by expert workers who have purchased them for their excellent performance with deep-power Eyepieces, large solid illuminating Cones, annular and dark-field illumination, and the yielding of exquisite photographic effects.
    • They meet the needs of the original investigator, and all who would possess the best optical means, in the fullest possible manner.
    • The numerical aperture stated is the guaranteed minimum for each Objective. The Lenses may be trusted to have the magnifying power (within a small percentage) corresponding to the equivalent focus given in the list.
    • All Lenses in this series with the exception of the low-power lenses, as noted below, are under-corrected for chromatic differences of magnification ; they should therefore be used in conjunction with our Holoscopic Eyepieces (page 19).
    • The 2 mm. which has a guaranteed minimum aperture of 1-37 n.a., is a superb lens and is only equalled by the Apochromatic Immersion Objective. Microscopists requiring the maximum resolving power will find their wishes satisfied with this lens.
    • Special Note re The three Objectives of lower power than 24 mm. are not under-corrected in the manner Low Powers. that the other Holoscopic Objectives are. They should, therefore, be used either with Huygenian Eyepieces or Holoscopic Eyepieces with the adjusting tube pushed home.
    • RPRNNog 8 2
    • IPs 888 8 08
    • Z g
    • 8 08 808 HI
    • H 0
    • Seoresood
    • zeerereenezeezeceecezececececezveeceececoeeccecceececeeceecezeceeceecereececezezezs , 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. ^7/7///7/7/7/7/7///7//7//y7//^/^//77//^^/7^/7^/77//7^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 14/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—OBJECTIVES
    • 13
    • The Holoscopic Objectives were designed to provide a series of Objectives of high numerical aperture whose performance would be equal to that of the most outstanding Apochromatic Objectives, except in freedom from secondary colour.
    • We cannot stress too highly the perfection of the spherical corrections of these Objectives. High-power Eyepieces can be used without any deterioration of the resultant image.
    • The apertures are such that in conjunction with low-power Eyepieces a comparatively wide field can be surveyed and any local structure more carefully examined by deep Eyepiecing.
    • The Objectives can be corrected for any desired tube length between 140-250 mm.
    • These Objectives must be used in conjunction with the Holoscopic series of Eyepieces.
    • When used in conjunction with colour screens, no difference between these and Apochromatic Objectives will be observed.
    • Special Features.
    • Watson Holoscopic Objectives were designed to meet a demand by expert microscopists for Objectives which would have a greater ratio of numerical aperture to magnifying power than is to be found in any other Objectives.
    • The advantages of this feature of Holoscopic Objectives are :—
    • 1. A greater range of useful magnifying power.
    • 2. A greater working distance for any given numerical aperture.
    • 3. Ability to compensate for the effect of different thicknesses of cover-glass by small changes of tube-length.
    • Code Word. No. Equivalent Focal Length. Initial power Diameters calculated for an image distance of 10 inches. Numerical Aperture. Tube Length. Price.
    • Mm. In.
    • Matin. 11301 75 3 4 0-11 200 £ s. d. 30 0
    • Matri. 11302 50 2 5 0-17 200 2 10 0
    • Matol. 11303 35 11 12 8 0-19 200 2 10 0
    • Medium and High Powers. From stock for 6 inch (160 mm.) and 8 inch (200 mm.) tube length.
    • Matyl. Matte. 11304 11305 25 16 1 2 3 10 15 0-30 0-45 200 200 & 160 £ 4 4 S. 10 10 d. 0 0
    • Matoc. 11306 12 1 2 20 0-65 200 & 160 5 5 0
    • Matry. 11307 8 3 30 0-65 200 & 160 5 5 0
    • Matro. 11308 6 1 4 45 0-95 200 6 5 0
    • Matur. 11309 4 6 60 0-95 200 & 160 6 5 0
    • Maude. 113010 2 1 12 Oil Immersion } 120 1-37 200 & 160 10 0 0
    • Maud.* 113011 2 do. 120 1-37 200 & 160 II 0 0 *
    • * With iris diaphragm incorporated for use in dark ground illumination.
    • l^/y/y/^/^/y^/y/7/yxA<^/>y/7/yy^^^
    • € W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ,
    • VZ/ZZZZ/ZZ//ZZZZZZ/ZZZZZ/ZZZ//////ZZZZZZZ/ZZZ/ZZ/Z/Z/ZZ/ZZZZZZ//////Z////ZZZ/////ZZ/Z/Z^
    • 3 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZzzzx/zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz/y'zzzzzzzzzzz^
  • n.n. - vue 15/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 14
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—OBJECTIVES
    • OBJECTIVES-THE PARACHROMATIC SERIES
    • Universities, Schools and many workers find all their requirements satisfied by Objectives of medium aperture provided that the whole of the available aperture is effective and the performance irreproachable. The Objectives listed in the Parachromatic series are in all respects unsurpassed, while they also incorporate features which make them unequalled for general work.
    • Advances in design and performance of microscope Objectives are dependent not only upon the skill of the mathematician, but also upon the types and quality of the optical glass available.
    • It is now common knowledge that optical glass produced at the present time by the English glass makers is equal in quality and in many instances superior to that made elsewhere.
    • Full advantage of these improvements has been taken by Watsons’ technical department.
    • There is no finality in optical construction. Unceasing research in optical design is carried on and wherever possible advances are indicated the Objective is recomputed. Thus the computations and formulae to which many of these Objectives are made show a distinct advance since the last catalogue was issued.
    • GENERAL NOTE.
    • The following features are common to all the Objectives in this series :
    • The spherical and chromatic corrections are such that they can be used in conjunction with high-power eyepieces without breaking down.
    • The whole of the numerical aperture of each Objective can be utilised providing always that there is a sufficient contrast between the refractive index of the mountant and the refractive index of the specimen.
    • LOW POWERS-(4 in. to J in.).
    • Low-power Objectives are not distinctly sensitive to correction for tube length, and may generally be used between 160 and 250 mm. without material depreciation in definition. A wide range of magnifying power can therefore be obtained with such Objectives. Further, flatness of field which cannot be imparted in Objectives of high power is an outstanding feature of these low powers.
    • MEDIUM POWERS-(I in. to I in.).
    • These Objectives are exceptionally fine in performance, and all of them have the special and unique quality of a long working distance between the front lens of the Objective and the object under examination.
    • The % in. is the Objective of medium power with which Laboratory work generally is done, and the competition to produce a lens of outstanding merit of this power is so keen that excepting it be to the universally demanded high standard of excellence it would be impossible to sell it at all.
    • This 1 in. Objective of the Parachromatic series has found universal favour. Not only has it on numerous occasions been ordered to replace similar lenses of other makes, but its many advantages have led to its standardisation in teaching institutions. It is, in fact, the ideal type of Objective for all classes of medium-power work. It has corrections similar to those of the Apochromatic, and is classed as semi-Apochromatic. The same lens is made with two different numerical apertures, viz., -70 and -80. The great feature of it is that the former has unusually long working distance of 1 mm. The field is relatively flat. It will, in fact, be found flatter than many other Objectives of equal aperture.
    • An ample working distance in a lens of this power has long been a desideratum, but it has hitherto been so short that difficulty has been experienced in focussing through the cover-glass of a Haemacytometer, or any other than a No. 2 (-008 in.) cover-glass.
    • The examination of objects with thick covering glasses with our % in. has proved an immense boon to workers. This does not cause the sacrifice of other important qualities—in fact its perfection of correction, both for spherical and chromatic aberration, renders it exceptionally fine in performance. This, allied with its great working distance, makes it superior to any other lens produced at the present time for all who use their instruments on other than specially mounted specimens, and it particularly appeals to Students, Laboratory workers, and those who are interested in pond life.
    • 4" OBJECTIVE FOR UNCOVERED OBJECTS.
    • Modern staining technique and rapid examination of blood films necessitate the viewing of uncovered specimens. The usual design of % in. Objective provides for a cover-glass and, consequently, when an object is examined without this, definition must deteriorate. To meet a very general demand Watsons have designed a J in. Objective for the use of the metallurgist and technician which is corrected for use on uncovered specimens.
    • OIL IMMERSIONS.
    • These are made in three magnifications and four types. The 1 in. Oil Immersion is intended for those who do a certain amount of bacteriological work and wish to combine in one Objective the qualities of the % in. and the 1 in. The numerical aperture 0-94 is kept low so that the use of a funnel stop for the examination of living spirochaetae, etc. is unnecessary. It can, in fact, be used with ordinary Dark Ground Illumination as it stands. Workers who are unaccustomed to the use of medium-power Oil Immersion Objectives will be astonished at the brilliant definition that is obtained with this lens. The working distance of the lens of 0-5 mm. is such that it can be used advantageously in conjunction with the thick cover-glass of a Thoma Haemacytometer.
    • Hceng 8 9
    • IP 89
    • 8 0s 2 89 Sons
    • 5 U & § Sooooood
    • ^/'/7^/7/////7/7//^^/7/7/7/7/^/7/////7///77/7/^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^/7^/7777/7^/y/7/7/7/7/^^^^/^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 16/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—OBJECTIVES
    • 15
    • 12" OIL IMMERSION.
    • The same lens is made in two types—the " Versalic ” with a numerical aperture of 1-28 and the “ Utility » with a numerical aperture of 1*25.
    • In conformity with the usual rule these are called 1 in., but the magnifying power and focus is actually that of a 1 in. in each instance.
    • Both these lenses have a flatter field than other first-class Objectives of similar type. They also have a long work-ing distance. In the case of the " Versalic ” it is *43 mm. Although this is so very considerable, the maintenance of oil contact is perfect.
    • An important feature of the " Versalic ” Objective is that the front lens is held in position by a metal bezel and is not dependent on cement, as usually prevails in other Oil Immersion Objectives.
    • The probability of the front lens being displaced by pressure or other circumstances does not arise in this instance. The front lens is fixed in a manner which renders it practically immovable.
    • All the Objectives of the Parachromatic series are specially computed for work on stained objects, but the amateur will find that he is at no disadvantage on colourless objects in consequence. They are the best lenses for Students, Laboratory, and general work that are produced.
    • 16" OIL IMMERSION.
    • For the Cytologist, high magnification is sometimes even more important than high resolving power. The 1 in. Oil Immersion Objective has been introduced to meet this need. The numerical aperture is- 1-30, and it can be used in conjunction with the deepest eyepieces, giving a range of magnification up to 2000 diameters.
    • I" WATER IMMERSION.
    • This is specially designed for the Ecologist and all wishing to examine specimens without previous preparation. It can also be used for specimens in alcohol, but the setting of the front lens cannot be guaranteed for a long period.
    • 19" WATER IMMERSION.
    • The demand in recent years for a lens of this type has led to the introduction of this Objective. It will be found very useful to the Biologist, Zoologist, and other workers.
    • Low-power Objective.
    • 2 in.to J in.
    • Z
    • Eh
    • 2
    • 2 5
    • Medium-power Objective. % in. to $ in.
    • Oil Immersion Objective. 12 in-
    • Code Word. No. Focal Length. Initial Power at 10 in. Numerical Aperture. Price
    • in. mm. £ s. d.
    • Maund 11501 4 100 3 0-08 2 0 0
    • Mauso 11502 3 75 4 0-09 2 0 0
    • Mavis 11503 2 50 6 0-15 2 0 0
    • Mawle 11504 11 35 8 0-17 2 0 0
    • Mawke 11505 1 25 12 0-21 1 12 6
    • Maxil 11506 3 16 15 0-28 1 12 6
    • Mayon 11507 1 12 20 0-34 2 0 0
    • Maypo 11508 6 42 0-68 3 5 0
    • Maxon 11509 4 65 0-70 3 5 0
    • Maxbu 115010 4 65 0-70 3 5 0
    • Mazar 115011 4 65 0-80 3 15 0
    • Meado 115012 % 3 Oil Immersion § 83 0-88 3 15 0
    • Meage 115013 1 3-4 77 0.94 5 10 0
    • Mealt 115014 1 Utility 1-8 140 1-25 5 0 0
    • Meala 115015 1 Versalic 1-8 140 1-28 6 10 O+
    • Mexte 115016 1 1-5 Water Immersion 160 1-30 10 0 OT
    • Mew at 115017 1 3-4 77 0-84 5 10 0
    • Mxwat 115018 1 1-8 140 1-15 6 10 0
    • * This Objective is for use on uncovered specimens, such as blood-films.
    • T 115019 Extra for iris diaphragm incorporated in mount obviating use of funnel stop in dark ground illumination, 17/6 § The price includes an oil bottle and supply of oil.
    • S000008 s a
    • SRI 888 8 0 8 808 (8 sons
    • OS
    • 80 8 HI SH8 5 Sooeeoes
    • 300000008 803 80s g 8 FI 2
    • IHS 8 wd 8 0:
    • 821 2 s 6 &.• 8 SeoooooR
  • n.n. - vue 17/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 16
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—OBJECTIVES
    • OBJECTIVES FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES
    • TANK OBJECTIVES
    • For the examination of objects immersed in water a series of three Objectives has been developed.
    • They will be found of great use for the study of living organisms which are anchored to aquatic plants or to such as will creep about the bottom of a small beaker or tank. In use, the front lens must be submerged below the surface of the water.
    • Vertical illumination can be used with marked success with these Objectives and details elucidated which would otherwise be unnoticed.
    • Code Word. No. Focal Length. J £ rice. S. d.
    • in. mm.
    • Mauge 11601 1 25 2 2 0
    • Maule 11602 2 3 16 2 2 0
    • Maumo 11603 * 12 2 2 0
    • VARIABLE POWER OBJECTIVES
    • For elementary schools and for work where relatively low magnifications are required a variable power Objective has been designed. The initial power of the Objective is varied by altering the separation of the combinations. A rotating collar is fitted for this purpose.
    • Code Word. No. Focal Length. Initial Power. Price. £ s. d.
    • Mealk 11604 14 in. to 3 in. 8 to 15 2 10 0
    • PHOTO-MICROGRAPHIC OBJECTIVES
    • HOLOSTIGMAT SERIES
    • These Objectives are mounted with the R.M.S. Objective thread, will fit any standard microscope, and have an iris diaphragm and scale. They are for use without eyepieces, and for penetration and colour correction they are unsurpassed, the definition being needle sharp to the edge of the plate.
    • Biarl No. 11605 1 in. focal length f/3 £ 7 S. 10 d. 0
    • Biant 11606 2 in. focal length f/6 6 0 0
    • Biblo 11607 3 in. focal length f/6 6 0 0
    • "ARGUS" OBJECTIVES
    • To meet the demand for inexpensive Objectives of low power the “ Argus ” series has been designed.
    • Each Objective of the series consists of an Achromatic doublet and gives the most brilliant and best defined image obtainable from such a combination.
    • Code Word. No. Focal Length. Initial Power. Numerical Aperture.
    • in. mm. £ s. d.
    • Myale 11608 . 3 75 3 0-07 12 6
    • Mayne 11609 2 50 5 0-11 12 6
    • Maygi 116010 14 35 8 0-13 12 6
    • Mayed 116011 1 25 10 0-15 12 6
    • Maygx 116012 2* 3 16 15 0-17 12 6
    • * Contrary to usual practice this Objective consists of two Achromatised doublets.
    • SOWS
    • 8 is P 898 8 08 10
    • 2|
    • gol
    • 8 08 80s ini
    • BI
    • SANNNone
    • XXXXXXX 313 VVYKH HIGH XXXXXXXXXXXVXXXXXRX0 HOLBORN. VXXXXF3 w.c. I
    • ^^A^y/y/yy/^^^'^/^/'^/^/yxT^/y^/Ty^x/'^^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 18/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—OBJECTIVES
    • FIGURES IN ITALICSFIELD OF VIEW
    • 17
    • Para-chromatic Objectives. Primary Magnification at 160 mm. tube length. Micro-metric value. Combined magnifications at 160 mm. tube length with Huygenian eyepieces, and field of view. Para-CHROMATIC Objectives. Primary Magnification at 160 mm. tube length. Micro-metric value. Combined magnifications at 160 mm. tube length with Holoscopic eyepieces and field of view.
    • x 5 x 6 x 8 x 10 x 12 x 15 x 7 x 10 x 14 x 20
    • Inch. 28-0 32-0 28-0 23-0 22-0 17-5 Inch. 26-0 21-0 14-7 9-8
    • 4 0-6 250(1 3 4 5 6 7 9 4 0-6 250(2 4 6 8 12
    • 14-5 16-5 14-0 11-7 11-6 9-5 13-3 11-0 7-5 5-2
    • 3 1-25 200(1 6 7 10 12 15 19 3 1-25 200(1 9 12 17 25
    • 7-8 8-5 7-6 6-0 6-2 5-0 7-1 5-8 4-0 2-8
    • 2 2-5 58(1 12 15 20 25 30 37 2 2-5 58(1 17 25 35 50
    • 5-5 6-0 5-5 4-4 4-3 3-5 5-0 4-0 2-8 2-0
    • 1 3-5 41(1 17 21 28 35 42 52 11 3-5 41(1 24 35 49 70
    • 3-3 3-75 3-3 2-73 2-6 2-1 3-0 2-4 1-72 1-22
    • 1 6 25(1 30 36 48 60 72 90 1 6 25(1 42 60 84 120
    • 2-13 2-25 2-06 1-7 1-69 1-35 1-95 1-59 1-09 0-78
    • 2 3 9 16-0(1 45 54 72 90 108 135 2 9 16-0(1 63 90 126 180
    • 1-47 1-59 1-45 1-19 1-18 0-94 1-35 1-11 0-76 0-55
    • 1 2 13 11-3(1 65 78 104 130 156 195 1 2 13 11-3(1 91 130 182 260
    • 0-73 0-77 0-71 0-58 0-58 0-46 0-66 0-54 0-37 0-26
    • 1 4 26 5-5(1 130 156 208 260 312 390 1 4 26 5-5(1 182 260 364 520
    • 0-45 0-48 0-45 0-37 0-36 0-29 0-41 0-34 0-23 0-17
    • 1 6 42 3-5(1 210 252 336 420 504 630 1 6 42 3-5(1 294 420 588 840
    • 0-44 0-47 0-44 0-36 0-36 0-28 0-40 0-33 0-23 0-16
    • *o.1) 42 3-5(1 210 252 336 420 504 630 *o.i.) 42 3-5(1 294 420 588 840
    • 0-27 0-28 0-26 0-22 0-22 0-17 0-25 0-20 0-14 0-10
    • 1 8 51 2-1(1 255 306 408 510 612 765 1 8 70 2-1(1 490 700 980 1400
    • 0-27 0-28 0-26 0-22 0-22 0-17 0-25 0-20 0-14 0-10
    • 1 60 2-1(1 300 360 480 600 720 900 1 9 70 2-1(1 490 700 980 1400
    • 0-20 0-21 0-20 0-16 0-16 0-13 0-18 0-15 0-10 0-07
    • P(o.1.) 96 1-5(1 480 576 768 960 1152 1440 7(0.1.) 96 1-5(1 672 960 1344 1920
    • 0-17 0-18 0-17 0-14 0-14 0-11 0-16 0-13 0-09 0-06
    • 16(o.i.) 106 1-3(1 530 636 848 1060 1272 1590 1e(o.i.) 106 1-3(1 742 1060 1484 2120
    • Holoscopic Objectives. Primary Magnification at 160 mm. tube length. Micro-metric value. Combined magnifications at 160 mm. tube length with Holoscopic eyepieces, and field of view. Holoscopic Objectives. Primary Magnification at 200 mm. tube length. Micro-metric value. Combined magnifications at 200 mm. tube length with Holoscopic eyepieces, and field of view.
    • x 7 x 10 x 14 x 20 x 7 x 10 x 14 x 20
    • mm. 3-0 2-4 1-68 1-20 mm. 2-3 1-9 1-31 0-94
    • 25 6 24-8(1. 42 60 84 120 25 8 19-3(2 56 80 112 160
    • 2-15 1-76 1-21 0-87 1-67 1-39 0-94 0-68
    • 16 8 18-0(1 56 80 112 160 16 10 14-2(2 70 100 140 200
    • 1-38 1-12 0-77 0-56 1-08 0-89 0-62 0-44
    • 12 13 11-6(1 91 130 182 260 12 16 9-2(2 112 160 224 320
    • 0-88 0-72 0-50 0-36 0-7 0-58 0-40 0-29
    • 8 19 7-3(1 133 190 266 380 8 24 5-8(2 168 240 336 480
    • 0-73 0-60 0-41 0-29 0-59 0-48 0-33 0-24
    • 6 23 6-2p. 161 230 322 460 6 30 4-9(2 210 300 420 600
    • 0-46 0-38 0-26 0-19 0-38 0-31 0-21 0-15
    • 4 37 3-9(1 259 370 518 740 4 46 3-2(2 322 460 644 920
    • 0-21 0-17 0-11 0-08 0-17 0-14 0-09 0-07
    • 2(o.i.) 84 1-7(1 588 840 1174 1680 2(o.i.) 104 1-4(2 728 1040 1456 2080
    • Primary Primary
    • Apo- Magnification at 160 mm. Micro- Combined magnification^ at 160 Apo- Magnification at 200 mm. tube Micro- Combined magnifications at 200
    • Chromatic metric mm. tube length ivith Holoscopic CHROMATIC metric mm. tube length with Holoscopic
    • Objectives. value. eyepieces, and field of view. Objectives. value. eyep ieces, and field of view.
    • length. X 7 x 10 x 14 x 20 length. x7 x 10 x 14 x 20
    • mm. 2-15 1-76 1-21 0-87 mm. 1-67 1-39 0-94 0-68
    • 16 8 18-0(1 56 80 112 160 16 10 14-2(2 70 100 140 200
    • 0-89 0-73 0-49 0-36 0-71 0-59 0-40 0-29
    • 8 19 7-6(1 133 190 266 380 8 24 6-1(2 168 240 336 480
    • 0-46 0-38 0-26 0-19 0-38 0-31 0-21 0-15
    • 4 37 3-9(1 259 370 518 740 4 46 3-2(2 322 460 644 920
    • 0-21 0-17 0-12 0-08 0-17 0-14 0-10 0-07
    • _ 2(o.i.) 84 1-7(1 588 840 1174 1680 2(o.i.) 104 1-4(2 728 1040 1456 2080
    • B
  • n.n. - vue 19/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 18
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—OCULARS
    • Student’s Eyepiece.
    • EYEPIECES OR OCULARS
    • Watson’s Eyepieces are made in two patterns— the Universal small, or Student’s size, 23'3 mm. (-9173 in.) dia., and the large size of the Royal Microscopical Society, with caps, to ensure correct position of the eye, 32-26 mm. (1-27 in.) dia.
    • Eyepieces of small diameter may be used in draw-tubes of large diameter by the use of an adapter costing 7/6.
    • HUYGENIAN EYEPIECES
    • This series of Eyepieces has been the subject of considerable experiment and re-computation. It has been found in consequence, that the use of selected optical glasses, instead of the usual ordinary crown
    • Best Capped Eyepiece,
    • glass, worked to ascertained curves gives results that are superior to those ordinarily obtainable.
    • We strongly recommend microscopists to try our Huygenian Eyepieces, and make comparisons between those of our current make and any others they may have hitherto used.
    • Huygenian Eyepieces 1-4 Student’s size are all parfocal so that on interchanging the different powers the object remains in focus.
    • The advantage of this in Laboratory practice is obvious.
    • The magnifying power of each Eyepiece is engraved on the eyecap. This figure represents the number of times the Eyepiece will magnify the image produced by the Objective of the microscope.
    • The Eyepieces also bear an ordinal number 1 to 6, which corresponds with the old notation of A, B, C, etc.
    • Code Word. No. Number I 2 3 4 5 6
    • Power x5 x 6 x8 x 10 x 12 x 15
    • Mcasl. 11801 Price for Universal Size. £ s. d. 0 10 0 £ s. d. 0 10 0 £ s. d. 0 10 0 £ s. d. 0 10 0 £ s. d. 0 15 6 £ s. d. 0 15 6
    • Meand. 11802 Price for Large Capped Size. 15 0 15 0 15 0 110 0 IIO 0 110 0
    • LARGE SIZE CAPPED EYEPIECES
    • These actually produce a more brilliant and slightly larger field. They have definite advantages both in Photomicrography and dark ground illumination. The longer eyepoint allows ample space for the use
    • of spectacles.
    • DAYLIGHT EYEPIECES
    • The daylight filter supplied for use in the condenser is often lost. Watsons have secured a supply of daylight filter glass of the correct constants and it is used for the field lenses. For many purposes these Eyepieces have been found most useful. They are made in two magnifications No. 2 X6, No. 4 X 10 at 15/- each.
    • 11806 11807
    • EYEPIECES FOR MICROMETER, CROSS WEB, etc.
    • X6 Eyepieces are recommended for this purpose. The field is sufficiently flat. In eyepieces of higher magnification curvature of the field vitiates all save the central measurements. There are occasions when these higher magnifications are essential and such eyepieces are therefore listed.
    • £s.d.
    • Meaot 11803 X6 HUYGENIAN EYEPIECE with focussing eyelens ... ... ... 0 15 Q Meaop 11804 X8 „ ,, ,, „ ... ... ... 0 15 0 Mepot 11805 X10 ., ‘ „ „ 0 15 0
    • POINTER TO EYEPIECES—If fitted at time of ordering, add to price of eyepiece ... 0 5 0
    • SANNNNX hi
    • 8
    • IP 88 2 lgl 8 08
    • 2 08
    • HS 88
    • BI & & vooeoonk
    • s 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^/7/7/y///////7///^/7/^/7//^/^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 20/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • OPTICAL EQUIPMENT—EYEPIECES
    • 19
    • “ HOLOSCOPIC” EYEPIECES
    • 0)
    • O
    • 2
    • U;
    • These Eyepieces are designed to work with all types of objectives, making it unnecessary to have two series of Eyepieces if Parachromatic and Apochromatic or Holoscopic Objectives are used.
    • In Achromatic Objectives corrections are carried out in the Objective itself and the Eyepiece serves to a large extent as a magnifier.
    • Apochromatic systems, however, are based upon a different conception of design. The Objective besides being corrected spherically is corrected chromatically for two colours only, the remaining correction being carried out by the Eyepiece.
    • MOS.
    • Thus the owner of Objectives Achromatic and Apochromatic should—to obtain the best results—have a set of Eyepieces for each. Further as the total correction necessary varies from computer to computer there should be a complete series of compensating Eyepieces provided for each different make of Apochromatic Objectives.
    • To overcome this very serious difficulty Prof. Conrady designed the Holoscopic Eyepieces. A variable separation between two corrected combinations is provided. For Achromatic Objectives the lenses are brought as nearly as possible together, for the Holoscopic series the lenses are separated to about the third division, for Apochromats to the fifth to eighth division dependant upon the amount of correction required.
    • The magnifying powers are engraved on the caps of the Eyepieces and are calculated for the Eyepiece when the adjusting tube is closed.
    • Holoscopic Eyepieces offer the further advantage that they give a flatter and more uniformly defined field than the ordinary Huygenian Eyepieces. They can be used advantageously with any make of Apochromatic Objectives.
    • Code Word. No. Power. x 5 x7 x 10 x 14 x 20
    • Mecha. 11901 Price for Universal Size. Not made £ s. d. 2 0 0 £ s. d. 20 0 £ s. d. 2 0 0 £ s. d. 2 0 0
    • Medle. 11902 Price for Large Capped Size. £ s. d. 2 15 0 2 15 0 2 15 0 2 15 0 2 15 0
    • Holoscopic Eyepieces are made in two patterns—the ordinary Student’s universal size, and the large capped pattern. The large capped pattern gives a bigger and more brilliant field. Either kind can be used with any tube length.
    • SON & SONS -ONDON
    • THE PROJECTION EYEPIECE
    • for Photo-Micrography and Micro-Projection.
    • These Eyepieces may be used advantageously with Objectives of either the Apochromatic or ordinary series, for photographic purposes, projecting an exquisitely sharp image on the plate. A divided circle is provided, the figures of which record the adjustment for camera extension. For visual focussing the pointer should be set to the division marked 0. When photographing, the Eyepiece is correctly set when the focussed image of the diaphragm forms a sharp edge to the photographic picture. Made in the Student’s (-9173 in.) size.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Medif 11903 Initial magnifying power, x 6 ... ... 2 10 0
    • Medeg 11904 Adapters between Student’s Eyepieces
    • and any larger size ... ... ... 0 7 6
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 zezzecezeezeetzseezeccecceeccecekcecezececceeccReccecceeccere*
    • SNNNNNS o Sos gi 6 EI hl SHs 8 wd 8 80 85 8 2| hi 9
  • n.n. - vue 21/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 20
    • ANGLE EYEPIECE
    • COMPARATOR EYEPIECE
    • Him ill mil
    • To enable two microscopic objects to be accurately compared they must be seen with the same eye in the same field of view.
    • Watson s Comparator Eyepiece is constructed to connect two microscopes and by a series of reflecting prisms to present the images formed by the two microscopes in the field of view of a single Eyepiece. By its means the similarity or dissimilarity between two objects may be instantly detected. The appliance is particularly valuable in every branch of research, industrial and forensic investigations.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Mefas 12001 Comparator Eyepiece complete with Ramsden Eyepiece, to
    • attach to two microscopes ... ... ... ... ... 12 10 0
    • ANGLE EYEPIECE
    • When observing living organisms, loose material or unmounted objects in fluid by means of the microscope it is necessary to keep the stage of the instrument in a horizontal position, in which case the optical axis of the objective must be vertical. In such circumstances it has usually been necessary to direct the eye vertically downwards, a condition which is not only uncomfortable for the muscles of the neck, but also renders vision less distinct. Really delicate observations cannot be made in this manner.
    • Watson’s Angle Eyepiece enables the observer to obtain all the advantages of an inclined microscope tube while maintaining the stage in a horizontal position. The image is presented to the observer in the same position as a book or other object placed for comfortable vision.
    • Watson’s Angle Eyepiece is an attachment the lower end of which slides into the draw-tube and the
    • upper end receives any ordinary eyepiece. The middle portion contains an accurately ground and polished prism which receives the rays from the objective and reflects them completely so that the optical axis of the instrument is deflected 75 degrees. A clamping screw attaches the fitting to the draw-tube of the microscope so as to prevent rotation. The slight increase of tube length may be overcome by the use of slightly thinner covers if desired.
    • Code Word. Mefol
    • No.
    • 12002
    • Angle Eyepiece, as described, to fit standard draw-tube
    • £ s. d.
    • 2 10 0
    • ^yrsssssssssssssssssx&ssssss^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. I tree zeeziezezezzeezcoe ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/>ZZ'ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
    • ^ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZX vereverevverzoryoyy*
    • 3I3 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
  • n.n. - vue 22/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • DUPLEX EYEPIECE
    • 21
    • DUPLEX EYEPIECE
    • The Duplex Eyepiece enables two observers to view an object at the same time, the side tube receiving an image by reflection from the direct eyepiece.
    • By its use a demonstrator can refer to details in an object by means of a movable pointer for the benefit of the observer at the direct eyepiece.
    • The images are orientated in relation to each other and there is a slight difference of magnification.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Medij 12101
    • Medoc 12102
    • £ s. d. Duplex Eyepiece, Universal size ... 5 15 0
    • Tinted glass to render images equal in intensity ... ... ... ... 0 10 0
    • DEMONSTRATION EYEPIECE
    • By means of a special system of reflecting prisms similar to that of a high power binocular eyepiece the image of the object formed by the objective is seen simultaneously at the same magnification and orientation in each eyepiece. Both observers look in a downward direction. A movable pointer is controlled by the teacher and can be directed to any structure in the field.
    • This Demonstration Eyepiece is the best that has been devised and will be found invaluable for the explanation of complex structures.
    • Code Word. No, £ s. d.
    • Mefem 12103 Demonstration Eyepiece complete with indicator ... I0 10 0
    • OTHER SPECIAL EYEPIECES MADE:
    • Binocular pattern.
    • Drawing pattern.
    • Ehrlich pattern for blood counting.
    • Micrometer pattern, various, Konimeter pattern.
    • For particulars, see Part
    • Petrological pattern.
    • Photographic Camera.
    • Pinhole Eyepiece for centring.
    • Spectroscopic pattern.
    • Watching Eyepiece.
    • of this catalogue.
    • f W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
  • n.n. - vue 23/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 22
    • NOSEPIECES OR OBJECTIVE CHANGERS
    • NOSEPIECES OR OBJECTIVE CHANGERS
    • Watson Double and Triple Nosepieces are made with carefully fitted plates which exclude dust. To ensure accurate centration each Objective fitting is provided with tangential adjustment, and Objects found with the low power Objectives will be found in the same position of the field with each succeeding power when rotated on the nosepiece.
    • These Nosepieces should be rotated in one direction only (clockwise) an arrow being engraved to show this direction. This arrangement ensures continued accuracy. Their internal and external screws will fit all standard Objectives and microscopes.
    • Note.—When Nosepieces are fitted to Microscopes, the Nose-pieces should be fixed so that they project outwards, otherwise they are liable to catch against the Microscope itself. If preferred nosepieces can be supplied to rotate in either direction.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Mated 12201 Double Nosepiece, for two Objectives
    • Maste 12202 Triple Nosepiece, for three Objectives
    • Masto 12203 Quadruple Nosepiece for four Objectives
    • £ s. d.
    • I 5 0
    • IIO 0 118 0
    • CENTRING NOSEPIECE
    • To ensure that the axis of an Objective shall coincide with the axis of a rotating stage or of another Objective or Condenser a centring Nosepiece is made.
    • Centration is effected by means of two radial screws.
    • Code Word.
    • £ s. d.
    • Masty 12204 ... ... ... ... ... 1 10 0
    • NOSEPIECE IRIS DIAPHRAGM OR DAVIS SHUTTER
    • Code Word. Ro.
    • Peace 12205
    • B 3462
    • Iris Diaphragm fitted in an adapter to interpose between Objective and Nosepiece for the purpose of controlling the aperture of the Objective. It is of value in dark ground illumination and for increasing penetration.
    • It can be set with the handle in any direction.
    • £ s. d.
    • .......................................... 12 6
    • Peaky 12206 Ditto, with substage adapter to enable Objectives to be used
    • as Condensers ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 17 6
    • J7/>7/////>W/////ZW///////////////>Z//^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • '//vr/7/’S//7Xr/7///>s/sssssss/rsssssssss.s7s/s//r//.^^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • v////////////////////////////////////////////////^
  • n.n. - vue 24/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CONDENSERS—SUBSTAGE 23
    • CONDENSERS-SUBSTAGE
    • The exacting demands of modern teaching and research work have emphasized the importance of the condenser in the microscopist’s equipment, and a range of condensers both for transmitted light and dark ground illumination, for photomicrography and projection is offered. The following notes will serve as a guide to those who wish to select condensers for any particular purpose :
    • Direct Light without a Condenser. For objectives up to and including 1 in. sufficient illumination for ordinary class work is available from the concave mirror, the curve of which is such as to cause a pencil of rays from the illuminant to be brought to an approximate focus in the plane of the stage.
    • The Abbe Illuminator. For routine school and teaching purposes the Abbe Illuminator will be found sufficient. This condenser is neither achromatised nor aplanatised and was introduced by Professor Abbe for the universal use of Students and Laboratories because of its insensibility to centring, and its capability of illuminating. It is popular where concentration of light on the specimen is desired but where ultimate resolution is not essential. It is specially effective for dark ground illumination.
    • CORRECTED CONDENSERS
    • It has been shown that the total resolving power of any microscope system is not only dependent upon the numerical aperture of the Objective but is equivalent to the mean of the aplanatic aperture of the condenser and of the Objective. Thus, the conventional equipment of oil immersion Objective and Abbe condenser cannot in any circumstances give the full resolving power of the Objective. This ’will be seen from the equation.
    • Numerical aperture of _ 0-65 + 1-28 _ 1-93
    • oil immersion Objective = 2 = 2*
    • Aplanatised aperture of Abbe Condenser
    • In research work, therefore, or in any work where unknown structure is to be investigated and the full resolving power of the Objective is to be employed a Condenser of aplanatic aperture equal to that of the Objective should be used. There arise certain objections to this: for instance, the Botanist or the Zoologist uses the immersion Objective but seldom. The purchase, therefore, of a condenser with an aperture when immersed equivalent to that of an oil immersion Objective would be an unnecessary expense and the Universal or the Parachromatic Condensers will be found ideal. Conversely, if the Bacteriologist, Pathologist or Cytologist wish to wrest the utmost from their equipment they should select—as their work is predominantly carried out with immersion oil Objectives—the Holoscopic oil immersion condenser. This condenser is so designed that it may be used dry at an aperture of 0-95.
    • The general routine worker will find a distinct gain in the use of these condensers in his daily practice. With the exception of the Abbe Condenser, all condensers offered are not only aplanatised but also achromatised. It is not sufficient to purchase an Objective such as the Holoscopic, Apochromatic, or even modern Parachromatic in which colour corrections have been carried to a high degree of perfection and expect that the chromatic beam yielded by the Abbe Condenser will assist these to give optimum results. Objectives are not capable of eliminating colour when this is in the beam of light transmitted through them, their corrections are necessarily based upon the assumption of a corrected beam of light. Under these circumstances a combination of the Parachromatic Objectives with the Universal or Holoscopic Condensers will give superior results to a combination of these Objectives with an Abbe Condenser, while the results will be superior to the use of Apochromatic Objectives with an Abbe Condenser.
    • Recent developments of substage design have led to the introduction of Condenser changers of similar design to Objective changers. The objection to the use of several condensers when it was necessary to shift the whole substage apparatus is now overcome, and in addition to the centring screws to the substage Watson’s research condenser changers to-day incorporate separate centring arrangements on the condenser slides themselves. It is thus possible to have a series of condensers all interchangeable on the same substage of the microscope and all co-axial, immediate exchange can be made without the necessity for recentring on each occasion. To the busy worker, especially those using dark ground illumination, this adjunct will be found advantageous.
    • Three forms of dark ground condenser are offered. The Holoscopic Immersion Paraboloid which has found such favour among all workers, which is standardised by the Indian Government for all medical services, by H.M. Admiralty for use throughout the Fleet, and by many teaching Institutions, is retained. This Condenser will be found the most satisfactory for general diagnostic practice; it should be used with Objectives whose aperture is less than 1-0. An oil immersion Objective may be employed provided a funnel stop or iris diaphragm for reducing aperture is inserted. Alternatively, we recommend the semi-apochromatic 1 in. oil immersion Objective 0-94 N.A. for this purpose.
    • The Cassegrain Dark Ground Condenser is made for use with all Objectives up to 1-40 N.A., dependent upon the refractive index of the medium employed. Thus specimens mounted in water or serum the refractive index of which is 1-33 should be examined with Objectives having an aperture not greater than 1-28.
    • ^/////7^/7/7/7//’/'/7^^7//////’/7/^/y/^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 ^7777/7/^//^/7/’/y/^/7^/7///^/M'/^^^
    • gooooneg 1 W 1 sol g
    • E g 68
    • H8 « § 80 821
    • 2 s o Soonod
  • n.n. - vue 25/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 24
    • CONDENSERS—SUBSTAGE
    • The New Long Working Distance Zonal Dark Ground Illuminator has been introduced for use by those whose research requires dark ground illumination in conjunction with high powers and deep cells. These condensers are made in two types, one for use with Objectives having a numerical aperture not greater than 145 and with a working distance up to 2-5 mm. ; this condenser is fitted with the standard R.M.S. thread. The alternative condenser having a larger front lens 25 mm. diameter is supplied with the Watson Universal and Abbe size condenser thread and can be made with a working distance of 4 mm. It is also designed for use with Objectives whose numerical aperture does not exceed 145.
    • Please specify the working distance required at the time of ordering.
    • GENERAL INDICATIONS FOR USE OF THE VARIOUS CONDENSERS
    • Macro Condenser. This is intended for use in conjunction with photographic and other Objectives of 2 in. and longer focal lengths. In use the Condenser should be racked up until almost in contact with the under surface of the specimen. The beam is then brought to a focus inside or beyond the Objective, by this means an evenly illuminated field is provided and the whole of the specimen can be photographed without difficulty. For projection with low powers or for projection drawing, this condenser, which is fully achromatised, will be found ideal.
    • Low Power Condenser. For Objectives whose aperture does not exceed -45 this condenser is indicated, having a relatively long focus a large area is illuminated with a resultant equality of intensity of illumination over the whole field. If critical illumination be employed and the light source focussed in the plane of the object it will be found that the image is sufficient to fill the field of these Objectives.
    • Universal Condenser. This condenser is designed for those whose work is primarily with low and medium powers. Having a focal length of 1 in. the light source, assuming that the Pointolite, oil lamp or similar radiant is employed, will be found to fill the field effectively -with a B in. Objective.
    • If low powers such as the 3 in. Objective are to be used and full aperture is required combined with a large image of the light source, the top lens of the condenser may be unscrewed and a fully achromatised combination is left.
    • Parachromatic Condenser. This is suitable for workers with medium and high powers who desire to be able to use the oil immersion Objective with critical illumination. The focal length of this condenser is 1% in., and consequently a smaller image of the radiant is projected into the field of view and this will be found sufficient for oil immersion Objectives, while the concentration of light into the smaller area is of great advantage.
    • For low powers such as the 3 in. the top lens may be unscrewed when a fully achromatised and aplana-tised combination at N.A. 0-40 remains.
    • Holoscopic Oil Immersion Condenser. This serves the purpose of those requiring maximum resolving power from their Objectives. It can be made with apertures from N.A. 1-30—1-37 and for any thickness of slip from 0-9 mm.—1-4 mm. Its corrections are as perfect as those of an achromatic oil immersion Objective, and for critical high power visual or photomicrographic work this condenser has no equal, the performance of Objectives and the detail seen is immeasurably increased especially if critical illumination be employed.
    • The condenser will be found to perform in every way satisfactorily if used dry with dry Objectives, while with the front lens removed an aperture of 0-55 is available.
    • In fact one of the best known microscopists of the day remarked when using this condenser “ It is like another eye.”
    • In our series of substage condensers, we provide for all classes of work, with every power of Objective, as follows :—
    • Condenser, Full Aperture. Aplanatic Aperture. Equivalent Focus. Page. Diameter °f Back Lens.
    • Complete. Top Lens Removed. Co mplete. Top Lens Removed.
    • In. In.
    • Macro Illuminator... — — — 2-0 — 25 1-25
    • Aplanatic Low-power ... ...' •50 •48 — •66 — 25 •60
    • The Universal 1-0 •95 •40 •40 1-0 26 •77
    • The Parachromatic 1-0 •90 •40 •29 •40 27 •62
    • Oil Immersion (Holoscopic series) 1-30 to 1-37 FuU •55 •22 •55 27 •60
    • And our well-known Abbe Illuminator, page 28.
    • The freedom of the lens-system from spherical aberration shows the degree of aplanatism attained. In the above table the aplanatic aperture is very large in relation to the full aperture : a sufficient indication of high efficiency.
    • As already explained achromatism is as important as aplanatism for really good results; particularly with highly corrected Objective systems. All the above condensers are achromatised.
    • Special attention is drawn to the new Condenser Changers described on pages 42 and 43.
  • n.n. - vue 26/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CON DENSERS—SUBSTAGE
    • 25
    • LOW-POWER APLANATIC SUBSTAGE CONDENSER
    • 12501
    • This Condenser will provide a solid cone of rays of nearly 0-50 N.A. and will give dark illumination for Objectives of 0-30 N.A.
    • Code Word.
    • Medio
    • Medit
    • No.
    • 12501
    • 12502
    • £ s. d.
    • Optical part only with Universal screw ... 3 10 0
    • Completely mounted, similar to Parachro-matic Condenser, page 27, with iris dia-
    • phragm and set of stops ... ... ... 5 0 0
    • 12503
    • W. WATSON J. SO NS.
    • THE MACRO ILLUMINATOR
    • The problem of the even illumination of a large field is solved by the use of this illuminator. It is a valuable means of illuminating large objects (up to 1-1 in. dia.) for low power Photomicrography.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Media 12503 Mounted for Substage ... ... 3 10 0
    • SPOT-LENS FOR LOW-POWER DARK-GROUND ILLUMINATION
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d. Pecas 12504 Spot-Lens for dark-ground illumination ... ... ... 0 15 0 Pedal 12505 Ditto, in Sliding Mount ... ... ... ... ... 0 18 6
    • 12506
    • EXPANDING STOP FOR DARK-GROUND ILLUMINATION
    • This is a substitute for a large series of Stops. It is made to fit the Stop-ring of our Universal Condenser and Abbe Illuminator. The proper diameter of stop for use with any given Objective is accurately obtained by the movement of the lever which operates on the same principle as an iris diaphragm. The central disc can be varied in diameter from 0-4 to 0-75 in.
    • Code Word. No. Medin 12506 £ s. d. Expanding Stop as described, for Stop-ring 1-375 in. dia. ... 10 0
    • Medix 12507 Do. do. do. -875 in. dia. ... I 0 0
    • Medir 12508 Alteration of Stop-ring to take Expanding Stop where necessary ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 5 0
    • Note.-—These Stops are somewhat fragile, and no responsibility can be accepted for them after leaving our hands.
    • B0000003
    • H hi |o| HI «z^ 1H S iu| mW
    • ^///7/^/7//7^///^///7/^/7/^7/^/^/7^^^^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • W7/7/7/7/7^///7//////////7/>'///////y/^^/'/^^^
  • n.n. - vue 27/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 26
    • CONDENSERS—SUBSTAGE
    • CONDENSERS—SUBSTAGE
    • HOLOSCOPIC SYSTEM
    • THE UNIVERSAL CONDENSER
    • 12601
    • For rapid work, a condenser having large lenses is an immense advantage, and in the Universal Condenser a diameter of back lens is given, which in practice affords all the convenience of the larger sizes. With it work can be done as rapidly, and more accurately, than with any other Condenser, while the beautiful achro-aplanatic corrections render it the finest all-round Condenser procurable.
    • It is constructed on our Holoscopic System, a triple back lens producing the correcting effect. It is this system which has enabled us to produce in our Holoscopic Objectives and Oil Immersion Condensers, corrections for spherical aberration, which have made them famous as the best examples of optical skill and perfection in aplanatism.
    • We would emphasise the enormous aplanatic aperture it yields. Its total aperture is aplanatic, if the exact thickness of slip (1 mm.) be used for which it is corrected. It will work through any reasonably thick slip, but is slightly under-corrected for thin ones. This can, however, be corrected by partly unscrewing the front lens so as to cause it to touch the slip when in focus.
    • The Mounting is the same as used for the Abbe Illuminator, with which the Universal Condenser will interchange. It has iris diaphragm and cell for stops.
    • Power. Total Aperture. Aplanatic Aperture. Diam. of Back Lens.
    • Complete. Front lens removed. Complete. Front lens removed.
    • •4 in. 1-0 in. 1-0 •95 •40 •77
    • Code Word. No. Meeko 12601 £ s. d. Optical part only ... ... ... ... ... ... 5 10 0
    • Merem 12602 Completely-mounted with iris diaphragm. For Understage 6 10 0
    • Megim 12603 Meine 12604 Do. do. do. For Substage ... 7 0 0 Set of stops for dark-ground illumination, etc. ... ... 0 10 0
    • Melan 12605 Coloured glasses—blue, yellow, signal green, ground, etc., Dr. Spitta’s " pot green.” ... ... ... ... each 0 1 6
    • ^/^/^/^/^/^/^/^/y^x^ zzz///zz/z///z/z/z//zzzzzzz/z/<%
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • Jc^avzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz/zzzzzzzzx^
    • 7************XXXXXOXXXXXXXXXXX** "9 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. ^y^/yyy^/yyyy/^yy/y/yy/x/y/y^yyyy^/y/y^^^
  • n.n. - vue 28/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CONDENSERS—SUBSTAGE
    • 27
    • THE
    • tsi 5
    • in
    • — ^gt WA TSON. LONDON.
    • 12701
    • SUBSTAGE CONDENSERS
    • HOLOSCOPIC OIL IMMERSION CONDENSER
    • The Holoscopic Oil Immersion Condenser is designed for the Expert Research Worker and Connoisseur to exhaust the possibilities of all Oil Immersion Objectives.
    • It is constructed on the same plan as our Holoscopic Objectives in which all corrections for chromatic and spherical aberration are effected by a triple cemented combination. Its total numerical aperture is 1-30 ; it can be used with glass slides up to 1-4 mm. in thickness and it will give an aplanatic cone of rays to the limit of its aperture. This is equal to the utmost requirements of modern Objectives of the greatest aperture.
    • If desired this Condenser can be made (specially to order) with a numerical aperture of 1'37 ; but its use would be limited to slides not
    • exceeding 1-3 mm. in thickness.
    • The Holoscopic Oil Immersion Condenser may be used dry (without immersion oil). Under such conditions its numerical aperture is F0 and the aplanatic cone of rays is 0-92 N.A.
    • When Objectives of low or moderate power are occasionally resorted to and a change of Condenser would be inconvenient it will be found that the removal of the top lens of the Holoscopic Oil Immersion Condenser converts the latter into an efficient Condenser very suitable for such Objectives.
    • N.B.-—It is not fully realised what an excellent condenser this is for dark ground illumination with Objectives of high numerical aperture.
    • Oil immersed complete. Dry co mplete. D ry top lens removed.
    • Focal Length Full aperture Aplanatic aperture •22 in. 1-30—1-37 N.A. do. •22 in. 1-0 N.A. •92 N.A. •55 in. 60 N.A. •55 N.A.
    • Code Word.
    • Melio Melif
    • JVo.
    • 12701
    • 12702
    • 12704
    • %
    • 5
    • Clear diameter of Back Lens, *6 in.
    • Optical part only, having standard R.M.S. thread...
    • Completely mounted with iris diaphragm, similarly to Para-chromatic Condenser shown below, with divisions to indicate aperture employed. With set of stops complete
    • For coloured glasses, see 12705.
    • THE PARACHROMATIC
    • £ s, d.
    • 8 0 0
    • 9 10 0
    • The condenser par excellence for medium and high-power workers. The optical portion has the Universal Objective Thread and is mounted over an Iris Diaphragm, beneath which is a revolving carrier for Stops for dark ground and oblique illumination. The Iris Diaphragm is divided so as to indicate the N.A. at which the Condenser is being employed. The diameter of the back lens is specially large for such a Condenser. This Condenser is eminently suited for critical and photographic work, and we confidently recommend it.
    • Power. Aperture. Aplanatic Aperture. Diameter of Back Lens.
    • Co mp lete. With top lens removed.
    • •29 in. •4 1-0 •90 •62 in.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Mallo 12703
    • Melod 12704
    • Melte 12705
    • Optical part only, having standard R.M.S. thread ... Completely mounted as figured, with set of stops
    • Disc of blue, yellow, signal green, ground-glass or Dr. Spitta’s " pot green ” for either of the above Condensers ... each
    • £ s. d.
    • 5 10 0
    • 7
    • o O
    • 0 1 6
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. , ^/7/^/^///7/77/7/7/7///7///7/7/y/7/y/y^/777^
  • n.n. - vue 29/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 2S
    • CONDENSERS—SUBSTAGE
    • CONDENSERS-SUBSTAGE
    • WATSON’S NEW ABBE CONDENSER.
    • Optical part of Abbe Illuminator. 1-20 N.A. 12801.
    • Mounted for Substage.
    • 12802.
    • The continued popularity of this Condenser is due to the ease and rapidity with which it can be employed and for its brilliancy of image.
    • Although its numerical aperture is great, being 1-20, its Aplanatic Cone is comparatively small, but the ease with which it can be used has caused it to be universal for both high and low power routine work ; for the latter purpose the top lens is removed . A beautiful dark-ground effect may be obtained with it with Objectives up to 0-45 N.A.
    • FIG. 4.
    • I =======
    • Mounted for Understage. 12803.
    • We have designed a very perfect Iris Diaphragm for the fittings of these Condensers (as Fig. 4), which permits of the most precise gradation of illumination being immediately obtained.
    • Code Word. Membe.
    • Memen.
    • Memor.
    • Memab.
    • Memyo.
    • Memed.
    • Memex
    • ABBE CONDENSER
    • No. £s.
    • 12801 Optical part only, N.A. 1-20 ... ... ... ... ... I 5
    • 12802 Completely mounted for substage, with iris diaphragm and cell for stops, N.A. 1-20 ... ... ... ... ... 3 0
    • 12803 Completely mounted for understage with iris diaphragm and carrier for stops, N.A. 1-20 ... ... ... ... ... 2 5
    • 12804 Set of stops for dark-ground, etc., illumination in brass box 0 10
    • 12805 Discs of glass, tinted, blue signal green, yellow, ground glass, Dr. Spitta’s “ Pot Green,” etc. ... ... ... ... each 0 1
    • SIMPLIFIED ABBE CONDENSER WITH IRIS DIAPHRAGM
    • 12806 The Iris diaphragm can be used independently if the Condenser is removed ... ... ... ... ... ... ... | 10
    • 12807 Sleeve pattern iris diaphragm only with thread to receive simplified Abbe condenser if required ... ... ... ... 0 15
    • d.
    • 0
    • 0
    • 0
    • 0
    • 6
    • 0
    • 0
    • geexeecezeececeesereeceeceveeceeveeceeoeceeoeeczeeveececcooeeceececeeoeceececeezezgeroygy s W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. , fos//r//7//r/s/>wys/ss/ss"/s/ss/s//ss/jv^^^^
    • EIXekHRkekeepkeooXekekeekeenreoyeeroe vreeper/reeP/AP/ee
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
  • n.n. - vue 30/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CONDENSERS—SUBSTAGE
    • 29
    • HOLOS
    • LONDON 4
    • 25
    • 69
    • W. WATSON & SONS’ IMMERSION PARABOLOID (Adopted by H.M. Admiralty)
    • The purpose of this Illuminator is to display minute organisms and ultra-microscopic particles, brilliantly illuminated upon an intensely black field.
    • It will be found very suitable for the detection of many living pathogenic organisms in blood and watery media and for the differentiation of structural details in tissues which are not amenable to staining processes.
    • For the convenience of those who use the English type of Microscope, of the Holos Immersion Paraboloid is so mounted that it can be inter-
    • the optical portion ____________ _________________________ ___________ _____ - _____
    • changed with the ordinary optical part of the Abbe Illuminator and similar Condensers supplied by ourselves and other English houses, and therefore used in conjunction with the Iris diaphragm mounting which carries the Abbe Illuminator optical part, Nos. 12802 and 12803.
    • It can usually be supplied to fit any other make of Microscope that may be specified.
    • Essentials of Successful Working.
    • 1. The Holos Immersion Paraboloid must in every case have oil between it and the object slip, and the contact must be maintained, and all air bubbles avoided.
    • 2. The Paraboloid must be accurately centred.
    • 3. The object slip must be within 20 per cent, of the thickness engraved on each of the Paraboloid mountings. A supply of suitable slips is included with each Paraboloid.
    • 4. The specimen should be in as thin a layer of fluid as possible.
    • 5. The source of light must be a very brilliant one, and a lamp condenser should be used.
    • The annular illumination provided by the Paraboloid extends from about N.A. 1-0 to N.A. 1-45, and it is noteworthy that the use of the Iris diaphragm cuts out the rays of low numerical aperture first, so that the illumination becomes more and more oblique. This is a very favourable circumstance, as it secures the greatest resolving power attainable under the circumstances of dark ground illumination for all Objectives exceeding -48 numerical aperture.
    • The smaller the source of light the more care is required in making the adjustments, and in using slips of the proper thickness. The latter is, therefore, engraved on the mount of each instrument.
    • Oil immersion Objectives can only be used with the Paraboloid if a special stop is used which reduces their numerical aperture below 1-0.
    • Annular Illumination.
    • This Paraboloid is also excellent for the resolution of striated objects such as Diatomaces. T ’he
    • Objective is then used at its fullest aperture, the illumination from the Paraboloid being annular
    • and oblique in all azimuths.
    • Code Word. No. £ S. d.
    • Merca 12901 Optical part only, mounted to fit Abbe Illuminator Carrier such as is supplied with English Microscopes, with immersion oil and supply of suitable slips 2 15 0
    • Mercf 12902 Complete Paraboloid with mounting for Substage ... 4 10 0
    • Merce 12903 Ditto, with mounting for understage Immersion oil and supply of slips is included with above. ... 3 15 0
    • Merch 12904 Funnel Stop 0 5 0
    • Mercz 12905 Iris diaphragm for reducing N.A. mounted behind back lens of oil immersion Objective. The Objective must be sent for the fitting to be made ... ... ... ... ... from 0 17 6
    • Mercu 12906 This Paraboloid must be accurately centred, and if the Micro-scope has no centring screws to the Substage, a Centring Nosepiece should be used, which is supplied with the com-
    • plete Paraboloid at a special extra charge For illuminating attachment for above see page 32. I 10 0
    • A leaflet on dark ground illumination technique is published separately. Copies gratis on
    • application. See also articles in Watson’s Microscope Record.
    • For particulars of the new Eisenberg Hanging Drop Slide see page 31.
    • ^/^'^^/^/^/'^/7^/y/7/7/7/7///777/7/7/7/7/77/'/7^^^
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. |
    • fssssssyssssssssssyssssssssssssysysssssssssss^^
    • -^yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy/yy/yyyyyyyyyyyyy/xyyyyyyyyy^^^
    • t 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. :
    • ^^^^y^/y^y/y/yr/r/^y/^/r^^^
  • n.n. - vue 31/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 30
    • DARK GROUND ILLUMINATOR
    • CASSEGRAIN DARK GROUND ILLUMINATOR
    • Designed by Mr. E. M. Nelson.
    • The “ Cassegrain ” Illuminator is so named because its curved reflecting surfaces are disposed somewhat similarly to the mirrors of the reflecting telescope invented by Cassegrain. Mr. Nelson discovered that this arrangement, applied to the construction of an oil immersion dark ground illuminator, favoured an intense concentration of rays of greater obliquity than had been utilised before.
    • Objects mounted in media of high refractive index such as Canada balsam, styrax, or realgar, may be so illuminated by this Condenser as to be seen brilliantly upon a dark ground with Objectives having numerical apertures up to T37. This implies a resolving power of 40 per cent, in excess of that obtained with dark ground illuminators which require the aperture of the Objective to be reduced to TO N.A. or less.
    • Objects such as living bacteria and spirochaetes in aqueous media may be illuminated upon a dark ground by the " Cassegrain ” Illuminator by reducing the aperture of the Objective to 1'25 N.A. by means of a funnel stop or iris diaphragm. Water, having a refractive index of T33, will not receive the most oblique rays given by this illuminator, but nevertheless the increase in resolving power over other types is 20 per cent.
    • The apparatus represents a great advance in dark ground illuminators and, as it can be employed with Objectives of the highest apertures now made, without the use of a funnel stop, it attains the limit of possibilities of dark ground with visible light.
    • A very intense source of light is not necessary with this illuminator. An oil lamp may be used, but for laboratory work a gas-filled pearl-frosted electric lamp is recommended. The illuminator will focus through glass slides having a thickness of from TO to T2 mm. For centring purposes a fine circle is engraved upon the upper surfaces of the illuminator. Two glass discs bearing central patch stops are supplied with the illuminator for use with different Objectives.
    • The Illuminator may be screwed into any mount supplied for Watson Abbe Illuminators or Universal Condensers, and is thus interchangeable with these accessories.
    • A “ Cassegrain ” Illuminator made of quartz is supplied for use with ultra-violet light.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. Mytol No. £s. d. 13001 “ Cassegrain” Dark Ground Illuminator, optical part only, with screw to fit mounts for Abbe and Universal Condensers 3 17 6
    • Mytin 13002 Mount to carry optical part and to fit standard Understage or Substage, provided with centring screws for use with Micro-scopes which have no centring Substage ... ... ... 1 15 0
    • Myxom 13003 “ Cassegrain” Dark Ground Illuminator, optical part only, made in quartz for use with ultra-violet light... ... ... 6 5 0
    • Masty 13004 Centring Nosepiece for use with Microscopes having no Centring Substage ... ... ... ... ... ... I 10 0 For Substage Electric Lamp for use with this Illuminator, see page 32. For particulars of the new Eisenberg Hanging Drop Slide see page 31.
    • ANNANNN3
    • 6 IE 80)
    • Z 0 808
    • 88 z
    • 8 08
    • HI K
    • 8
    • Spond
    • y^7^^/^/'/^/^^///7/^//^/7^//////^//^//^/7^/^^^^^77///y^^^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • Weceed/ece/e/cecd/ZEE/A/AA/EXAERE-GREeRHE-PeAe-ecce-
  • n.n. - vue 32/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • DARK GROUND CONDENSER
    • 31
    • ZONAL DARK GROUND CONDENSER
    • Will give perfect dark ground illumination with Objective up to NA 115.
    • 13101
    • The No.
    • Made in two forms, this has been designed especially for use in tissue culture and other work where the material must of necessity be mounted in cells either on glass slides or on thick slips with excavated centres. The working distance is governed by the size of the top lens and in producing two patterns our aim has been to have Condensers available for any pattern microscope.
    • The No. 1 pattern is provided with the R.M.S. Objective thread, the total diameter of the top lens is 11 mm. and this can be made with a working distance up to 2-5 mm.
    • 2 pattern with top mounting 25 mm. diameter necessi
    • tating a larger aperture in stage can be made with working distances up to 4 mm.
    • With both these condensers an intense black background is obtained; their value for work on tissue culture, etc., need not be stressed by us. Although the light concentration with these condensers is intense it will be found that resolution is markedly satisfactory and not spoiled by halation.
    • 13102
    • Code Word No,
    • Maaba 13101
    • Maabe 13102
    • PRICES £ s. d.
    • Zonal dark ground condenser, pattern No. 1, with R.M.S. Objective thread made with any working distance up to 2-5 mm. ... 5 0 0
    • Zonal dark ground condenser, pattern No. 2, with Universal, Holo-scopic and Abbe Condenser threads, made in any working dis-
    • tance required up to 4 mm. ... ... ... ... ... 7 10 0
    • Please specify the working distance required when ordering.
    • The use of an iris diaphragm in the Objective in place of a funnel is recommended.
    • EISENBERG HANGING DROP SLIDE
    • A 3x1 slide optically polished 1 mm. thick with central cavity hemispherical 2 mm diameter, polished for sterilisation. Overcomes air space usually found with cavity slides.
    • Designed by Dr. Eisenberg, Middlesex Hospital ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 8 6
    • NEW SUBSTAGE CONDENSER MOUNT
    • In all Watson’s previous Microscopes, when fitted with centring substage, provision has been made for hinging the whole substage with condenser out of the optic axis. This movement is most helpful for low-power work, but the new design of rigid form of centring substage has necessitated the redesigning of this movement.
    • In general work the Condenser is not removed, but there are occasions when it is preferable to do without a condenser, and a new design of condenser mount has therefore been evolved. In this the optical part of the Condenser swings out of the optic axis, but the Iris diaphragm remains in the substage; it is thus possible to control the intensity of illumination. The swing-out has been designed on new lines ; a trigger is now fitted to the part of the mount carrying the condenser optical part and this trigger is of case-hardened steel, and instead of the sharp-angled catch commonly used on optical instruments a blunt-ended piece is employed which engages in a correspondingly wide slot on the lower section of the mount; this slot is also of case-hardened steel.
    • Code Word. No. PRICES £s. d.
    • Maabi 13103 Substage condenser mount with swing-out to optical part 2 5 0
    • Maabo 13104 This can be substituted for the condenser mount on the “Service,” " Patna ” and “ Bactil ” Microscopes at an extra charge of 15 0
    • Maabu 13105 or on the “ H ” Edinburgh Student’s and “ Research ” models at an extra charge of 0 10 0
    • %
    • : 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 3
    • Yeeeeeeeeeeecececddceecectcetececececcded£0cecc20*27*02*0A11RAXCE7AAAXA4E2PCAEA0AXX
  • n.n. - vue 33/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 32
    • HOLOS IMMERSION PARABOLOID
    • ELECTRIC LIGHT ATTACHMENT
    • FOR USE WITH THE WATSON HOLOS IMMERSION PARABOLOID AND OTHER ILLUMINATORS.
    • W. Watson & Sons LTD
    • London.
    • Many clinical workers experience difficulty in the rapid setting up of apparatus for diagnosis by dark ground illumination, inexactitude in centring the light or wrong placing of the lamp condenser being fruitful causes of trouble.
    • By means of the Electric Light Attachment dark ground illumination may be effected rapidly and with certainty. The small enclosed electric lamp gives brilliant illumination and is held in its correct position relatively to the illuminator. A condensing lens is interposed between the lamp and the illuminator.
    • The appliance is attached to the fitting of the Watson Holos Oil Immersion Paraboloid and, as this fitting is similar to that of the Watson “ Universal ” Condenser, Abbe Illuminator and Nelson Dark Ground Illuminator, it may be used with these illuminators also for direct illumination, photo-micrography, etc.
    • The lamp may be supplied with current from a dry battery or accumulator or from the ordinary house supply through a suitable resistance which serves also to control the intensity of illumination.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Merdo 13201 Electric light, complete with fitting to attach to Holos Immersion Paraboloid, with Condensing Lens, lamp, 3 ft. of flexible wire, no battery ... 2 10 0
    • Merel 13202 Four-volt battery in box with switch ... 1 12 6
    • Merfo 13203 Extra four-volt battery, dry cells 0 10 6
    • Merfy 13204 Extra lamps, four-volt or twelve-volt ... ... ... each 0 I 8
    • Merka 13205 Extra lamps, for use with ordinary house electric supply through a resistance (see below) frosted bulbs, twelve volt, each 0 1 8
    • Merge 13206 Resistance for 100-125 volts 1 7 6
    • Mergil 13207 „ „ 200-250 „ 1 17 6
    • When current from a main supply is to be used with a resistance a 12-volt lamp is supplied. If dry cells or a storage battery are employed a 4-volt lamp is usually taken.
    • F*% is
    • a
    • >
    • H
    • 8 08 10
    • 2 si sons 80 12: 80s k!
    • 5
    • ANNA So s 808 gl
    • PI g HS 8 0 8 0: 12
    • 2 a
    • Sonne
  • n.n. - vue 34/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 33
    • DIAGRAM OF MICROSCOPE
    • /
    • 1
    • * I
    • Enlarged views of the above, size 28 x 40 inches, mounted on cloth, are offered to Schools, Laboratories and others, to hang on Walls, etc.
    • y7/^////77/7/y^7///7A^/7/7^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 ^zzzzz/zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzJ
    • SX
    • Soo 8 on 8
    • I os
    • FI
    • SE to 1
    • SA §
    • S wd s
    • OS
    • 856 2 | s
    • 08
    • V 8
  • n.n. - vue 35/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 34
    • PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION
    • PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION
    • In the intervening period between the issue of one edition of a catalogue and the next it generally happens that some changes have taken place or some modifications made in the design or the construction of most of our Microscopes. This has taken place because some better way has been found of manufacture and which at the same time gives definite advantage to the user of the instrument. All readers of this catalogue may not be familiar with the salient features of our Microscopes, so we propose to state them as concisely as possible, indicating the most recent developments.
    • General
    • The success that has been achieved by the Watson Microscope has been largely due to appreciation of the working conveniences and permanent working qualities which they afford ; one aim in their construction has been to minimise the number of parts. So successful has this been that the risk of anything becoming unscrewed or loose is practically non-existent. Thus rigidity and freedom from tremor is assured by the solidity of the various parts and proper balancing.
    • The fitting of adjusting screws to all working parts is another important factor in the long life of Watson instruments. It is not merely wear and tear that has to be contended with in the fittings of a microscope; other considerations such as dust, extremes of temperature, thoughtless handling, all play havoc with the delicate fittings and adjustments which are associated with a good microscope. Watson’s adjustable fittings enable any part to be taken to pieces by a mechanic or a careful worker so that it may be cleaned, oiled and, when replaced, screwed exactly to that degree of fitting which gives the movement that is not too tight but is just tight enough. Workers in the tropics and remote places have in numerous instances testified to the unique benefits that they derive from this valuable provision.
    • This method of control has been an outstanding feature of the Watson Microscopes for more than forty years : it is not an experiment, it is a happy experience by which every user benefits. It will be more fully explained as the various parts of the Microscopes are described.
    • It is in consequence of the foregoing and the fittings which will be described hereafter that Watson’s are able to give a guarantee of five years and to assure the user of a lifetime of working efficiency.
    • The Limb.
    • The limb of the Watson Microscope is something more than is usually called by that name and exhibits the way in which multiple parts held together by screws have been superseded by a solid casting. The limb, as shown in the illustration on page 38, carries the body at one end, the substage at the other ; between are the supporting bracket pieces for the stage, and at its extremity is the mirror fitting.
    • Further advantages are offered ; the dovetailed fittings which carry the body and those which carry the substage are machined in one continuous operation ensuring basic alignment throughout. Simultaneously the stage brackets are machined to ensure that they are truly at right angles to the body and substage. A degree of accuracy never before imparted is thus assured and the substage once centred to the body always carries the condenser in the axis of the Objective.
    • To this limb which was originated in our works we give the title of the Optical Bench Limb.
    • Incidentally we may say that in recent months the limb has been lengthened at the eyepiece end and thickened.
    • Compare this with the many parts, all likely to become loose, of which older Microscopes were constructed.
    • The Body Tube.
    • The Microscope body has hitherto consisted of the outer tube with a fitting which screwed into the lower end of the body tube and was threaded to receive the Objective. This body tube was fixed to the bar on which the dovetails were machined, to form the coarse adjustment, the fixing of the body tube and bar being done either by screws alone or by screws and solder.
    • WWy^/^/^77/77W^^/7/77//^/^/7//y^7^^
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • rn
    • SNNNNN3 d 8 z IRi
    • O
    • S ms Sas lot IE
    • z H
    • 8 co s 103
  • n.n. - vue 36/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION
    • 35
    • Watson’s are offering something which is definitely in advance of this; the body tube, the Objective fitting and the bar are now machined out of one solid piece of metal and the risk of the parting of either portion is abolished for ever. Enduring parallelism between the optical and mechanical axes is ensured. The reader’s kindly reflection on what this important development means and its beneficial effects will disclose that definite progress has been made. The body tube
    • is 40 mm, diameter.
    • B
    • W.WATSON&SONS ,1™.
    • M
    • S
    • Fig. 1.
    • A—Screw holes for adjusting the slides.
    • B—Hole for axis bolt.
    • C—Saw cut which permits the adjustment of the slides.
    • F—Fine adjustment slide.
    • L—Holes in the extension for attaching the stage.
    • M—Hole into which the fine adjustment micrometer screw and nut are assembled.
    • S—Substage slide.
    • Fig. 2.
    • The one-piece body nosepiece and coarse adjustment fittings of the “ Service ” Microscope.
    • T
    • on
    • 10 S±VA
    • 135,
    • The portions marked R, Y and NP are from solid metal without joints. A are adjusting screws for expanding or contracting the Slot C in the Coarse Adjustment dovetailed fitting. DT is the drawtube.
    • The Drawtube.
    • With the narrow drawtube corresponding to the diameter of the standard Student’s size eyepieces hitherto supplied in microscopes, a certain amount of internal reflection almost inevitably occurs, and instruments fitted with these drawtubes cannot be advantageously used with low-power photomicrographic Objectives, particularly without eyepieces.
    • ^/^/^/^/^/^/^/y///^/^/^//^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. | £zZZZZZZZ/ZZZ/ZZZ/ZZZZ/Z//////Z//ZZZ//Z//ZZZZ/ZZZ//ZZ/////Z//Z/////ZZ///////Z//////ZZ/ZZ/
    • ^yy/^/^yy/y/X/^/^/^/^^/Z/Z/^^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • rsssssssssssssssssssssyssssssssssssssssssssssss^^^
  • n.n. - vue 37/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 36
    • PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION
    • On all Watson microscopes excepting the " Kima,” the drawtube now fitted is 34 mm. diameter. It is provided with the Royal Microscopical Society’s thread at one end and a fitting for an eyepiece at the other end. This is so arranged that the eyepiece fitting is slightly smaller than the internal diameter of the drawtube and the eyepiece may be regarded as virtually suspended.
    • This overcomes internal reflection and glare. In addition, the eyepiece fitting is so arranged that it may be unscrewed.
    • The diameter of the body is of sufficient size when the eyepiece fitting is removed, to permit of the use of low-power photomicrographic Objectives without any cutting off of the field.
    • The drawtube is divided to show the tube length with and without the nosepiece. It is finished in chromium plating.
    • Fie. 3.
    • The arrangement of Rack and Pinion, ~ and Fine Adjustment dovetailed fitting with Adjusting Screws A.
    • A
    • 0
    • Adjustments for Focussing.
    • Watson microscopes have always borne the highest reputation for the permanent and accurate working of their mechanical movements, and they have long been acknowledged as the best and the most enduring made.
    • Coarse Adjustment.
    • Fitted with Watson’s patented compensated bearings, the rack is of phosphor bronze, the pinion of steel. Made throughout in our High Barnet Factory, these two essential portions are interchangeable, and even if the rack be disengaged from the pinion it will mesh accurately with any tooth.
    • compensated
    • The smoothness of the slides is such that a t-in. Objective may be focussed with ease, and even the oil immersion Objective roughly focussed.
    • Fie. 4.
    • Adjustment, etc.
    • .. .. Section of Limb of Edinburgh Student’s Microscope, showing construction of Watson’s Standard Fine
    • m
    • B
    • G
    • CT
    • /
    • D
    • Fine Adjustment.
    • The fine adjustment is made in two forms, both dependent upon a lever for their movement.
    • B—Screws holding pinion plate in contact with rack of Coarse Adjustment. C—Lever. D—Fulcrum of Lever of Fine Adjustment. E—Eyepiece fitting at top of drawtube. F—Universal objective thread at lower end of draw-tube. G—Objective thread at nose-piece end of body.
    • 88
    • 6
    • E 805
    • Z 0: 8028 d
    • Z 68 8 0)8
    • HI
    • <
    • 8
    • & Sos os g 8 RI Its 08 HS 8 0 § 12
    • 2 a
    • jos 8'8
  • n.n. - vue 38/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION
    • 37
    • The horizontal lever fine adjustment was adopted by Watson’s fifty years ago, and the accumulated experience of years has shown this principle to be the most enduring, satisfactory and the most sensitive available. Every possible way of achieving slow motion on the Objective has at different times been tried in the experimental department, but none has been found to excel this in effectiveness.
    • Vertical Lever Fine Adjustment.
    • The demand for fine adjustments operated from the side of the limb has of late years become insistent among students and workers in laboratories. Watson’s experience with the lever pattern led them to experiment on these lines and the type introduced by them in 1919 on their “ Service ” model microscope has been used ever since, and it may be claimed without exaggeration that it has proved itself to be the most effective side-limb fine adjustment available.
    • A
    • CO
    • Fig. 5.
    • The action of the Fine Adjustment. B—The Lever. A—The Block which is attached to the Fine Adjustment Slide. C—The Travelling Wheel that imparts the movement, actuated by the screw on the right, which is revolved by the milled heads. The reverse movement is assisted by a spring.
    • Fig. 6.
    • The assembled Fine Adjustment unit.
    • The Steel Rod and Screw.
    • Z o 2 $
    • Reference to the two illustrations shows the method in which this adjustment is carried out.
    • Fig. 4.—Horizontal Lever Fine Adjustment—The whole body of the instrument is supported on the shorter end of the lever “ C,” boxed in the limb of the stand. The long end rests against the point of a micrometer screw which is actuated by a milled head. Double spiral springs exerting their force along the plane of movement keep the body pressed closely against the lever.
    • It will be observed that the fulcrum “ D ” is as close as possible to the body, thus minimising the actual weight to be raised. In the “ Edinburgh Student’s ” microscope the arm on one side is 3-25 times longer than that on the other. The weight of the body to be lifted with its drawtube and course adjustment fitting is 2 lbs. The screw has 70 threads to the inch.
    • The movement covered by one complete turn of the milled head is 230 in., and this is actually sensitive to l/100th of a rotation of the milled head.
    • Both the lever itself and the bearing points are of polished hardened steel, and a long dovetailed bearing is provided despite the fact that movement only takes place over a distance of 8 in.
    • Fine Adjustment of the Vertical Type.
    • In this the lever is so placed and shaped that its pressure against its opposing point is always perfectly vertical. Hitherto this type of fine adjustment has been fitted in conjunction with a compression spring. In Watson microscopes a new recoil spring of tempered cast steel is used, thus introducing a further permanency and instantaneous response where the instrument to be used is in the horizontal position.
    • The micrometer screw which moves the lever with the milled head, is operated on both sides of the limb, and is contained in one unit and fixed as a unit into the instrument, as will be seen in the illustration Fig. 6.
    • % ynneonznnamnnnnznnnnmmnnnnmmnrmmmmmcbeRmmmrmmmzmmrmmmmmmmmrmmmzmmmmmmmzmmmmmmmmm*R*M***N
    • } W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. I ‘, 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzszz/zzzz/zzzzzz^zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzza^ 2. ^///y/^/^/^/^/////^/^^/^^^
  • n.n. - vue 39/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 38
    • PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION
    • W.WATSON & SONS SERVICE
    • Fig. 7.
    • THE OPTICAL BENCH
    • system of construction of the Watson Microscopes. The dark portion is the Limb, the lighter lines represent the attached parts, as explained on page 34.
    • RNong 9
    • 9
    • IP 89 8 0ns 2
    • AI sons
    • 0:
    • 8 08 8 • 8 SH [5 Sonos
    • ^/7/7/77///7//////7/7//7//7//7//7/^/7AY///7///^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I ^^/^/^/^^/^/^/^/^//^/^/t^^/^^^
  • n.n. - vue 40/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • PRINCIPLES OF CONSTRUCTION
    • 39
    • To show the method of attaching Carriers for Condensers to the extension of the limb below the stage.
    • Fig. 8.
    • IS LTD
    • . = THE
    • "SERVICE" - W.WATSON & si
    • LONDON
    • The above is the " Service " Microscope ; the same method is used in the
    • " Edinburgh Student” and other Microscopes.
    • A—Fine adjustment, milled head.
    • B—Stage supports cast in one piece with the limb ; note width of support.
    • C—Mirror-stem fitting.
    • yet V^/^/^/7/^///^/^^MM/^^^
    • ( W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ,
    • W77/^/^^^^/7^^7//^/7^^^77//^7/^i77////7^/^^^
  • n.n. - vue 41/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 40
    • CARRIERS FOR CONDENSERS
    • CARRIERS FOR CONDENSERS
    • Various forms of Condenser Carriers will be found listed to meet all requirements. With the exception of the “ Kima ” model Microscope the spiral screw focussing underfitting has been discontinued. The new design of optical bench limb has resulted in the introduction of a substage ring cast solidly with the metal head carrying the rack, thus securing a further advance in rigidity.
    • The types of condenser carrier now available on Watson’s Microscopes are :—
    • The plain ring underfitting to carry a condenser or iris diaphragm, in which focussing is by sliding.
    • The spiral focussing screw underfitting supplied on the “ Kima ” Microscope only, see illustration, page 57.
    • The plain rackwork focussing substage for “ Service ” models.
    • Substage rackwork focussing with centring screws.
    • Substage rackwork focussing with Research pattern Condenser Changers.
    • These last three focus by milled heads on both sides of the limb in a manner similar to that of the coarse adjustment.
    • The exacting requirements of modern research have shown the importance of accurate centring arrangements of the substage condenser. In dark ground illumination the centring nose-piece cannot take the place of a centring substage: it can be but a makeshift at best.
    • With the centring substage, eyepiece, objective and condenser may be made to conform to a common optic axis. Wherever a microscope is purchased other than for class work, particularly in the case of those who intend carrying out serious microscopy either as amateurs or research workers, we cannot emphasise too strongly the importance of this fitting.
    • The Carriers for illuminating apparatus below the stage may be of either of three types.
    • 1. A plain tubular fitting in which the condenser slides up and down to focus.
    • 2. The Simple Substage (as illustrated, Fig. 9, page 41). This consists of a solid casting with tube to carry the condenser in sleeve pattern mount with iris diaphragm. A certain amount of latitude is given to the sleeve fitting so that at any subsequent date, if after rough handling in the laboratory it is found that the condenser is no longer central, necessary centring can be carried out by releasing the screws AS. This substage is provided with rackwork focussing. The adjusting screws to the dovetailed fitting are shown at A.
    • 3. Centring Substage (as illustrated, Fig. 10, page 41). For this, in addition to the plain casting mounted on the rackwork slide, centring screws CS are provided so that any form of condenser can be axially aligned to the optical system ; a new form of substage condenser mount (page 31) is supplied in which the optical part of the condenser hinges aside laterally. It is secured by a steel catch and released by a trigger.
    • goorg a 8
    • IPs H
    • O 2 8 Sons 808 5 Sauods
    • ^^/^'/'/^^^/'//‘7/’rr^r^^^7fr/r/^/^^^/^^/^^/^////^/7y/,/r//^'7/7//'/7/<M^ % 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • YooccccceceegecccccccccccecycccvccccHcZXcZeecceeXeeze/EX
  • n.n. - vue 42/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CARRIERS FOR CONDENSERS
    • 41
    • SIMPLE SUBSTAGE. (As described, page 40.)
    • Fig. 9.
    • 10
    • COMPOUND SUBSTAGE. (As described, page 40.)
    • f %6
    • %
    • Fig. 10,
    • gox/X. Hf//7/?//S/S/7/7////>7/7/W7M^^
    • € W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
  • n.n. - vue 43/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 42
    • CARRIERS FOR CONDENSERS
    • Research Substage.
    • This substage is based upon the centring substage, but incorporates certain unique features. In addition to centring screws to the bracket, an iris diaphragm is mounted in the substage ring. Above the substage ring, cast solidly with it, are dovetailed slides. These carry the condenser changers so that it is possible to use a series of condensers in the course of a day’s observations to exchange from one to the other in exactly the same manner as with Objectives.
    • Watson Condenser Changer Slides are all fitted with independent centring adjustments which in turn have clamps. Each condenser can therefore be centred to the optic axis of the microscope and then exchanged from one to the other without recentring.
    • The method of setting up is as follows :—
    • With a low-power Objective on the body of the microscope, focus the iris diaphragm mounted in the substage, and centre this to the axis of the microscope. Thereafter the centring screws of the substage should not be touched. The condenser on its slide should now be introduced. This condenser, being an optical system, forms an aerial image of the substage iris diaphragm. This aerial image should be focussed by means of the Objective and then the condenser optical part brought into alignment with the eyepiece, Objective and substage iris by means of the independent centring adjustments provided. It is then clamped to that position and is ready for use.
    • Code Word. No. PRICES £ s. d.
    • Maaby 14201 Plain tubular understage ring condenser carrier, as fitted to the “ Kima ” Microscope, supplied to any other instrument, price including fitting 0 7 6
    • Mabba 14202 Spiral focussing screw underfitting, with provision for hinging out of the optic axis when at the end of its travel 0 17 6
    • Note.—This is only fitted to Watson’s “ Kima ” Microscope.
    • NOTE.- —Can us sually be fitted to any make of microscope at a small charge for fitting.
    • Mabbe 14203 Compound centring substage with solid casting, slide and substage ring, if fitted to “ Service ” Microscope in place of plain rack focussing substage 3 15 0
    • Mabbi 14204 Compound centring rack focussing substage with milled head on one side, male and female slides complete for attachment to " Service ” microscopes supplied prior to July 1931 4 5 0
    • Mabbo 14205 Compound centring rackwork focussing and screw centring substage for attachment to microscopes other than Watson’s manufacture, where this can be carried out 4 5 0
    • (Extra charge will be made for the cost of fitting.)
    • Mabby Macba 14206 14207 Research Substage, as described, with solid casting slide, and bracket, iris diaphragm, built into the substage bracket, with centring screws and with two Research Condenser Changers, each with centring screws ... 8 0 0
    • Macbe 14208 Extra substage slides for above, with centring adjustments and clamps ... ... ... ... ... ... ... each 1 7 6
    • Macbi 14209 Extra for dovetail to lower side of substage bracket for carrying substage lamp or polariser. This will then receive substage slides of the standard pattern 1 5 0
    • N.B.-—All Substage focussing arrangements on Watson Microscopes with the exception of the “ Kima ” model are fitted ivith focussing milled heads on both sides of the limb in a manner similar to that of coarse adjustment milled heads.
    • 8
    • 8 IP H
    • 2 8 sons 80
    • HI SI
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • Hecececceecceeceeccececececceesecececzeccececezeecececceecezeeczeeceececceccececececezyk.
  • n.n. - vue 44/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CARRIERS FOR CONDENSERS
    • 43
    • %
    • S
    • $ \ 502
    • O R°
    • i 26 %
    • :__ s__
    • The technique for setting up of this substage appears on the foregoing page. It offers unique advantages in every form of microscopy.
    • PHOTOMICROGRAPHY
    • Where the microscope is mounted as part of the complete apparatus, and where a wide variety of magnifications, ranging from perhaps xlO diameters with a photomicrographic type lens, medium magnifications with 3 in. and similar objectives, high magnifications with l in. and 12 in. objectives are used, condenser changers will be found indispensable. By this method also the change over from ordinary transmitted light to dark ground illumination is carried out quite easily. Each condenser is mounted on a separate slide, with its own centring arrangements, thus rendering it interchangeable and co-axial with the other condensers in the outfit. A series of photomicrographs at different magnifications can be taken without the necessity of dismounting and fitting a different type of condenser and re-aligning the optical train. In other words, as objectives are rotated on the nosepiece, or substituted by means of the objective changer, the same procedure is followed with condensers.
    • In the Laboratory, particularly in Research or Pathological Laboratories of small hospitals, immediate exchange between transmitted light and dark ground illumination is frequently essential. The difficulty of carrying out this exchange daunts many microscope users owing to the loss of time and the difficulty connected with illumination when using a dark ground condenser. The substage slides overcome this difficulty.
    • For General Microscopy, for the amateur and the isolated worker, for the Works Laboratory, the series of combination available when an additional slide is supplied to the lower surface of the substage will be readily appreciated. It is then possible to use the substage lamp, with a polarising prism, or any other desired combination.
    • The importance of substage technique is increasingly recognised. Watsons are always prepared wherever possible to reconstruct the fitting below the stage on other makes of microscopes, substituting for non-centring substages their own specialised designs.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C
  • n.n. - vue 45/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 44
    • MICROSCOPE MIRRORS
    • MICROSCOPE MIRRORS
    • Three sizes of mirrors are used on Watson microscopes.
    • The “ Kima ” microscope is provided with mirrors, plane and concave, 40 mm. diameter, the “ Service ” and other microscopes, with the exception of the “ Van Heurck ” series, with mirrors 50 mm. diameter. The “ Van Heurck ” series are fitted with mirrors 65 mm. diameter.
    • All microscope mirrors on Watson microscopes are mounted separately to the substage in extensions on the limb provided for this purpose, and can be manipulated and fixed independently of the substage.
    • Sufficient space is provided for their free rotation when the condenser is focussed and the microscope in a vertical position.
    • Alternatives.
    • Code Word No.
    • Macbo 14401
    • Macbu 14402
    • An optically plane mirror can be fitted in place of the silvered glass mirror, so as to yield one reflection of the source of light £ s. d. only, on Watson microscopes, at an extra price of ... ... 0 12 6 Stainless steel plane surface mirror, 50 mm. diameter ... ... 0 15 0
    • For those who wish to avoid second reflections of the source of light, and to escape the gradual loss of reflecting power unavoidable with stainless steel mirrors, a prism may be fitted in place of the mirror.
    • Macby
    • 14403 The cost of such a prism depends upon its size and the accuracy in working the angles. A prism 40 mm, clear aperture, 45° type, with special mounting, to fit in place of the mirror, can be supplied for the sum of ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 10 0
    • All mirror stems carrying the mirror brackets are provided with flats upon which a leaf spring bears so that the user may always be aware when the mirror is in the optic axis.
    • MICROSCOPE FEET
    • Two designs of foot are available—the English or tripod foot, and the horseshoe or Continental foot.—In consequence of its wide spread the tripod foot is of necessity more rigid than the horseshoe foot and will be found preferable by those who purchase microscopes for their own use, and by photomicrographers. The wide spread of the two front toes removes all restriction upon the apparatus which may be mounted on the substage. With this type of foot, rigidity is secured without undue weight.
    • Horseshoe Foot.
    • The lack of stability associated with this type of foot has been removed in Watson’s design. Actually, the foot is slightly undercut and bears on three points. The backward projection is sufficiently long and heavy for the microscope to be used horizontally without risk of its overbalancing. For use in classes among students this type of foot is recommended, for even if brought to the edge of the bench the back toe can overlap to some extent witbout fear of the instrument falling to the ground.
    • All Watson Microscopes can be provided with horseshoe or tripod foot at the option of the purchaser.
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f “* t 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
    • ^^7^/^7///7///7/^/7^/////^/>:y7/7/////^^^^ 2% *//////////=//////==/=====/======,,
  • n.n. - vue 46/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 45
    • The Tool Room, Watson s Works, Barnet.
    • -1
    • eihl a mV t way, A
    • The Machine Shop (looking East), Watson’s Works, Barnet.
    • St
    • 3 8
    • 898 8 08
    • OS 2 8 Sons 08 2.
    • 8 08 4 8 Sosos
    • ghog sol 863 IE
    • 6 z 0 sH S ws 10 803
    • 2 a 98
    • Soocoiod
  • n.n. - vue 47/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 46
    • MICROSCOPE STAGES
    • MICROSCOPE STAGES
    • Methods of Attachment.
    • To all Watson Microscopes the stages are attached in a unique manner. It will be seen from the shadow illustration of the optical bench limb (p. 38), that cast integrally with this limb are two widely-spaced massive brackets ; these are the stage carriers which are machined in the same operation as the limb surfaces, thus ensuring their position at right angles to the optic axis, and a freedom from flexion with perfect rigidity is assured.
    • The stages of microscopes may be divided into two classes—one, the plain stage, and the other with mechanical movements.
    • PLAIN STAGES.
    • All the Watson plain stages are of METAL and have the surface finely finished so that the object which is moved upon them with the fingers may do so quite freely and exactly.
    • To ensure the surface being optically flat, it is ground by similar tools and by the same process as that used for plane lenses. Spring clips are provided for holding the object in position, and the size and distance apart of the holes that receive the butts of the springs are standardised, so that any additional stage fittings such as a mechanical stage can be fitted through the same apertures in the stage as are provided for the spring clips.
    • The two principal forms of plain stages are :—
    • That fitted to the “ Kima ” Microscope (p. 57), which is 100 mm. x 95 mm. and is of solid metal, chemically bronzed on the surface; and that of the “ Service” Microscope (p. 61), which is mm. 125 x 125 mm.
    • At the point where these stages are fixed to the limb, a machined metal to metal contact is made, but the remainder of the “ Service ” Stage is entirely enclosed in vulcanised rubber, and to ensure that this vulcanised covering will remain flat even under tropical conditions, the metal of the stage has holes drilled at intervals so that the vulcanite meets through these apertures and becomes solid with the stage. (See illustration, p. 39.) The covering cannot buckle or distort.
    • ROTATING STAGE.
    • The plain stage is also made with the upper surface to rotate. Such an example is shown on p. 48.
    • MECHANICAL STAGES.
    • Mechanical stages are of two types, in each of which there is considerable diversity. One is the fixed mechanical stage which forms part of the microscope itself and cannot be detached, and the other consists of mechanical arrangements which are placed on the surface of the plain stage so that an object can be moved over its surface by means of the rackwork and screws provided.
    • SNA 8 3 si
    • SR 84 8 08 2
    • 8
    • Sons |o| 9 5
    • Sooned
    • '^/^/////^/^^/x/^/^^/^/^^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • frssssxssssssssxssssssssssssssxssssssssssss^^
  • n.n. - vue 48/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • MICROSCOPE STAGES
    • 47
    • In this catalogue the fixed form of mechanical stage is shown on such instruments as the “ H ” Edinburgh Student’s (p. 71), the “ Research ” (p. 73), “ Royal ” (p. 79) and the “ Van Heurck ” (p. 87). The principle of construction of all these is alike, and it is known as Watson’s “ Standard ” mechanical stage. For the highest excellence in working and accuracy of movement, this is unquestionably the most satisfactory pattern of stage that is made. The object is placed on the top plate and when moved horizontally or vertically the object and plate are displaced as a complete unit. Another advantage is that if an oil immersion condenser either of the direct transmitted light type, or the darkground type, be used in conjunction with an oil immersion Objective, the resistance of the immersion oil is overcome and the object is positively carried by the travelling top plate of the stage. With the attachable forms of mechanical stage the immersion oil is apt to retard the travel of the specimen.
    • This form of stage necessitates a large central aperture to the stage to accommodate the condenser top and the mechanical movements are in consequence limited to some extent. The clear horizontal and vertical motions of such stages is 1 in. Against this limitation, however, must be set the fact that slides of any thickness and any size from 2 in. upwards may be used.
    • THE ATTACHABLE FORM OF STAGE.
    • The attachable form of stage is made in several different patterns, and will be found illustrated on pages 48 and 49. These are made with extreme care and accuracy and are all arranged to be fitted on the surface of a plain stage, the object being held between two points and carried across the stage by means of rackwork and/or spiral screw in rectangular directions.
    • To add to the effective working, supplemental springs are fitted to all the Watson stages to secure the object. These have been found to add substantially to the sure action of the mechanical movements when immersion oil or dust might cause obstruction.
    • The following are some of the stages which are manufactured by W. Watson & Sons, Limited, with their special claims and features :—
    • The “ Service ” pattern mechanical stage—equivalent to a built-in mechanical stage, that is, a stage that is built as a permanent part of the microscope.
    • The " Alpha ” pattern mechanical stage, a simplified form employing the " Service ” motion.
    • The " Student ” mechanical stage, a simple robust enduring pattern of novel design.
    • The Murray Long Range stage for the examination of serial sections mounted on large plates, specimens up to 1-plate size, i.e. 44 in. x 34 in. (106 mm. x 81 mm.), may be examined from corner to corner.
    • The “ Bactil ” stage, a built-in type with removable motions which permit the substitution of a plain plate for fluid preparations.
    • The " Patna ” stage, a rotating mechanical stage with centring movements.
    • All these stages are interchangeable on any microscope of Watson’s manufacture with the exception of the " Kima ” model. The price has been placed against each stage, so that the difference in price may be known and added to the cost of any instrument listed with another form of mechanical stage ; the substituted type being capable of adaptation at the price shown.
    • 2 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. j ^zzz/zzz//zzzzzzz//z//z//zzz//////z//z//z/z//z///zz/zzz//z////////z//zzzzzzz//zz//z/zzZ
    • ^/^^/^///////^///X///^//////^^^^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1 ^z///zzzzzzzz/zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz/z///zzzzzzzzz/Z
  • n.n. - vue 49/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 48
    • MICROSCOPE STAGES
    • THE “SERVICE” MECHANICAL STAGE
    • (As described^ page 49.)
    • 20
    • 20
    • 50
    • 60
    • 70
    • 80
    • Fig. 12.
    • The “ Service Mechanical Stage.
    • 30 40
    • 1
    • 1
    • W. Watson & Sons, Ltd London Hf76
    • # 1
    • Fig. 16. Concentric Rotating Sta
    • H
    • H
    • 10
    • 20
    • • 0
    • 10
    • © 30
    • 0 a
    • Fig. 13. The attaching studs and screws of the “ Service” and 44 Alpha” Stages.
    • O © ©-o
    • ©0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
    • __l. i 1 i * 1 i ’ 1 I i t i i ! I 1 1 1 1 i i i i I 1 i 1 . i i i i i II i . i i i i i 1 i i i i I 1 1 i i I i i i i i i i i t I i i i i i i i I I i i i I i I i I I
    • W. Watson & Sons.Ltd-London
    • 11313
    • FIG. 14. The 66 Alpha” Attachable
    • Mechanical Stage.
    • p/y////r////7/SS/SSSssssssssfssssssArss/y/ss/SSSSSSSy/SSSS//sss//7S/7SS^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • 4zzzzzz,%</zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz/rzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz/Z
  • n.n. - vue 50/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • MICROSCOPE STAGES
    • 49
    • “SERVICE” MECHANICAL STAGE. (As illustrated on page 48.)
    • Contrary to usual practice the horizontal motion of this stage is effected by a 1-circle rack which engages with a helical screw ; actually there are eight teeth in engagement, thus minimising the risk of loss of time resulting from wear common to the horizontal action of all mechanical stages. The rack for the vertical motion is mounted in the centre of the stage instead of at the side, so that the thrust incidental to this form of movement is negligible. Provided with accurately ground base plates this stage fits in intimate contact with the plain stage of the microscope and gives the satisfactory performance of a fully built-in mechanical stage. Horizontally the motion is 3 in. (75 mm.) clear, vertical 1% in. (37 mm.). Millimetre scales are fitted to each movement and read by verniers to 0T mm.
    • The stage is secured to the microscope in the following manner: two projecting steel rods fit through the apertures provided for the stage springs, which are standardised in respect of size and distance apart. These rods have threads at their lower end to which milled nuts are fitted; these nuts are screwed up from below the plain stage and hold the mechanical stage firmly in position. It can also be adapted to most modern makes of microscopes.
    • Code Word No.
    • Madba 14901 “ Service” Mechanical Stage, price ... ... ... ... ... ... £9 5 0
    • “ALPHA” MECHANICAL STAGE. (As illustrated on page 48.)
    • This is similar in its horizontal motion to the “ Service ” pattern stage, the same method being used and the complete movement being 3 in. The vertical motion by rack and pinion is limited to 1 in. clear and mounted at the side of the stage.
    • This mechanical stage is of the skeleton type but will be found thoroughly efficient. It is fixed to the microscope in the same way as the “ Service ” stage and provided with scales and verniers.
    • Code Word No.
    • Madbe 14902 “ Alpha ” Mechanical Stage, price ... ... ... ... ... ... £7 0 0
    • Student Mechanical Stage. FIG. 16a. Student Mechanical Stage.
    • D
    • FIG. 15. Murray’s Long-Range Mechanical Stage.
    • WWATSON & SONS LIP LONDON
    • LONDON
    • Can be fixed to Watson microscopes through stage spring holes or to other makes by clamp. Horizontal and vertical motions are by rack and pinion. Members D and E are solid units,—no screws to become loose— 3 in. x 1 in clear motion, compensating adjustments to movements, deep section bearings ensuring durability.
    • Code Word Madbi Madbo
    • No.
    • 14903
    • 14904
    • Price with mm. scales and verniers
    • Price without scales and verniers
    • £4 15 0
    • 4 5 0
    • MURRAY LONG-RANGE ATTACHABLE MECHANICAL STAGE.
    • For the examination of serial brain. Cytological and other sections, over an area of IIS mm. x85 mm.
    • This stage was devised by Dr. Murray, Director of the Imperial Cancer Research Laboratories, for work in which a mechanical stage having a long range of movement was essential. It
    • KNNNA
    • SI a
    • IP 898 8 0s 08 %
    • Sons
    • OS
    • 80
    • SH
    • H 5
    • Sosoooi
    • D
  • n.n. - vue 51/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 50
    • MICROSCOPE STAGES
    • differs from other stages of a similar character, particularly in its great stability and the rigid method of attachment to the plain stage.
    • The horizontal movement is 115 mm., the vertical movement 85 mm. Both movements are
    • provided with millimetre scales and read by verniers.
    • In addition, both the object clips are movable so that any size of specimen may be accommodated, one of the object clips being fitted with verniers reading on a millimetre scale which is doubly engraved for this purpose.
    • Glass slides as small as 4 in. x 3 in. can be held and conveniently examined.
    • Code Word No,
    • Madhu 15001 Murray’s Long-Range Stage
    • Price £1110 0
    • CONCENTRIC ROTATING STAGE. (As illustrated on page 48.)
    • This stage rotates concentrically and can be supplied in place of the ordinary square stage when required. It is 44 in. diameter.
    • Code Word No.
    • Madby 15002
    • Mafba 15003
    • Mafbe 15004
    • The extra cost of this stage in place of the ordinary square pattern is ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... £2 0 0
    • Divisions to rotation reading by verniers to five minutes ... 2 5 0
    • Extra for centring screws and clamp to rotation ... ... 15 0
    • “ H ” EDINBURGH STUDENT’S TYPE MECHANICAL STAGE.
    • This mechanical stage offers unsurpassed advantages to the research worker who wishes to concentrate upon relatively small areas to attain critical images in conjunction with high-power immersion or dark ground condensers, and oil immersion Objectives. It is fitted to the “ H ” Edinburgh Student’s Microscope, to the " Royal ” Microscope and in larger form to the " Van Heurck ” series of Microscopes. It is of exceptional rigidity, but the range of motion is limited to 37 mm. horizontally and 37 mm. vertically.
    • This mechanical stage may be selected in place of other patterns quoted on the other models of microscopes.
    • Code Word No.
    • Mafbi 15005 “ H ” Edinburgh Student’s Mechanical Stage, including base
    • plate ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Price £10 15 0
    • " RESEARCH ” PATTERN MECHANICAL STAGE.
    • This is similar to the “ II ” Edinburgh Student’s form (see page 75) in general design, but the milled heads controlling the horizontal and vertical motions are mounted on the same shaft on the Turrell principle.
    • For the amateur worker and for those who are prepared to use immersion oil with caution, this stage is exceedingly convenient and may be substituted for any of the other models quoted. The horizontal motion is 45 mm. and the vertical motion 37 mm.
    • Code Word No.
    • Mafbo 15006 “ Research ” Mechanical Stage, including base plate ... Price £12 0 0
    • Mafbu 15007 For substitution in place of Mechanical Stage on “ Bactil ” or
    • " H ” Edinburgh Student’s Microscope, add to cost of Stand ... £15 0
    • “ BACTIL " MECHANICAL STAGE.
    • This is in every way similar to the “ Service ” mechanical stage save that it is built into the microscope. The horizontal motion and top plate are removable and may be replaced by a plain plate for fluid preparations.
    • Code Word No.
    • Mafby 15008 “ Bactil” Mechanical Stage, including fitting ... ... Price £10 15 0
    • " PATNA " MECHANICAL STAGE.
    • This mechanical stage is similar to the " Service ” pattern, having 3 in. clear horizontal motion, 11 in. clear vertical motion. It is further, of the rotating type, fitted with centring screws and clamp to rotation. It is mounted direct to the microscope and provided with a separate interchangeable rotating plain stage.
    • Code Word No.
    • Magba 15009 " Patna” Mechanical Stage, with interchangeable plain stage
    • Price £13 0 0
    • ^^/^^////^/^/^/^^/^/^/z^/y^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. :
    • ^M^^^^^/^^/^^/^/^/r^^//^/^^^
    • 7SSS/////SSSS/7SSSSS/r/7SS/rsSSSS7S/7SS^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • w/^7/^/7/7/yy//^///7/'//77//7^/^/77/^^^^/7^y/7^^^
  • n.n. - vue 52/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • ADDITIONAL FITTINGS—MECHANICAL DRAWTUBE
    • 51
    • ATTACHABLE RACKWORK DRAWTUBE
    • The mechanical drawtube is arranged to replace the ordinary sliding drawtube that is supplied with the " H ” Edinburgh Student’s, the " Bactil ” and the “Service” Microscopes.
    • Fig. 17
    • Reference to the accompanying illustration will show that this mechanical drawtube is an independent attachment consisting of a long bearing fitting, which carries the rackwork draw-tube " A ” and an inner tube “ B,” which slides in the ordinary way.
    • The great convenience of it is that it can be immediately interchanged with the ordinary drawtube fitting, in the above-mentioned Microscopes.
    • The collar which carries the sliding drawtube is unscrewed ; the screw attached to the mechanical drawtube, being identical, enables the latter fitting to interchange with the ordinary sliding drawtube.
    • Lest the milled heads should not come exactly square with the front when the tube is screwed home, a knurled ring " C ” is provided, and this enables the fitting to be clamped in any desired position.
    • The use of the new " Cassegrain ” Dark Ground Illuminator (see page 30) has emphasised the necessity for adjustment for exact tube length, to obtain the maximum effect from modern Objectives, and this new attachment is one item in the list of fittings which enables the user to convert his Student’s Microscope into a research model.
    • Cord Word—Macac. 15101 Price of the Rackwork Drawtube ... ... £4 10 0
    • NOTE.-—This Mechanical Drawtube can be fitted to any existing “ Bactil ” or " Service ” Microscope, and the “ H ” Edinburgh Student’s Microscope from 34139 onwards. Further, it can be fitted to any instrument having a body tube with an internal diameter of 15 in.
    • 808
    • 6 A Sons
    • Z 08 808
    • 68 z| 808 8 028
    • HI
    • 2
    • 8
    • S000000088 hl 8 1 s 808
    • P
    • SHs 80S E zl 08
    • SH8 S td § 80 880 82 8 8
    • 8 91
  • n.n. - vue 53/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 52
    • GUARANTEE
    • A FIVE YEARS’ GUARANTEE
    • Accompanies all Microscopes made by W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., together with
    • “THE BOOK OF THE WATSON MICROSCOPE,”
    • a 32-page illustrated book giving hints on the use of the Microscope, directions for its preservation and adjustment, and much information for beginners in Microscopy. A table showing the magnifications of the Objectives and Eyepieces in the outfit is also provided.
    • The following is a copy of the guarantee :—
    • W. WATSON & SONS’ MICROSCOPES
    • GUARANTEE
    • We berebE guarantee
    • 1. That the Microscope No. sold herewith has been made and finished in our works at High Barnet, Herts., and London, and all reasonable precautions taken to secure excellence both of material and workmanship.
    • 2. If any defect—not being a defect resulting from wear and tear, improper adjustment, dirt, misuse, neglect or abuse—should appear in any part of this instrument within FIVE YEARS from the date of invoice, we will make good or replace such defective part free of charge, and will pay carriage on such part both ways, namely, to and from our Head Office, 313 High Holborn, London, W.C.
    • 3. To inspect and adjust this Microscope free of charge at any time within TWO YEARS from the date of invoice if sent carriage paid to our Head Office, 313 High Holborn, London, W.C.; and
    • 4. To correct the effects of fair wear and tear to this Microscope free of charge at any time within TWO YEARS from the date of invoice if sent carriage paid to 313 High Holborn, London, W.C., provided the instrument has not been exposed to abuse, dirt, misuse or neglect.
    • This Guarantee is given only to the original purchaser, and is not transferable, and does not apply to any instrument which has been bought second-hand, let out on hire, taken out of the United Kingdom, or from which the name and number have been removed. All instruments excepted from this Guarantee are excluded from any Guarantee of any kind, and are used at the owner’s sole risk.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
    • Note.— Where a number of Watson’s Microscopes are in use in one Laboratory or Institution, a Mechanician ivill be sent to clean and adjust them on request at any time within two years from the date of supply without any charge tvhatever for services. The only expenses incurred would be for out-of-pocket, travelling (third-class), and, if necessary, hotel charges.
    • ys7sss//sssss/7sssssssys//ss/sssssys/s//sss/ssssssssssss/w^^
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • ^y^yyyyyyyyyyyyy^yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy^yyyyyyyyyy/’/’/^yy/y^^
    • ^/7/77/77//7///7/7/7/7^//7/////^/^/7/7//^^^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^y^yy^/^^/^/y/^/^/z/^/^^/^^^
  • n.n. - vue 54/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • WATSON MICROSCOPE
    • 53
    • REASONS FOR CHOOSING A WATSON MICROSCOPE
    • It is British made, and has a special claim on British workers.
    • It is scientifically constructed for scientific work. Whenever a Microscopist is desirous of wresting from his instrument the utmost it is capable of producing, he has of necessity to employ the refinements and conveniences which the long experience of experts has proved to be the sole means for achieving such results. All of these are embodied in the Watson Microscopes.
    • The following distinctive features are peculiar to Watson Microscopes and will not be found in combination, and, in the majority of cases, not individually in any make of British or Continental Microscope.
    • The Watson Microscope has
    • The unit construction of the body ensures a rigidity and permanence hitherto unapproached.
    • The large diameter drawtube overcomes halation and simplifies photomicrography, and permits the use of larger illuminating cones.
    • The Tripod or modified horseshoe foot which imparts perfect rigidity. A Microscope so mounted does not fall over when touched.
    • A long range of Coarse Adjustment, enabling it to be used for low magnifications as well as for the highest. A wide range of fully corrected low-power Objectives is also supplied.
    • A mechanical drawtube which allows of precise adjustment of the tube length for thickness of cover glass.
    • A Mechanical Stage scientifically constructed as a part of the whole instrument, with a long range of motion and long effective life. Where attachable the method of attachment ensures the rigidity of the stage on the microscope and ready repetitions of the vernier readings.
    • A Compound Substage with centring screws, so that the Condenser or dark ground illuminator may be easily rendered axial with the Objective. It is fitted with rackwork to focus, controlled from both sides of the limb, and can be supplied with a Fine Adjustment.
    • It is constructed on the Optical Bench system, which ensures greater rigidity and perfection of working than any other method.
    • The fittings carry Substage Apparatus, Eyepieces and Objectives of the Royal Microscopical Society’s standard size.
    • The working parts have sprung fittings with adjusting screws, whereby wear and tear may be compensated for.
    • The Substage Condensers have the necessary aplanatic cones for developing the fullest capacity of the Objective. They are achromatised and improve the performance of any Objective.
    • WATSON’S BRITISH-MADE MICROSCOPES
    • are the instruments of to-day and the future. If you use one of them you will work to the fullest advantage.
    • ^xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxi^
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • (
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • ^'XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX^.
  • n.n. - vue 55/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 54
    • “MYRAL
    • THE " MYRAL" MICROSCOPE
    • The essentials for classes in Elementary Botany, Zoology, etc., are to be found in the “ Myral ” Microscope.
    • The construction is simple but effective, and is designed to withstand rough handling.
    • The adjustment to focus has been redesigned and depends upon a rack and pinion of our standard quality which is exceedingly smooth and precise in action. For fine focussing the rack and pinion should be found satisfactory if care is used, but the Eyepiece may be gently rotated and extended or pushed in as required.
    • The “ Myral ” Microscope carries Objectives and Eyepieces of standard (Universal) size.
    • The stage is large and firmly supported.
    • The mirror is concave.
    • The limb and foot are in one casting which is durably finished in hard black enamel.
    • When equipped with the Objectives and Eyepieces supplied in the sets listed below, the “ Myral ” Microscope will be found an excellent instrument for the use of schools and beginners. The Objectives and Eyepieces are of good performance.
    • Dimensions.—Body tube: Length, 140 mm. (5% in.). Stage: 100 x 100 mm. (4 x4 in.). Total height, 280 mm. (11 in.).
    • Code Word. No. £ S. d.
    • Myrab 15401 Stand as described, with 3 in. Argus Objective and one Eyepiece (1, 2, 3 or 4), in hard fibre case ... 4 0 0
    • Myred 15402 Stand as described, with 14 in. and 3 in. Argus Objectives, one Eyepiece (1, 2, 3 or 4), and double Nosepiece, in hard fibre case 5 12 6
    • Myric 15403 Stand as described, with 3 in. and l in. Argus Objectives, one Eyepiece (1, 2, 3 or 4), double Nosepiece and Iris Diaphragm in understage sleeve, in hard fibre case 7 15 6
    • Myrox 15404 Stand as described, with 1| in., 3 in. and l in. Argus Objectives, one Eyepiece (1, 2, 3 or 4), triple Nosepiece, Iris Diaphragm in understage sleeve, in hard fibre case 9 17 6
    • The “ Myral ” Microscope is supplied only in sets as above.
    • y/7/7/7j'/7/>Y/7^/7y////y/X/77/77/7/7////^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 £zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZ
    • br-KM*******
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
    • f/r//s//s///7//s////r/r/////w^^^
  • n.n. - vue 56/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • “ MYRAL”
    • 55
    • THE "MYRAL" MICROSCOPE
    • Height, II inches.
    • W. Watson & SONS, LTD
    • -LONDON
    • ^/^/7/A^/y^^7////7//7/7/^/7/7^^
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • VS//SSS//7S/SSSS/S//7/7/7//S//7//7/S///7S////S/7//M^
    • ’^SSSSr/7/SS/7S/7/7S//S///7/7///7/7S/7777SS^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I ^/7^/7/77/7/77//7/7//////7/7/7/^/77/y/77/7/^7/7/7^^
  • n.n. - vue 57/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 56
    • “ KIMA 3
    • THE "KIMA" MICROSCOPE
    • This instrument conforms to the specification for a Student’s Microscope as drawn up by the British Science Guild.
    • It has been designed to meet the wishes of those who desire to secure Watson quality but whose needs are satisfied by a somewhat simpler model. The stand is somewhat smaller in design and to reduce expense to a minimum the drawtube is omitted, and the coarse adjustment instead of being fitted with dovetailed slide and compensated bearings is of the less costly Continental (round bar) type. Metal is employed for the stage.
    • All fittings are to standard sizes, any Eyepieces or Objectives to R.M.S. dimensions may be fitted. The stage will take “ Student ” or " Alpha ” mechanical stages, the underfitting our standard understage mountings.
    • SPECIFICATION.
    • Coarse Adjustment. Diagonal rack and pinion of standard quality, with long range of movement for focussing low-pow er Objectives.
    • Fine Adjustment. Vertical lever pattern, operated by milled heads on both sides of the limb. One turn of heads moves the body 230 inch. Stops to travel in each direction making damage through strain impossible.
    • Body Tube. Total tube-length, 160 mm. (6|in.), diameter 37 mm. If tube-length is to be varied from the standard a drawtube must be added, see extras, page 58. Universal standard fittings for Objectives and Eyepieces.
    • Stage of solid metal bronzed on surface. Dimensions 100 x 95 mm. (4 x 33 in.). Distance from optic axis to limb exceeds 3 in. Mounted on wide lugs cast integrally with the limb.
    • Underfitting. Universal size. Plain tubular sliding focussing. Alternative the spiral focussing screw underfitting. See extras, page 58. Compound centring and rack focussing substages cannot be supplied for this model.
    • Limb. Curved for convenience in lifting.
    • Joint. Inclination through 90 degrees with rigid support at all positions.
    • Foot. Modified horseshoe, wide spread to toes ensuring perfect rigidity.
    • Mirrors. Plane and Concave, adjustable independently of stage or condenser.
    • Finish. Hard black enamel, milled heads in bright lacquer. Bright parts can be supplied in chromium plating if preferred.
    • EAAN3 lai a
    • IP M| 80s 2 8
    • Sons 10 E U 8'8 SANA
    • s 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • fos//r/s///7/s/7//7ss/7/s/ss/7s//s/7/7//ss/y//ys/s/s/s^^^
  • n.n. - vue 58/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • “ KIMA ”
    • 57
    • THE “ KIMA” MICROSCOPE
    • Height, 11Z inches.
    • Price List see page 58.
  • n.n. - vue 59/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 58
    • “ KIMA ”
    • PRICE LIST OF WATSON’S “KIMA” MICROSCOPE
    • A Fitted Case is included with the Sets specified below, but if not required, a reduction of 20/- will be made from the Set.
    • Code Word. No. Kaleb 15801 £ s. d. Stand with Argus Objectives 3 in. and l in. One Eyepiece (No. 1, 2, 3 or 4) 8 10 0
    • Kalid 15802 Stand with Argus Objectives 3 in. and B in. One Eyepiece (No. 1, 2, 3 or 4). Iris Diaphragm to fit Understage fitting 9 5 0
    • Keelo 15803 Stand with Abbe model Illuminator, Iris Diaphragm No. 12803. Argus Objectives 3 in. and l in. Two Eyepieces (Nos. 1, 2, 3 or 4). Double Nosepiece ... ... ... ... ... 12 10 0
    • Kegon 15804 Stand with Spiral Screw Underfitting No. 14202. Argus Objectives 3 in. and l in. Abbe Illuminator, with Iris Diaphragm No. 12803. Two Eyepieces (Nos. 1, 2, 3 or 4). Triple Nosepiece ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 13 12 6
    • Kepol 15805 Stand with Spiral Screw Underfitting No. 14202. Argus Objectives 3 in. and 1 in. and " Utility ” 1 in. Oil Immersion. Abbe Illuminator with Iris Diaphragm No. 12803. Two Eyepieces (Nos. 1, 2, 3 or 4). Triple Nosepiece ... ... ... 18 12 6
    • Kepla 15806 1 in. “ Versalic ” instead of 1 in. " Utility,” extra to set 15805 IIO 0 EXTRAS.
    • Kestr 15807 Drawtube ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 8 6
    • Mason 15808 Spiral Focussing Screw Underfitting ... ... ... ... 0 17 6
    • Manfu 15809 " Alpha ” Mechanical Stage ... ... ... ... ... 7 0 0
    • Magbe 158010 " Student” type Mechanical Stage, with divisions ... 4 15 0 Without divisions ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 5 0
    • Mange 158011 Pointer to Eyepiece ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 5 0 Microscope Stand alone cannot be supplied.
    • EN
    • w//777//^/7/y/yMy/y/7^/7/’/7////^^
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. s
    • SANNAS g 863 g E 2 68 IHS 8 wd s ol 828 2
    • 4 6
    • %oaNoX
  • n.n. - vue 60/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • “ SERVICE 33
    • 59
    • THE "SERVICE" MICROSCOPE
    • FOR BACTERIOLOGY, BOTANY, HISTOLOGY, PATHOLOGY, AND ZOOLOGY
    • The most efficient, robust, rigid and enduring Student Microscope ever offered. Since it was first introduced in 1919 it has led all design and the latest model is fully as much in advance of present day design as—in its time—was the 1919 model.
    • The “ Service ” Model Microscope in its varied forms to-day predominates in the British Universities.
    • This instrument may be supplied in the simplest form with minimum equipment, and' by the addition of further fittings—all accurately standardised—built up into a complete research model. A survey of these many mechanical attachments will be found in the chapter on construction principles.
    • By stringent manufacturing tests, final inspections of searching thoroughness, service after purchase, Watson Microscopes have established a reputation second to none.
    • SPECIFICATION
    • Total Height when body is racked down and drawtube closed, 310 mm. (124 in.).
    • Body. Unit construction, 40 mm. diameter. Tube-length including nosepiece, 155 mm. extending to 205 mm. Supplied usually to take standard size Eyepieces, but can be supplied to accommodate any other size up to 1-27 in.
    • Drawtube. New design, 34 mm. diameter. Fitted with standard R.M.S. Objective thread for photomicrographic Objectives, etc., chromium plated. Double engraved to show tube-lengths with and without nosepiece. Eyepiece fitting removable by unscrewing for photomicrography with photographic Objectives.
    • Coarse Adjustment by rack and pinion. A specially hard metal is used for the rack. All racks are bedded solidly to the rib. The rack and pinion will mesh on any tooth.
    • Fine Adjustment by vertical lever controlled from both sides of the limb. One complete rotation moves the body 20 inch. See page 37.
    • Stage. Metal casting with ebonite moulded over all surfaces. Reagent proof. Optically flat upper surface. Mounted on wide lugs cast with the limb. Distance from back of limb to axis, 90 mm. Size, 125 mm. x 125 mm. Height from table, 125 mm. Will take any Watson mechanical stage. See page 48.
    • Condenser Fittings. Plain tubular. Rackwork focussing. Rackwork focussing with centring screws. Research type with built-in iris diaphragm, centring screws and condenser slides, see page 43. All Watson substages focus from both sides of the limb.
    • Mirrors. Plane and concave, 50 mm. diameter. Adjustable independently of the condenser.
    • Limb. Optical bench pattern, slides for fine adjustment and substage machined in same operation ensuring permanent alignment.
    • Foot. Modified horseshoe pattern, 7 in. from back to front, imparts absolute rigidity to instrument in any position by its perfect proportioning.
    • Bearings. All movements are fitted with Watson’s patented compensating adjustments. They guarantee a lifetime of working efficiency.
    • Finish. Hard black enamel, acid and reagent resisting, smooth finish. Milled heads and slides bright lacquer. (For tropics, black enamel and chromium.)
    • Case. Mahogany, hand dovetailed. (For tropics all blocks and joints are screwed.)
    • Guarantee. Usual Watson, covering five years.
    • " SERVICE ” BOOKLET
    • A Booklet is published giving interesting information regarding the construction of the " Service ” Microscope. It will be sent post-free on application.
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. s ‘* I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. ,
    • ZzzzzzzzzxzzzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZzZ 2. 4y/S/////"/S////S/S////S///SSS"/SSSSSS/SSS///SSSS"//////SSSSSSSSSSSW^^^
  • n.n. - vue 61/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 60
    • “ SERVICE”
    • WATSON’S "SERVICE" MICROSCOPE
    • Code Word. Malpa Malpy No. PRICES £s.d. 16001 “ Service” Microscope Stand only with Plain Understage 9 1 6 16002 “ Service” Microscope Stand with Rackwork Focussing Substage ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 II 6
    • Malro 16003 “ Service ” Microscope Stand only with Compound Centring Substage ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 13 0 0
    • Malrx 16004 “ Service ” Microscope Stand only with Research Substage, Fig. 11, page 43, and two condenser slides ... ... ... 17 5 0
    • Mamse 16005 " Service ” Microscope Stand with Plain Understage Carrier 3 in. and l in. Parachromatic Objectives. 1 Eyepiece (No. 1, 2,3 or 4) ... ... ... ... ... 15 10 0
    • Malte 16006 Set 16005, with the addition of an Iris Diaphragm ... 16 5 0 Nosepieces for either of the above Sets, page 22.
    • Mamon 16007 “ Service” Microscope with Rackwork Focussing Substage. 3 in. and l in. Parachromatic Objectives. 2 Eyepieces (Nos. 1, 2, 3 or 4). Abbe Illuminator N.A. 1-20 with Iris Diaphragm No. 12803. Triple Nosepiece ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 20 0 0
    • Manac 16008 " Service ” Microscope with Rackwork Focussing Substage with Objectives, etc., as in Set 16007 with the addition of: i in." Versalic ” Oil Immersion Objective ... ... ... 26 10 0
    • Manag 16009 " Service ” Microscope with Compound Centring Substage (Fig. 10), having rackwork to focus and screws to centre, and complete accessories as in Set 16008 ... ... ... 28 15 0
    • Manax 160010 " Service” Microscope with Research Substage (Fig. 11) with two condenser slides. Complete accessories as in Set 16008, with the addition of Holoscopic dark ground Paraboloid and funnel stop ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 36 0 0
    • NOTE.—" Utility ” 1 in. Oil Immersion Objective 1-25 (price £5) can be supplied in Sets 16008 and 16009 at a reduction in price of £1 10 0.
    • A fitted mahogany cabinet is included with the sets specified above, but if not required deduct £14 9 from the price of the set.
    • EXTRAS
    • Manda 160013 " Service ” Mechanical Stage as described on page 49, Fig. 12, may be included with any of the above Sets at an extra cost of 9 5 0
    • Manfu 160014 " Alpha ” Attachable Mechanical Stage, as described on pages 48 and 49, may be included in any of the above Sets at an extra cost of ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7 0 0 “ Student ” Type Mechanical Stage (page 49)
    • Magbi Magbo 160015 With divisions to movements ... ... ... ... ... 4 15 0 160016 Without divisions to movements ... ... ... ... 4 5 0 Packing and carriage charged extra.
    • Special Teak Cabinets with Screwed Joints and Fittings, suitable for Foreign, Colonial and Tropical use, are supplied at a cost of 20/- beyond the prices shown above.
    • For high-power Binocular bodies for above Microscope, see pages 105-107.
    • ^•Z/XZzZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ^'ZZVZZZ'Z.^ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ^ZZZzZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZ^, % '4W"/'"////'//'///////"////'"/'//'/MV/""""M'‘WWW/'""/'///'WM'/MV/'S
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 “ 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
    • ^//7/7/^//7/7/7/7/7/77//7//^^//y7^/7A^^ 2 Weeocceccecececeececoccecceceecececeocecececeececececeeseeceesececcencecceeceecceceseeoik
  • n.n. - vue 62/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • “SERVICE”
    • THE “SERVICE” MICROSCOPE
    • 61
    • Height, 12 inches.
    • & SONS,LTE
    • "SERVICE
    • ^///////////S/S//////////S//////S//7////////////7///S///////7/7^^^
    • | W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
    • W77/^///7//7/^/7//77////7/7/7/7/7^7/7/////7/^/7/^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 63/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 62
    • PHYSICIAN’S OUTFIT
    • 1 ^
    • 17 />
    • >^“"
    • ^ /
    • IB ^
    • A: J MI
    • The above is an illustration of a conveniently arranged Microscope with equipment ready for immediate use in Consulting-room and Laboratory, as described in Dr. Coles’ “ Critical Microscopy.”
    • Code Word. No.
    • Magni 16201
    • PRICES £ s. d.
    • The Mahogany Board is fitted to receive Microscope, Lamp and Accessories ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 0 0
    • Magpi
    • 16202 Lamp is similar to our Standard pattern, but is arranged so that the chimney can be turned aside on the pillar when not
    • in use and is fitted with small condensing Lens with adjustments 4 5 0
    • Mahog 16203 Bell Glass to cover Microscope, according to size of Microscope
    • from 0 17 6
    • ^/^/AW77/7//7/^/^^/////7^^^^ /////4iW//4!«i»
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. |
    • t^y^^y^^/^^^^^^/^/^/^^^^ v^^/y^^^M
    • p''sssfs<MwrfSS'///M'/f/7'///s/''77'S7/77/7777/7/7W7s/rss/’sffSffffrffff/prf/w
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
    • ^///////////////////////////////////Z ^/^^/y^/^^/^^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 64/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • E BACTIL’ AND “ PATNA”
    • 63
    • THE " BACTIL" AND "PATNA" MICROSCOPES (MODIFIED 1933)
    • (Constructed to the specification of the British Science Guild, for a High-Power Research Microscope.)
    • For Research, the Laboratory and General High-Power Work.
    • These models are in general construction the same as the " Service ” Microscope, but with a larger foot and the added and very important modification that the instrument is fitted and adjusted by hand in the same manner as our best Research Microscopes ; each part is co-ordinated and the instrument is built up and supplied as a complete entity.
    • It is possible to add the “ Service ” Mechanical Stage, and a Compound Substage, to a “ Service ” Microscope, but the result achieved by building the whole at one time as in the " Bactil ” Microscope, is a more satisfactory one, and its advantages will be readily recognised.
    • In the “ Patna ” model the mechanical stage is provided in addition with rotation, centring screws clamp to rotation. A plane plate replaces the mechanical stage when required.
    • For interchangeable high-power binocular and monocular bodies, standard type and inclined, see page 106. The unit construction of the body is maintained.
    • The stage—which is of the " Service ” model, Fig. 12, page 48—is now built in on a heavy metal base plate. For work with fluid preparations or under other conditions where a plain stage is an advantage, the whole upper surface and horizontal motion of the stage is racked off and replaced by a plane plate 5" x 5", so providing a level surface and protection for the rack.
    • The Coarse and Fine Adjustments are as described in connection with the " Service ” Micro-scope on page 37. The Standard Condenser Carrier is a Compound Substage (Fig. 10, page 41) with Centring Screws. If provision for hinging the condenser out of the optical axis be required, specify the new substage mount, page 31. The Research substage may also be fitted if required, for prices see page 43.
    • The dove-tailed fittings in which all mechanical movements take place are provided with compensating bearings.
    • The whole instrument receives most careful and accurate adjustment and ensures that smooth and exquisite working that can be imparted only by the expenditure of unrestricted time on the part of the skilled craftsman.
    • Dr. Murray’s Long-Range Stage or any of the other stages described between pages 47 and 50 may be supplied in place of the “ Service ” Mechanical Stage, if desired, at the prices shown.
    • Rackwork drawtube, substage lamp, all can be fitted to these models and used to advantage.
    • ^/7//^77/>7/>W/7/77/7/77/777//7/7/7/7/77^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • ^^^/y^//^/^//^/7/7777/7//^^/7/^/77/M^
  • n.n. - vue 65/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 64
    • “ BACTIL”
    • THE “ BACTIL” MICROSCOPE
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. Merid No. 16401 " Bactil ” Microscope Stand only with Mahogany Case Deduct for case if not required £2 10 0. ... € 27 s. 10 d. 0
    • Meria 16402 Complete Sets— “ Bactil ” Microscope, Mahogany Case. Two Eyepieces (at choice) x 5, x 6, x 8, x 10. Objectives Para. % in. N.A. 0-28, Semi Apo. % in. N.A. 0-70. Abbe Condenser N.A. 1-20 fully mounted. Double Nosepiece ... 36 12 6
    • Merit 16403 " Bactil ” Microscope, Mahogany Case equipped as B 16402 with the addition of “ Versalic ” Oil Immersion. 1 in. Objective. Triple in place of double Nosepiece ... 42 10 0
    • Merle 16404 " Bactil ” Microscope, Mahogany Case. Eyepieces two Holos: Series, x 7, x 10, x 14, x 20, at choice. Objectives Holos: 16 mm. N.A. 0-45. „ „ 4 mm. N.A. 0-95. „ „ 2 mm. N.A. 1-37 oil. imm. Triple Nosepiece. Universal Condenser fully mounted 60 10 0
    • Merma 16405 " Bactil ” Microscope, Mahogany Case. Eyepieces Holos: Series, x 7, x 10, x 20. Objectives Apochromatic: 16 mm. N.A. 0-30. ,, ,, 8 mm. N.A. 0:65. „ ,, 4 mm. N.A. 0-85 „ „ 2 mm. N.A. 1-37 oil imm. Research Substage. Parachromatic Condenser. Quadruple Nosepiece. One spare Condenser Slide three 76 0 0
    • EXTRAS
    • Merri 16406 Universal or Parachromatic Condenser in place of pattern in Sets 16402/3 ... Abbe 4 5 0
    • Macac 16407 Rackwork and Plain Drawtubes, page 51 4 10 0
    • Pragm 16408 Research Substage and two slides, page 43, Sets 16402/3/4 ... 4 15 0
    • Sabre 16409 High-Power Binocular Bodies, page 105-7 from 10 0 0
    • The Sets quoted on page 60 can be supplied with the “ Bactil ” Microscope at a reduction in price of £2 10 0.
    • pss/sysssAssssssssssrsssssssss/rsssw^
    • 1 W. WATSON •& SONS, LTD. f //7////^y/^^/7^/^^^/7/7/^/7^^^
    • rsss/r/ssssss/s/sss/rssss/wr/rsssssss/r^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 66/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • ‘ BACTIL”
    • 65
    • THE “ BACTIL ” MICROSCOPE
    • Height, 12 inches.
    • '^^^^^^//7/77//^//7/7/'^/'X^77^/7^7^^^77777^7^/'^^x^/^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
    • W.WATSON & SONS,LTP LONDON.
    • E
  • n.n. - vue 67/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 66
    • “ PATNA 33
    • THE 4 PATNA” MICROSCOPE
    • This Microscope corresponds in general details and construction with the " Bactil ” instrument described on page 63, but instead of the fixed Stage supplied with that instrument, the " Patna ” has a concentric rotating Stage, 42 in. diameter, with centring movement by means of screws, on which mechanical movements are fitted, giving a range of 75 mm. horizontally and 25 mm. vertically.
    • Scales and verniers enable readings to be taken to one-tenth of a millimetre.
    • A clamp to the rotation is provided.
    • A second plain circular metal stage 5 ins. (125 mm.) diam. is included, and can be interchanged with the Mechanical Stage, giving a perfectly plain surface for rough work.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Synco 16601 “ Patna ” Microscope, as illustrated on page 67, complete with two Stages, as described above, with concentric rotation in mahogany case Deduct for case if not required £2 10 0. 30 0 0
    • Synta 16602 " Patna ” Microscope as described, in mahogany case :—-2 Eyepieces—at choice— x 5, x 6, x 8, x 10. Objectives : Parachromatic 16 mm. (3 in.) N.A. 0-28. „ Semi Apochromatic 4 mm. (8 in.) N.A. 0-70. Abbe Condenser, N.A. 1*20 fully mounted. Triple Nosepiece ... 39 2 6
    • Sy fax 16603 " Patna ” Microscope, equipped as 16602 with the addition of “ Versalic ” 1 Oil Immersion Objective 45 0 0
    • Sybil 16604 " Patna ” Microscope, mahogany case. Research substage and 2 Condenser Slides. Holoscopic Eyepieces, x 7, x 10 and x 14. Objectives, Apochromatic 16 mm. 0-30 N.A. , „ 8 mm. 0-65 N.A. „ „ 4 mm. 0-85 N.A. „ „ 2 mm. 1-37 N.A. Oil Imm. Universal Condenser 1-0 N.A. mounted on substage slide. Holos Immersion Paraboloid, Optical part, mounted on substage slide. Funnel stop, for 2 mm. Objective. Quadruple Nosepiece. Colour screens 90 0 0
    • Any of the sets above can be supplied with the “ Bactil ” Microscope, on page 64, at a reduction in the total price of £2 10 0.
    • Any of the sets of Accessories, as described with the “ Bactil ” Microscope (page 64), can be supplied with the “ Patna ” Microscope, jcomplete in case, at an additional cost of £2 10 0.
    • For High-power Binocular Bodies for above Microscope, see pages 105-107.
    • ^//zr///^^/^////////^^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^^/^^^^^^/^^^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 68/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 67
    • U t -Z
    • P
    • LONDON
    • X shy »TAN - XEs NSe
    • y//^ysssssssyssssssssss/7sssssysssssssssssyss^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • wo**"/****/*/******—-***-* OY%
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. s
  • n.n. - vue 69/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 68
    • RESEARCH MICROSCOPE
    • MICROSCOPES FOR RESEARCH
    • The Student uses his Microscope principally to see known structures, or to determine the absence or presence of definite appearances. For this purpose a satisfactory equipment can be readily specified.
    • When the purpose of the Microscope is to reveal the unknown and perhaps the unexpected, every resource which science can offer in both mechanical and optical equipment becomes essential.
    • It often happens that a structure or an organism can only be observed by means of the most refined optical equipment.
    • The use of Objectives, Eyepieces and substage apparatus to the limit of their capacities can only be accomplished in conjunction with Microscopes that are provided with the necessary mechanical movements, acting in the most precise manner and of extreme rigidity.
    • Such delicacy of action can be and is provided in a robust form for continuous use in Watson Research instruments, but they are neither essential nor advantageous in the ordinary laboratory routine.
    • A special type of Microscope is therefore made in a class by itself, and Watson’s are the only manufacturers in the world who offer a series of microscopes so designed that the optical equipment is able to perform under optimum conditions and fully develop the resolving power. They have a specialised knowledge of requirements, and retain for manufacture, skilled craftsmen who have spent their lives in the handwork that is essential in this particular class of instrument, both making, fitting and adjusting. No other firm to-day has such men on their staff.
    • Certain important movements should be included in research instruments. Among them are the rackwork adjustment to draw tube, which enables the precise tube-length to be used to compensate for the slight aberrations caused by the difference in the thickness of cover slips, or depth of object in the mountant. The fine adjustment is Watson’s standard lever, which long experience has shown to be the most precise, sensitive, and durable in design that has ever been made. This excellence is in part due to the care and precision with which it is made, added to its simple yet very sound design.
    • An outstanding fact is that it is the only fine adjustment at present made which has stood the test of sixty years and is still the best.
    • The Mechanical Stage is built into the Microscope, and gives a facility in working of which none of the skeleton or attachable patterns is capable. Where rotation of the object is necessary the stage is built to revolve concentrically, and centring screws to adjust the axis of rotation to the centre of the field can be provided.
    • The focussing of the Substage Condenser is always by rack and pinion, and where desired a fine adjustment can be added. This is a most valuable ally when high-power Condensers and Dark Ground Illuminators are used.
    • In every case the instrument is supported by a tripod, the spread of which ensures the utmost stability, and a properly balanced support, but a horseshoe type foot can be fitted if preferred.
    • All mechanical movements are fitted with compensating screws to adjust for wear and tear.
    • A lifetime of satisfactory working service is secured by using a
    • Watson Microscope for Research.
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. I “*, 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. f ^^^^^^/^//^/^^/‘/^/^/^//^/^//yx^^ 2. ^^/’/’/y^^^y^/yy^^’/’^^^
  • n.n. - vue 70/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • EDINBURGH STUDENT’S “ H ”
    • 69
    • THE EDINBURGH STUDENT'S MICROSCOPE
    • STAND "H"
    • The Standard Model for use of the British Navy.
    • REMODELLED WITH MANY IMPROVEMENTS
    • This instrument is illustrated on page 71 of this list. It is the most popular model that we make, and, as such, merits a few words of special description and commendation.
    • In its general design, this microscope leaves nothing to be desired. It is massive, without being cumbersome, and the arrangements and proportions of its various parts will be found in practice exceedingly convenient. Constructed, as it is, with a perfect-working mechanical stage and substage, furnished with a graduated drawtube, and the most sensitive of fine and coarse adjustments, this microscope is capable of any class of work. Thus, with one-twelfth inch oil immersion objective and other apparatus, as detailed in Set 17005, it is extensively used in bacteriological work and is unsurpassed for the purpose. Arranged with a projection eyepiece and objectives of high aperture, it will stand the severest test of high-power photomicrographic work. The range of rackwork to the Coarse Adjustment is sufficient for the use of very low-power Objectives, giving a distance between the Stage surface and nosepiece end of body of 3% inches. It is thus a Microscope that meets the demands of the worker, no matter what they may be, in the most satisfactory manner, and while its many conveniences make it always advantageous and appreciated in the Laboratory, it is no less a favourite with the amateur worker, who will always find it unequalled for ease and satisfaction in working. Further, it offers for its price fuller combined advantages in completeness of design and perfection of workmanship, than any other Microscope.
    • GENERAL SPECIFICATION
    • General Construction. The limb is cast in one piece from top to tailpiece; the various fittings—body, stage, substage, etc.—are all mounted in alignment on this limb, giving the effect of an optical bench, with wonderful rigidity.
    • The dovetailed hearings of the substage and fine adjustment are machined in the same operation.
    • The Body of unit construction is of large (40 mm.) diameter and the drawtube (34 mm. diam.) usually supplied carries Eyepieces of the Student’s size, but can be fitted for large Eyepieces 1-27 in. diameter if required without extra charge.
    • The Foot, of tripod form, is extremely rigid and efficient. We always recommend the tripod pattern where extreme portability has not to be considered. It is altogether superior to other patterns. Its spread is 7 inches.
    • The Mechanical Stage is our Standard pattern with compensating screws as described, pages 75 and 76. The range of horizontal movement has been increased to 1 in. The milled head controlling the horizontal motion is stationary, and the plates so arranged that the condenser is not fouled at any point of the travel. The surface of the stage has a thin covering of ebonite attached by vulcanizing.
    • The Substage has rackwork to focus and screws to centre. The controlling milled heads are mounted on both sides of the limb. The bearing, machined in the solid extension piece of the limb, is in the same plane as the fine adjustment bearing.
    • The Fine adjustment is of our horizontal lever pattern. One revolution of the milled head moves the body one three-hundredth of an inch. The action is sensitive to one-hundredth of a turn of the milled head, thus giving a motion of one thirty-thousandth of an inch to the Objective.
    • The height is 11% inches.
    • Each instrument has plane and concave mirrors.
    • All fittings are of R.M.S. Standard gauge, and all bearings have compensating screws.
    • eeeeeeree veccecreseecerceRREXgeccEARREXecGReRReceGcREPGRGEELCECEP
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
    • ^/7/7^/77/7/7///^/7/7/7/^/7/^/^^/y^^^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. s
    • I 1
  • n.n. - vue 71/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 70
    • EDINBURGH STUDENT’S “ H”
    • EDINBURGH STUDENT’S MICROSCOPE STAND “ H” As supplied to H.M. Navy.
    • A detailed description of the “ H ” Model of the Edinburgh Student’s Series appears on page 69.
    • Code Word. No. PRICES £ s. d.
    • Manum 17001 " H ” Microscope, Stand only, as figured on page 71 25 0 0
    • Mapoy 17002 Mahogany Case 2 10 0
    • Maple Maran Marb Maril Marme March 17003 17004 17005 17006 17007 17008 COMPLETE SETS “ H ” Microscope Stand as described. Mahogany case :— Eyepiece 1—at choice— x 5, x 6, x 8, x 10. Objectives, Parachromatic 3 in. (16 mm.) N.A. 0-28. „ Semi-Apochromatic l in. (4 mm.) N.A. 0-70 " H ” Microscope Stand as described. Mahogany case :— Eyepieces 2—at choice— x 5, x 6, x 8, x 10. Objectives, Parachromatic 3 in. (16 mm.) N.A. 0-28. „ Semi-Apochromatic t in. (4 mm.) N.A. 0-70. Abbe Illuminator fully mounted N.A. 1-20. Double Nosepiece ... " H ” Microscope Stand equipped as foregoing Set 17004 but with triple instead of double Nosepiece and with “Versalic ” 1 in. Oil Immersion Objective N.A. 1-28 With Holoscopic Objectives- " H ” Microscope Stand as described. Mahogany case :—-Eyepieces 2—at choice—x 7, x 10, x 14, x 20 Holoscopic. Objectives. Holoscopic 16 mm. (3 in.) N.A. 0-45. „ „ 4 mm. (1 in.) N.A. 0-95. „ „ 2 mm. (12 in.) N.A. 1-37 oil imm. Triple Nosepiece. Condenser. Parachromatic N.A. 1-0. Achro-Apl. fully mounted For General and Amateurs’ Use- " H ” Microscope Stand as described. Mahogany case :— Eyepieces 2—at choice— x 5, x 6, x 8, x 10. Objectives, Parachromatic 2 in.—3 in. (16 mm.) N.A. 0-28. „ Semi-Apo chromatic l in. (4 mm.) N.A. 0-70. Universal Condenser fully mounted. Box of d.g. stops. Stand Condenser. Stage Forceps. Live Cage... EXTRAS Sliding Bar to Mechanical Stage 32 0 36 12 42 10 60 10 44 0 1 10 0 6 0 0 0 0
    • Marla 17009 Division to Stage Movements, reading by verniers to 10 mm. 1 10 0
    • Marge Macac 170010 170011 Universal Condenser in Substage Iris Mount No. 12603 in place of Abbe Illuminator Attachable Rackwork Drawtube 4 5 4 10 0 0
    • Maryl 170012 -1 in. “ Utilitv ” Oil Immersion Objective 5 0 0
    • This can be supplied in Set 17005 instead of the “ Versalic ” 1% in. at a reduction of £1 7 6. For Binocular bodies for the above Microscope, see pages 105-107. For Research type substage and slides, see page 43. Note.—A plain stage, ebonite covered, may be substituted for the mechanical stage at a reduction in cost of ... 7 10 0
    • rss.rsssss/7ssss/7s//sssssss/r///ss/ss//^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • ^/ww/wy/^M’y^/^/^/y/^/^/MW^^
    • | 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • gids
  • n.n. - vue 72/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 71
    • STAND H
    • STUDENT
    • inches,
    • al
    • 9
    • > 898 8 0 8 10
    • 2 8 Sons 80 828 808
    • 5 5 SORonooR
    • 3 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • W77/7^/y^/7///^/^/7/'//7/7/////7/^^777////7^^/7/^/7/W/’7/'7^^^/7/^/'/
  • n.n. - vue 73/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 72
    • K RESEARCH’
    • THE "RESEARCH" MICROSCOPE
    • The general construction of this Microscope is identical with that of our popular " H ” Edinburgh Student’s Model, and it is of the same proportions, except that the fine adjustment is by means of our vertical lever, working from both sides of the limb, as described on page 37.
    • Code Word. Marud Marit No. PRICES £s. d. 17 201 “ Research ” Microscope Stand only as illustrated ... ... 26 5 0 17202 Mahogany Case for same ... ... ... ... ... 2 10 0 COMPLETE SETS
    • Mar jo 17203 “ Research ” Microscope as described. Mahogany case :—• 1 Eyepiece—at choice— x 5, x 6, x 8, x 10. Objectives, Parachromatic 3 in. (16 mm.) N.A. 0-28. ,, Semi-Apochromatic % in. (4 mm.) N.A. 0-70 ... 33 5 0
    • Marke 17204 “ Research ” Microscope as described. Mahogany case:—- 2 Eyepieces—at choice—x 5, x 6, x 8, x 10. Objectives, Parachromatic 3 in. (16 mm.) N.A. 0-28. ,, Semi-Apochromatic J in. (4 mm.) N.A. 0-70. Double Nosepiece. Abbe Illuminator N.A. 1.20 fully mounted with iris, etc. ... 37 5 0
    • Marqu 17205 “ Research ” Microscope as described and equipped as Set 17204 with triple in lieu of double Nosepiece. " Versalic" 1 in. oil imm. Objective N.A. 1-28 ... ... ... ... 43 10 0 For Research, Photomicrography, etc.
    • Marso 17206 " Research ” Microscope as described. Mahogany case:— 2 Holoscopic Eyepieces—at choice— x 7, x 10, x 14, x 20. Objectives, Holoscopic 3 in. (16 mm.) N.A. 0-45. „ „ E in. (4 mm.) N.A. 0-95. ,, „ T in. (2 mm.) N.A. 1-37 oil imm. Parachromatic Apl.-Achro. Condenser N.A. 1-0 fully mounted. Triple Nosepiece ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 61 15 0
    • Marsx 17207 “ Research ” Microscope equipped as Set 17206 but with Apochromatic Objectives of similar focal lengths in lieu of Holoscopic Objectives ... ... ... ... ... ... 72 15 0
    • Mardi 17208 “ Research ” Microscope and Case, completely fitted as Set 17007, for General and Amateurs’ use... ... ... ... 45 5 0 EXTRAS
    • Marre Marow Macac Maryl 17209 Sliding Bar to Mechanical Stage ... ... ... ... I 10 0 172010 Divisions to Stage movements, reading by verniers to 1 mm. 1 10 0 172011 Attachable Rackwork Drawtube ... ... ... ... 4 10 0 172012 1 in. “Utility ” Oil Immersion Objective ......... 5 0 0 This can be supplied in Set 17205 instead of the " Versalic ” 1% in., at a reduction of £1 7 6
    • Binocular Bodies for the above Instrument, see pages 105-107.
    • ^///^/////7/^/7/7^/^/7/7/7/7^/^/^/7/7/7^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. , ^zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz.
    • '/^/^/////////////^////////////////^//////////////^/////u/////////^//////////.
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • 2'ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
  • n.n. - vue 74/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • ‘ RESEARCH”
    • 73
    • THE “RESEARCH
    • MICROSCOPE
    • Height, 11 inches.
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • Dags W
    • ( 2
  • n.n. - vue 75/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 74
    • EDINBURGH STUDENT’S MICROSCOPE EXTRAS
    • EXTRAS FOR THE
    • EDINBURGH STUDENT’S AND OTHER MICROSCOPES
    • £ s. d.
    • Ruled Glass Measuring Disc for Eyepieces for use with divisions to stage ... ... 0 7 6
    • Studs to stage, for use when divisions are fitted ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 10 0
    • (These are not needed if a sliding bar is included.)
    • Clamping Screw to centring movement of substage ... ... ... ... ... 0 5 0
    • Rackwork Drawtube as described page 51 ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 10 0
    • FOR ALL MICROSCOPES WITHOUT MECHANICAL STAGE
    • Concentric Rotating Stage in place of plain Stage, as described page 50 Divisions to circumference of stage in degrees and reading by vernier to Centring Screws to rotation of stage Sliding Bar to Stage ...
    • ... 2 0 0
    • add 250
    • add 150
    • ... i 10 0
    • FOR ALL MODELS
    • Parachromatic or Universal Achromatic Condenser (TO N.A.), specially suitable for Photo-Micrography, Nos. 12601 and 12703. Price with Iris Diaphragm.
    • For understage, £6 10 0 ; For substage 7 0 0
    • Either of these may be taken in place of the Abbe Illuminator, No. 12802 or 12803 included in the sets, at the difference in price viz. £4 5 0 and £4 0 0 respectively.
    • Set of Stops for either Achromatic Condenser or Abbe Illuminator, for dark ground and oblique light, in brass box
    • Disc of Blue or Yellow Glass, for Abbe Illuminator, each
    • 1 in. Parachromatic Objective, giving very flat field
    • 2 in. Parachromatic Objective
    • Stage Micrometer, ^ and ^ mm....
    • Micrometer, to drop into Eyepiece...
    • Eyepieces, No. 1, 2, 3 or 4, 10/0 each; Nos. 5 and 6, each
    • Polariscope, fitted with Selenite
    • Camera Lucida, Beale’s
    • Stand Condenser, medium size
    • Triple Nosepiece, new dust-proof pattern ...
    • Double Nosepiece
    • Milled Head of Fine Adjustment divided to Tooths (instead of Toths) extra ... 2th in. (2 mm.) Oil Immersion “ Holoscopic ” Series 1'37 in place of the 1th in. 1-28 included with the Sets “ for Bacteriology,” extra
    • 0 10 0 0 16
    • 2 0 0 2 0 0
    • 0 12 6 0 10 0
    • 0 15 6
    • 3 2 6 0 7 6
    • 1 2 6 IIO 0 150
    • 0 5 0
    • 3 10 0
    • BELL-GLASS COVERS
    • For Edinburgh Student’s “ Service ” and " Bactil ” Microscopes ... ... ... 0 17 6
    • Ditto. with ebonised base ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 15 0
    • y/y//777/^/7/77///y/^/^/77/^/////7//7/77^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f ^^y/^^/7/^/7^/77^/^/7^^^
    • SPRong so s los g 6 P 2
    • o
    • IA § 8 wd s 28 12
    • 8 6
  • n.n. - vue 76/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • THE WATSON MICROSCOPE
    • 75
    • MECHANICAL STAGES
    • WATSON’S STANDARD MECHANICAL STAGE
    • Fig. 18. Surface view of the Watson Standard Stage showing sliding-bar scales and verniers, and method of fitting stationary milled head.
    • er
    • BE
    • True mechanical stages of the English pattern, in which the object is carried in two directions (and not slid upon the surface of the stage) are so superior for delicate and high-power observations that no one who has used one will be content with the other kind. Such a mechanical stage is part of the Microscope stand, and cannot be added as required. The precision with which the object is moved across the field of view in two directions is dependent upon metal slides and bearings accurately machined and fixed at right angles to the optic axis. The movements of the slides are controlled by rack and pinion for the vertical direction and by a four-thread screw for the horizontal. The bearings have special adjustments for wear. The size of the upper plate exceeds 80 x 80 mm., and is ample, as the slide is not moved over but with the plate. The range of movement, 1 in. vertical, 1 in. horizontal, enables a surface of that size to be explored without disturbance of the Objective or Substage Condenser.
    • The great and many advantages of this type of mechanical stage are a special cause for the favour enjoyed by the Watson Microscopes to which it is fitted. These Microscopes are the Edinburgh “ H,” “ Research,” “ Royal,” Grand Model “Van Heurck.”
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • gpeeepepeeepa. eeppere-eegor************ I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
    • ^/y7/77>y/7y7'^y//y/’/y//y^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 77/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 76
    • MECHANICAL STAGE
    • WATSON’S
    • STANDARD MECHANICAL STAGE
    • o--D-7 -
    • Fic. 19. Corner view of Standard Stage to show system of springing.
    • The Stage surface is in full view, Fig. 18, and the manner in which the movements are effected will be plainly seen. The horizontal travel to the Stage is made by the rotation of the stationary milled head F, that is, it does not move with the traversing plates of the Stage. The plate E is connected with the long screw operated by the milled head F, and the screw is supported by a slotted collar, which gives adjustment for wear. To give the smoothest possible motion, the screw has a ball fitting (A): in this is a groove, which acts as a receptacle for foreign matter. The little plate B fits over the ball, and is so attached that no internal shake takes place. C is the adjusting screw for regulating the pressure of the pinion upon the rack in the vertical movement of the Stage. The Verniers D, Fig. 18, which can be used for measuring or for " finding ” objects, are an extra, costing 30/-. When verniers are supplied it is advantageous to have the sliding bar, as illustrated, at an extra cost of 30/-.
    • The planed fittings of the Stage have slots through which screws pass at FF and GG (Fig. 19) so that any wear in the plates can be immediately taken up.
    • The advantages of this stage are manifold, and at once occur to the experienced worker.
    • The methods used in the above Stages, which give a lifetime of working efficiency, are adopted in other mechanical stages of our make.
    • A variety of Mechanical Stages of the Attachable pattern, concentric rotating, etc., are described in this list on pages 47-50.
    • Mechanical Stages are made in several different patterns so as to give workers as wide a range of choice as possible. Each is described and illustrated in conjunction with the various models, but in several instances the Stage is applicable to a different style of Microscope.
    • W
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ^^/^/^^^/^/^^/^^^^
    • gong d 8 2
    • SA AI
    • 6
    • !si hi SI
    • F sons Soooooodi
  • n.n. - vue 78/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • “ROYAL”
    • 77
    • THE “ ROYAL’ MICROSCOPE
    • A RESEARCH MICROSCOPE OF MEDIUM SIZE
    • This Microscope incorporates all the fine details which are so advantageous in critical work and is intended for those who require a Microscope of highest class, adequate, but not too large in size and in effect provides the advantages which have gained so high a reputation for the “Van Heurck ” Microscope, see page 81, but in a more compact form and at a lower cost.
    • The height, when placed vertical and racked down, is 123 in.
    • The tripod foot is shod with cork and has a spread of 8% in.
    • The Body
    • The Mechanical Drawtube
    • The Mechanical Stage
    • is of large size—40 mm. diameter, of unit construction, and is fitted with both mechanical and sliding draw tubes, giving an available range of tube-length from 140 mm. to 270 mm.
    • with inner sliding draw tube, as described page 51, is incorporated. It carries eyepieces 1-27 in. diameter, but, if so desired, can be supplied to carry eyepieces of the Student’s or Continental size.
    • is of our Standard pattern as described pages 75 and 76. It has a horizontal movement of 1 in. and is covered with ebonite attached by a vulcanizing process. It is fitted with a sliding bar.
    • The Limb While conforming to the general design which imparts the rigidity for which these instruments are so justly famous, the limb has been lengthened to extend above the coarse adjustment milled head fitting and at the same time increased in thickness. The dovetailed bearings of the fine adjustment slide and of the substage are machined in one operation so ensuring permanent alignment. Cast integrally with the limb are massive widely spaced lugs to which the mechanical stage is bolted. These form a support across the whole width of the stage baseplate.
    • Below the stage mounting is the bearing on the limb extension for the substage. Thus when the substage is focussed the object upon the stage is unaffected by any stress or flexure and remains in focus.
    • The Axis Joint is an actual ground fitting and not a spring fit between two cheeks. Bearing collars are also employed.
    • The Substage has a clear focussing range of 14 inches and may be used conveniently with low power condensers for photomicrography. In the regular model it now has coarse adjustment and centring screws with fine adjustment without extra charge. This should be specified when ordering. The substage fitting and slide are now a solid casting achieving a further advance in rigidity and a special substage mount has been designed in which the optical part can, if desired, be hinged out of the optic axis. Accuracy of return is provided for by fitting a hardened steel lever catch.
    • Modern research requires the use of at least two and often three separate substage condensers, and we therefore recommend the inclusion of the Research substage when ordering this instrument. The comfort and increased efficiency resulting from the use of this apparatus with its co-axial condensers cannot be too greatly stressed.
    • The Coarse Adjustment is by diagonal rack and pinion, as described page 36, and in connection with the “ Van Heurck ” Microscope, on page 82.
    • The Fine Adjustment is our standard lever pattern.
    • It will thus be seen that the many special features combined in this Microscope render it suitable for those who require an instrument of the highest class. It will be found to respond in the fullest manner to the exacting demands of the photomicrographer and research-power worker, particularly those whose work demands the use in combination of oil immersion Objectives and Condensers. Its many conveniences ensure that theoretical resolution is obtained with all types of objectives and condensers. It is invaluable in the laboratory, for which its strong construction and excellent mechanical stage are especially advantageous, while for the varied purposes of the amateur it is unsurpassed.
    • si gi PI 88 8 08
    • 2 8 8 on 1 IO I 80 SH
    • HI 101 Seeoons
    • , 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 79/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 78
    • “ROYAL”
    • " ROYAL" MICROSCOPE
    • Code Word. Mesho Metag No. PRICES ss. d. 17801 Royal Microscope, stand only, as described ... ... ... ... 42 10 0 17802 Mahogany Cabinet, hand dovetailed, to contain Microscope and apparatus ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 10 0
    • Meta 17803 Mahogany Cabinet, hand dovetailed, to contain Microscope and apparatus and binocular body ... ... ... ... 4 0 0
    • Metam 17804 Mahogany Cabinet, hand dovetailed, dustproof, cupboard door, apparatus drawer ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 5 10 0
    • Meteo 17805 Bell-Glass Shade 17/6 ; Ebonised and Velvet Covered Base 10/- ... 17 6 EXTRAS
    • Mileg Metaz Metax 17806 Adapter to carry Eyepieces of Continental size ... ... ... ... 0 7 6 17807 Research Substage with 2 condenser slides in place of compound substage 4 5 0 17808 Interchangeable high-power Binocular Body with 1 pr. Student size Eyepieces ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 14 0 0 COMPLETE SETS consisting of: ROYAL MICROSCOPE, as described, with Mahogany Case, Outfit accompanying Microscope.
    • Metre 17809 Eyepieces, best capped 2 ( x 6, x 8, x 10). Objectives, Parachromatic 3 in. N.A. 0-28. ,, Semi-Apochromatic l in. N.A. 0-70. Condenser Abbe N.A. 1-20 fully mounted ... ... ... ... 54 12 6
    • Miado 178010 Eyepieces, best capped 2 ( x 5, x 6, x 10). Objectives. Parachromatic 3 in. N.A. 0-28. „ Semi-Apochromatic t in. N.A. 0-70 ,, " Versalic ” Oil Immersion 1 in. N.A. 1-28. Condenser Abbe N.A. 1-20 fully mounted. Triple Nosepiece with tangential centring screws. Colour Filters ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 62 17 6 FOR RESEARCH
    • Midat 178011 Eyepieces, Holoscopic, best capped 2 ( x 7, x 10, x 14, x 20) Objectives, Holoscopic, 16 mm. N.A. 0-45. „ ,, 4 mm. N.A. 0-95. Condenser Universal Apl.-Achromatic N.A. 1-0 fully mounted. Triple Nosepiece ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 68 0 0
    • Midge 178012 As above but with addition of Holoscopic 2 mm. oil imm. Objective N.A. 1-37 77 0 0
    • Midog 178013 As above but with Research Substage—Funnel stop for 2 mm. Objective 2 Interchangeable condenser slides having independent centring. Parachromatic condenser Apl.-Achromatic N.A. 1-0 Holoscopic immersion dark ground condenser ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 84 15 0 FOR ADVANCED RESEARCH & PHOTOMICROGRAPHY
    • Midol 178014 Royal Microscope as described with the addition of fine adjustment to Substage, mahogany case. Eyepieces, Holoscopic, best capped pattern 3 ( x 5, x 7, x 10, x 14, x 20) Objectives, Holoscopic, 12 in. (37 mm.). Apochromatic, 16 mm. N.A. 0-30. 8 mm. N.A. 0-65. „ 4 mm. N.A. 0-85. 2 mm. oil imm. N.A. 1-37. Quadruple Nosepiece. Research Substage with 3 condenser slides. Funnel Stop for Objective. Colour Filters. Condensers, Universal Apl.-Achromatic N.A. 1-0. ,, Holoscopic Immersion Achromatic N.A. 1-35. „ imm. dark ground ... ... ... ... 120 0 0 For detailed estimate of a complete outfit for General Microscopy, see p. 80.
    • ^/7//7/7/7////////7/77/77///7///7/77/7^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. t
    • r^//7/^/7///7/^^/^^/7///7A/^/^//^///7^^/7^^
    • p/S//SS//////S////S/S/////S/S///////7//SS////7/"////S////////^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I ^/7^/7//7/77/777/^/^^/^/^/7//7/^^/^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 80/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 79
    • MICROSCOPE
    • B
    • “ROYAL
    • al u
    • LTD,
    • Height, Il j in.
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 81/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 80
    • “ROYAL”
    • THE ROYAL OUTFIT
    • AN AMATEUR’S FIRST-CLASS SET
    • MICROSCOPE The Royal, stand only, as described pages 77 and 79 High power Binocular body, interchangeable with monocular ... Inclination unit for binocular and monocular bodies Wenham Binocular body to interchange with monocular, see page 103 Research Substage with 2 substage slides add to price of microscope ... Additional Substage slides, each with centering adjustments Best Mahogany Cabinet £ s. d. 42 10 0 14 0 0 5 0 0 14 0 0 4 5 0 17 6 5 10 0
    • OBJECTIVES Holoscopic (page 13) £ s. d. or Apochromatic (page 11) 50 mm. ... ... ... ... 210 0 16 mm. 0-30 ... 25 „ 0-25 4 10 0 8 „ 0-65 12 „ 0-65 5 5 0 4 „ 0-85 4 „ 0-95 6 5 0 2 „ 1-37 2 „ 1:37 ... ... ... ... Oil Immersion ... Oil Immersion ... ... ... 10 0 0 5 0 0 7 0 0 9 0 0 17 10 0
    • EYEPIECES-HOLOSCOPIC SERIES (page 19) 1 pair each, x 5 and x 7, large capped, £2 15 0 leach x 10 and x 14 ... ... 2 15 0 ... ... ... ...... II 0 0 5 10 0
    • CONDENSERS
    • Macro Illuminator for low power visual and photomicrographic work... Universal Apl-achro. N.A. 1-0 fully mounted with Iris diaphragm Holoscopic Oil Immersion Apl.-achro. N.A. 1-30 fully mounted with Iris diaphragm Holoscopic Dark ground Oil Immersion Paraboloid, fully mounted with Iris diaphragm 3 10 0 7 0 0 9 10 0 4 5 0
    • ACCESSORIES
    • Polarising Apparatus, Mica-Selenite Stage, Bull’s-Eye Condenser, Silver Parabolic Side Reflector, Beale’s Neutral Tint Camera Lucida, Triple dust-proof Nosepiece, Aluminium Reversible Compressor, Rousselet Live Box, 2263, 17/6 ; Extra Covers, 2264, 2/6 doz. ... 2 Troughs, 2272 : 3 in. xl in., 1/6; and 3 in. x 1 in., 2/6 Stage Forceps, 2481 ... Micrometer, one each for Eyepiece, 2324, 10/0 ; and Stage, 2329, 12/6 Standard Lamp, 2144, £1 10 0; and Case, 2147, £10 0 MOUNTING MATERIALS Universal Dissecting Microscope, and set of 3 Aplanatic Magnifiers, see Part II. Mounting Cabinet, 2382 Cathcart Microtome, pattern 2347 ... Complete Cabinet of 200 Microscopic Slides of general interest, The total may be arrived at after the selection of the objectives. 3 2 6 2 12 6 17 6 IIO 0 0 7 6 IIO 0 2 2 0 12 6 0 4 0 0 12 6 1 2 6 2 100 75 0 5 15 0 3 5 0 18 10 0
    • This Set may be varied to meet individual requirements, and every assistance toward a suitable selection will be afforded intending purchasers. Any of the Sets included with the Royal Microscope on page 78 could be arranged with the above.
    • Code word with Holoscopic Objectives—Milfo.
    • „ ,, with Apochromatic Objectives—Milia.
    • [W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. !
    • VXX/XPXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX* %
    • ^/^//7/^/7^/77///7/7/7/7/^//7^^^
    • | 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^/7/7/7/77//7X/7/^77/7/7///7/7/7/7/7/7/7/7//7^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 82/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • VAN HEURCK
    • 81
    • THE VAN HEURCK MICROSCOPE
    • For Research and General Purposes.
    • Grand Model. The most completely fitted Microscope extant, and of handsome proportions
    • and build throughout.
    • Can be supplied with tripod or horseshoe foot at choice.
    • The Van Heurck is the most completely-fitted model manufactured, and represents all that is most modern in microscope design and manufacture; it is hand made throughout and embodies that “ craftsmanship ” for which the British workman has always been famous; Watson microscopemakers take a pride in these instruments. Their finish gives that sense of satisfaction which is never felt to quite the same extent in other productions.
    • The aim in its construction has been to present, in the most efficient form possible, mechanical movements of complete and comprehensive description, in a design of maximum rigidity, and to maintain every feature in the most up-to-date manner. We can assert unhesitatingly that the complete control which is afforded in working enables the finest results to be secured with a rapidity and comfort which is unique. It has brought the most gratifying testimony from many of the leading microscopists of the day, and this, coupled with the fact that the Van Heurck is now used by many of the foremost workers in every branch of research, is a sufficient guarantee of the perfection attained.
    • When first introduced it was the most complete and efficient model of its time, and ever since its inception every improvement and every feature which makes for enduring efficiency and ability to extract the uttermost from the optical equipment has been included in this model.
    • Photomicrography, especially with high powers of large aperture, demands a working excellence and accuracy of the highest grade in every part—it is, in fact, the severest test to which a microscope can be put. In the construction of this Instrument the usual causes of failure have been eliminated. It will at once be recognised that the precision which is requisite for high-power photography and which is provided in this Instrument, is of immense value to the ordinary visual worker, for it enables him to secure the fullest and most effective means of conducting his researches. Especially does this apply to Laboratory work, in which reliance has to be placed on the results obtained ; and to those who are doing original and accurate work, this microscope will be found to embody every convenience for rendering such work more easy and exact.
    • The Van Heurck is, in fact, the last word in modern microscope construction.
    • ^7/7///7//7/^7//7/7/7/7/7/7/7^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f ^////^////^///yzy/y/^//^^^
    • y/77//7/7//7/7//7/77/7/'/7/////7/>7/7/y/7/7/^^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
    • ^ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ^ZZZZZZZZZZ/^
  • n.n. - vue 83/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 82
    • VAN HEURCK
    • VAN HEURCK MICROSCOPE-Continued
    • The general construction of this intrument merits special consideration.
    • The Coarse is effected by Watson’s diagonal rack and pinion, and has sufficient range for Adjustment a 4-inch Objective. The pressure of the pinion on the rack is adjusted by
    • the two screws shown in the accompanying Fig. 20. N is a block of antifriction metal which supports the pinion shaft on each side, and it is on this supporting block that two adjusting screws act, one of which, M, is shown in Fig. 20. The most sensitive relation of pinion to rack can be established and maintained at all times. These adjusting screws are shown in position on the fitting plate in Fig. 21.
    • Fig. 20. Sectional View of adjustable fittings of rack and pinion.
    • Fig. 21. View of fitting plate of coarse adjustment.
    • The Fine is our Standard lever form, but, being made with a very long lever, the
    • Adjustment motion imparted is very slow and precise.
    • The milled head is divided to hundredths, and one revolution moves the body, up or down, the thirteenth of a millimetre. The adjustment is sensitive to the hundredth of a turn of the milled head, which would give the one thirteen-hundredth of a millimetre, or the l/33300th of an inch of motion.
    • The Body is provided with two Drawtubes, one actuated by Rackwork and the other
    • sliding inside it, as figured above. The advantage of having these is that the body can be made very short, or extremely long. Thus sufficient latitude can be obtained to use Objectives corrected for either English or Continental tube-lengths, and to adjust them for thickness of cover glass by variation of tube-length; both drawtubes are engraved in millimetres to show tube-length.
    • The lower end of the drawtube has the universal screw for low-power Photographic Objectives, the Apertometer, etc., and the nosepiece is removable by unscrewing. The usual size of Eyepiece-fitting is the Royal Microscopical Society’s gauge, 1-27 in. diameter, but any smaller size can be employed, and larger sizes can be had specially to order.
    • ^77////7//7/7/7/7/7/X/^/7///7^/^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • *v/ss/r/rssss//s/rss/sss///s///rss///M^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C
  • n.n. - vue 84/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • VAN HEURCK
    • 83
    • VAN HEURCK MICROSCOPE—Continued
    • The Stage Mounted upon a wide supported bracket the utmost rigidity of support is secured. Concentric rotation is provided, there is a large rectangular central aperture, and the plates are as thin as is compatible with rigidity. In this type the top plate and specimen move across the optic axis as a complete unit. Above all a large clear surface is afforded for the free movement of specimens with the fingers, and a sliding bar is provided to support the object when desired. Any special arrangement for holding specimens, other than the usual sliding bar and springs, can be supplied to order, if required. Compensating adjustments are fitted to all movements.
    • T.ZZMSA muemmnuuuun .1.1, mumnunmunnuMn M illiitliill MM
    • Side View.
    • Front View.
    • Fine Adjustment as fitted to the Substage of the Van Heurck Micro-scope, working from upper surface of stage. The Substage itself is removed to show the construction.
    • 9
    • The Substage is of specially substantial construction; it has rectangular screw adjustments to centre, very fine rackwork to focus, and is arranged to swing out of the optical axis. A Fine Adjustment is included with the
    • U Grand Model instrument. It H may be either of two patterns : M (1) to work from above the Stage surface by the method shown in Fig. 22 and in position on the Instrument on page 87, or (2) by means of a vertical lever worked by a milled head, mounted parallel with and just above the rackwork milled head of the Substage, as shown (F) on the Royal Instrument on p. 79. The former method of mounting entails a slight extra charge (£1 5 0).
    • A Fine Adjustment is essential for highest power Research work with modern Immersion Condensers of wide aperture and precise focus. Slight alterations to focus can be effected without disturbing the film of oil, specimen or setting up vibration.
    • A Special The maximum stability is imparted in an original manner. Instead of the Feature. various parts being merely screwed together, they are fitted one into the
    • other, thus rendering the structure as solid as though it were one piece of metal. As will be seen from the accompanying figure, the Bracket CC carrying the stage, instead of being screwed to the front of the limb, as is customary, is made in one solid casting, taking the substage beneath on the plate D, and going right into the joint at the top of the pillar. The limb A is fitted into the Stage Bracket D, held firmly by screws, and the joint bolt B goes through the whole—Limb and Stage Bracket—making the Limb, Stage, and Substage as if they were one piece. The strength and freedom from spring obtained by this Optical Bench system is unique in microscope construction, and altogether superior to microscopes which depend on screws only for the joining together of their parts.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
  • n.n. - vue 85/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 84
    • VAN HEURCK
    • VAN HEURCK MICROSCOPE—Continued
    • View of the method of fitting the Stage and Limb in the Van Heurck Microscope.
    • A—Limb. CC and D—Stage Bracket.
    • FIG. 23
    • The Foot. The original Foot for this
    • Instrument was of the Continental form, but the Tripod has met with so much favour and is so strongly recommended by most of the leading Microscopists, that it has entirely superseded it. At the points of contact with the table the foot is provided with cork pads, to further reduce vibration, while preventing the Instrument from slipping and the table from being scratched.
    • The stand is perfectly steady in any position, and the joint has a steel clamping bar, to fix it at any desired angle.
    • All the fittings are of the universal (R.M.S.) size.
    • -
    • •.
    • - .:
    • The foot of the Van Heurck Microscope, either Model, may be of the horseshoe pattern as here illustrated. The price is the same as with the tripod.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • SNNNg Sos joss E 6s FI |s| 8 08 828 2 s lol
  • n.n. - vue 86/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • VAN HEURCK
    • 85
    • EXTRAS FOR THE GRAND MODEL
    • VAN HEURCK MICROSCOPE
    • TO THE STAGE
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Monad 18501 Centring Screws to Stage, and Clamp Screws to fix Stage when centred 8 10 0
    • Monke 18502 Rackwork rotation to Stage, with means of throwing pinion in and out of gear 5 10 0
    • Monom 18503 Circumference of Stage divided to degrees, reading by verniers to five minutes 3 3 0
    • Month 18504 Divisions to movements of Stage, reading by verniers to one-tenth of a millimetre 3 5 0
    • Moody 18505 Plate to fit in dovetailed grooves to cover surface of Stage, for rough work 2 10 0
    • TO THE SUBSTAGE
    • Moral 18506 Rackwork rotation to Substage ... 4 15 0
    • Morbo 18507 Substage mounted on bar, sliding in extra dovetailed fittings, so that the Substage may be set in any desired position, irrespective of the rackwork, which operates independently, thus allowing the use of every variety of Substage apparatus. With clamp screw 4 15 0
    • Research Substage with incorporated Iris diaphragm dovetailed slides to receive condenser changer slides, with 2 condenser slides screwed to receive any size condensers and with centring adjustment to each slide 4 5 0
    • BODIES
    • Magbo 18508 Interchangeable High Power prism Binocular Body with interpupillary adjustment and adjustment for differences in sight between the two eyes (see p. 105) 14 0 0
    • Magbu 18509 Interchangeable Wenham Binocular Body with rackwork adjustment to draw-tubes (see p. 103) 14 0 0
    • Magby 185010 Inclination Unit (page 107) for use in combination with both monocular and binocular bodies 5 0 0
    • CABINETS
    • Moros 185011 Mahogany Cabinet to contain Instrument and Apparatus ... 5 15 0
    • Morph 185012 Mahogany Cabinet, superior construction, with cupboard door to exclude dust, and drawers to contain apparatus ... 9 0 0
    • Morse 185013 Mahogany Cabinet, with cupboard door to exclude dust, and having fitted inside a flat mahogany case to contain apparatus. Of handsome design and best construction 15 10 0
    • Morta 185014 Bell-Glass Cover on polished ebonised base, for Van Heurck Microscope I 15 0
    • As the Bell-Glass Cover has to be packed separately, the expense of so doing will be charged at cost, and the risk of breakage in transit must be borne by the purchaser.
    • For list of Objectives, Eyepieces, Condensers, etc., see page 11 onwards.
    • A suggestion for a complete high-class outfit is given on page 88. We are at all times glad to assist and advise intending purchasers, and to arrange special outfits for various classes of research. Customers are invited to examine our models before purchasing, as it is only by critical inspection that the superiority of our instruments can be fully appreciated.
    • ^/X/7/7^/7/>^/y/y/7//////////7//////7/7//y/^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ( ^^^^^^/^///^///^^/^^/^^^^
    • yXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXKXcecre
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 87/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CD 00
    • VAN HEURCK
    • VAN HEURCK GRAND MODEL MICROSCOPE
    • This Model has been altered in several respects in order that the demand for a long range of Mechanical Stage movement with complete rotation at any position may be met. The stage now has 2 inches of horizontal traverse and is fitted with movable object clips and removable spring bar clips. It will be readily seen that the shape of the limb gives great freedom to the stage surface, and incidentally acts as a convenient handle.
    • It is especially recommended to those who require a full-sized instrument of highest grade for the most critical work.
    • SPECIFICATION
    • The height of the stand, when placed vertically and racked down, is 14 in. The height to optical centre, when the stand is horizontal, is 10 in.
    • The tripod is shod with cork and has a spread of 93 in.
    • The stage is capable of complete rotation, and has a range of 2 in. in the horizontal and about 1 in. in the vertical directions. The milled heads work on one centre, and, if desired, can both be rotated simultaneously, imparting a diagonal movement. The diameter of the stage is 5 in. It has complete concentric rotation. The object is gripped by double sliding bars. Ordinary object clips are also supplied, but are removable. The Instrument may be fitted with a less expensive pattern of stage as quoted below, if desired.
    • The fine adjustment is our Standard horizontal lever.
    • The compound substage is arranged to be turned aside from the optical axis and is fitted with a fine adjustment.
    • The mirrors are plane and concave, and are 23 in. diameter.
    • All fittings are of R.M.S. standard gauge.
    • The instrument is accurately balanced and remains firm and rigid in any position, and is therefore especially recommended for photo-micrographic, analytical, and general high-class work.
    • The construction has been detailed on pages 81 to 84.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. Moile No. £s.d. 18601 Grand Model Microscope Stand, as described ... ... ... 100 0 0
    • Moist 18602 Microscope, as described above, but with stage as fitted to the Royal Model, having in addition concentric rotation through 27° 90 0 0 PRESENTATION FORM
    • Momel 18603 Grand Model Van Heurck Microscope, on Tripod foot, fitted with centring screws to Stage, and clamp screws to fix centred Stage, Rackwork rotation to stage, with means of throwing pinion in and out of gear. Rotation of Stage divided to degrees, reading by verniers to five minutes. Divisions to movements of Stage, reading by verniers to one-tenth of a millimetre. Rackwork rotation to Substage. Finished throughout in bright polished lacquered brass. Stand only... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 150 0 0 For extra fittings to the Grand Model, see page 85. For Binocular bodies suitable for the above Instrument, see pages 105-107.
    • g*o(ooVoooooooooeeoooo*o0**% , W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. I ^^/^/^/7/^/^/y^yy^^/^XX^^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 88/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 87
    • THE
    • GRAND MODEL
    • Height, 14 inches.
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • is 9
    • SP
    • M|
    • Sons 80 2| 8 Sons 108 2 8 08
    • 4
    • MI 5 Soonoos
    • gear
    • 5 (
    • 2
  • n.n. - vue 89/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 00
    • 00
    • VAN HEURCK
    • COMPLETE RESEARCH OUTFIT
    • The Grand Model Van Heurck Microscope Stand, on Tripod foot, as illustrated, £ s.d.
    • page 87 ................................................................................ 67 10 0
    • Divisions to Stage, reading to To millimetre ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 5 0 Plate to cover Stage for rough work ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 10 0 Centring Screws to Rotation of Stage ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 8 10 0 Rackwork Rotation to Stage ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 5 10 0 Divisions to Rotation of Stage ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 3 0 Research Substage with 2 slides fitted to carry condensers specified below ... ... 4 5 0 Best Mahogany Case to contain Instrument and Apparatus ... ... ... ... 7 15 0
    • Extra High-power or Wenham Binocular Body to interchange with the Monocular 14 0 0
    • * OBJECTIVES (see page 13), Watson’s Holoscopic Series— 25 mm., £4 10 0, 12 mm. -65 N.A., £5 5 0, 4 mm. 0-95 ... 2 mm. Oil Immersion, 1-37 N.A.
    • 2 in., £2 10 0 ; 3 in., £3 0 0 ......................
    • EYEPIECES, Holoscopic Series—
    • Magnifying powers 5, 7, 10 and 14 diameters
    • Extra to make pairs for Binocular, 1 each, 5 and 7 diameters ...
    • If the high-power Binocular Body is specified, Eyepieces will be student size, £2 instead of £2 15 0 each.
    • £ s. d.
    • 65 0
    • 2 15 0
    • 16 0 0
    • 10 0 0
    • 5 10 0
    • II 0 0
    • 5 10 0
    • ACCESSORIES
    • Parachromatic Condenser 1-0 N.A. with Iris diaphragm and set of stops for dark ground and oblique illumination ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7 0 0 Abbe Model Illuminator (1*2 N.A.), No. 12802 and set of stops ... ... ... 3 10 0 Ramsden Screw Micrometer Eyepiece, 2321 £7 15 0 ; Stage Micrometer, 2329, 12/6 8 7 6 Polariser, and Analyser, 2456 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 2 6 Dust-proof Triple Nosepiece with tangential centring screws ... ... ... ... 1 10 0 2 Live Boxes, 2262, 17/6 ; and 2271, £1 0 0 1 17 6 Lamp. 2144, and Case, 2147... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 10 0 Bull’s-Eye Stand Condenser, 2169 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 17 6 Set of 12 Test Objects (see Object Catalogue) ... ... ... ... ... ... 15 0 Abbe Pattern Camera Lucida, 2251 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 5 0
    • MOUNTING APPARATUS
    • Pine Cabinet of Mounting Apparatus, 2382 ... ... ... ... ... ... 5 15 0 " Universal ” Dissecting Microscope with two Aplanatic Magnifiers ... ... ... 6 10 0 Cathcart-Darlaston Microtome for Embedding and Freezing, 2351 ... ... ... 4 7 6 Section Razor 2354, ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 2 9
    • PHOTO-MICROGRAPHIC APPARATUS Laboratory Camera (see separate list, part 5) ... ... ... ... ... ... 37 10 0 2 Inner Frames, fitting Microscope and supplying connecting Flanges ... 2 12 0 Watson-Conrady Condenser on Stand with Centring screws and Iris diaphragm ... II 10 0 Focussing Glass, 16/6, and Projection Eyepiece, £2 10 0 ... ... ... ... 3 6 6 Trough on Stand, to contain Light and Heat Absorbing Media, No. 2292 ... ... 3 3 0 Chemicals for Development, etc., in case ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 10 0
    • All the necessaries for Photo-Micrography are included above.
    • Complete Cabinets of Choice Microscope Objects (see Part II.).
    • Code word for above outfit—Mime.
    • * Apochromatic Objectives, as per page 11, may be substituted for above if desired.
    • grerrenig 9
    • 9
    • IP 9 2 8 sons 10 SH HI 5
    • SNog Soxs go Is!
    • 6
    • E m
    • SHS S wd § OS
    • 838 2| s IN
  • n.n. - vue 90/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • VAN HEURCK
    • 89
    • COMPLETE VAN HEURCK MICROSCOPE OUTFITS
    • GRAND MODEL VAN HEURCK MICROSCOPE Stand as described, pages 81-87, No. 18601
    • Code Word. Mitel No. 18901 With Parachromatic Objectives. Two Parachromatic Objectives—l in., -80 N.A., and choice of 1 in., 3 in. or 2 in. Two Eyepieces, large capped pattern. £ s. d. Abbe Illuminator, No. 12802. Mahogany Cabinet ... ... 115 17 6
    • Mixid 18902 Same as 18901, but with the additions of dust-proof triple Nosepiece and 1 in. Oil Immersion Objective ... ... 122 7 6
    • Mizen 18903 With Holoscopic Objectives. Two Holoscopic Objectives—25 mm. (1 in.) and 4 mm. (8 in.) Two Eyepieces, Holoscopic, capped pattern. Universal Condenser, No. 12603. Complete in Mahogany Cabinet ... ... ... ... ... 129 10 0
    • Moans 18904 Same as 18903 but with the addition of 2 mm. (2 in.) 1-37 N.A. Oil Immersion Objective, Holoscopic Series and dust-proof triple Nosepiece, complete in best Mahogany Cabinet, with drawers for apparatus ... ... ... ... ... 143 10 0
    • Mobil 18905 With Apochromatic Objectives. Two Apochromatic Objectives, 16 mm. (3 in.) and 4 mm. (8 in.) Two Eyepieces, Holoscopic capped pattern. Universal Condenser, No. 12603. Complete in Mahogany Cabinet ... ... ... ... ... 132 5 0
    • Mocke 18906 Same as 18905, but with the addition of 2 mm. (2 in.) Oil Immersion, Apochromatic Series, dustproof triple Nosepiece. Oil Immersion Holoscopic Condenser, to replace the Universal Condenser, complete in best Mahogany Cabinet with drawers for apparatus ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 156 15 0
    • Model 18907 For Amateurs’ Use. Binocular and Monocular bodies to interchange. Five Holoscopic Objectives—75 mm., 50 mm., 25 mm., 12 mm., -65 N.A. 4 mm. ... Holoscopic Eyepieces—1 pair, x 7, one only x 10. Universal Condenser, with set of Stops for dark ground and oblique illumination. Bull’s-Eye Stand Condenser, 21610. Rousselet’s Live Cage, 2263, and Compressor, 2262. Stage Forceps, 2482. Complete in best Mahogany Cabinet ... ... ... ... 166 15 0
    • The above sets are suggestive and may be varied at the differences in the Catalogue prices. Extras, such as Divisions to movements of Stage, additional Mechanical Screws, etc., etc., can be added at the respective prices given on page 85.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. | /zzzzzz/zz//zz/z//////z//z/zz///z/z////zz/zzzzzz//zz/zzz//zz//zzzz/////z/z/z/zz/zzz/z/Z
    • S% NI IM
    • Z IAi
    • RI 6 B pl 0 F sens 86 3
  • n.n. - vue 91/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 90
    • ULTRA-VIOLET LIGHT
    • ULTRA-VIOLET LIGHT (INVISIBLE RADIATIONS) AND DARK GROUND ILLUMINATION
    • PHOTO-MICROGRAPHY WITH ULTRA-VIOLET LIGHT.
    • In “ Practical Microscopy,” by Dr. Shillington Scales, published in 1909, appears a very concise description of the apparatus necessary, and we extract from it some of the important points and difficulties which are associated with the work :—
    • “ The resolving power of a lens depends upon its aperture, and with cedar oil as an immersion medium we are limited to an N.A. of about i’4. An immersion lens has been constructed for use with monobromide of naphthalene which has an N.A. of about 1-6, and proportionately greater resolving power, but this medium is, unfortunately, unsuitable for mounting most objects, so that this lens has not come into general use. But we can increase the resolution in two other ways— either by increasing the refractive index of the mounting medium, and so shortening the wave-length of light, or by using light of shorter wave-length. White light is known to be made up of rays of different wave-lengths and refrangibility, those at the violet end of the spectrum being much shorter than those at the red end. Monochromatic light, selected by means of a prism or screen, and taken from the blue, or, still better, the violet end of the spectrum, will consequently give us greater resolution than ordinary white light, which combines so many rays of longer wave-length. This is taken advantage of in photo-micrography, and the result is a very definite increase in resolution—say, of the markings of a difficult diatom. Unfortunately, the eye itself is but little sensitive to such rays, so that it is not easy to see the object directly, or to focus it, though such light has high actinic value. Dr. Kohler, of Jena, has, however, experimented with ultra-violet rays of a still shorter wave-length—275uu.—which have even greater power of resolution, but are, of course, invisible, and has lenses made of crystal and fused quartz corrected for this wave-length, which, as monochromatic light is used, have the incidental advantage of needing correction only for spherical, and not for chromatic aberration. The N.A. of the strongest system is 1-25, which gives a resolving power, as compared with an imaginary ordinary lens used in daylight, equivalent to N.A. 2*5, on account of the small wave-length of the light used. The light itself is obtained from a 2 mm. spark between cadmium electrodes of a Leyden jar, worked with an induction machine, and light of the required wavelength is separated by an iris diaphragm and passed through a condenser made of quartz.
    • “ But the human eye, as has just been stated, cannot see these rays, and so cannot focus and adjust them. Therefore Dr. Kohler has devised what may be called an artificial eye; in other words, he constructs what corresponds to the lens of the eye—i.e., an Eyepiece, made also of quartz, and a retina or screen made of fluorescent glass, which responds to the ultra-violet rays.
    • p/w/rsss^ssssssss/s/w/rssss/v'sssssssrs^^^
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. . ^^7^^/^/^77^7^/^/^/^^/7///^^^
    • pssssssssss./77/rsrss„sssssss„ss"/-„ssssss/yssssssssssssssss/^^^^^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. ,
    • ^/X^A^^/^/y^y^yy^^/%^^/^^^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 92/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • ULTRA-VIOLET LIGHT
    • 91
    • ULTRA-VIOLET LIGHT, Etc.—Continued
    • The image on the screen is examined visually by means of an ordinary pocket magnifying—‘ lens,’ in which case Dr. Kohler has found magnesium light, having a wave-length of 28Quu., more suitable than cadmium light. This lens, impervious to the injurious ultra-violet rays, lengthens them, and so renders them visible for rough examination and focussing. A photograph is then taken, showing the finer detail. It is to be noted that these quartz lenses can only be used with light of the wave-length for which they are constructed, that an immersion medium of suitable refractive index (made of glycerine and water in proportions calculated to give such a definite refractive index) must be used, and that the cover-glasses and slides must also be made of fused quartz, or the latter can be made of ultra-violet permeable glass.”
    • For comparative purposes it must be stated that Objectives composed of quartz lenses having numerical apertures respectively of 35 and *85 would give, if illuminated by ultra-violet light as already described, relative apertures of 70 and 1-7 respectively.
    • It has to be remembered that this work is limited to photography only, that it requires a number of special lenses, mountings and fittings generally for the exclusive purpose, and consideration would have to be given to any value which might attach to its use before a purchase were embarked upon.
    • An estimate of the cost of an outfit is shown on a succeeding page.
    • It must not be overlooked that Mr. Barnard says in his contribution to the " Lancet ” on the subject that “ Focussing by means of the fluorescent image is both difficult and dangerous owing to the action of ultra-violet light on living organisms. Changes can be set up which might be regarded as normal appearances in the organisms. The actual exposure, therefore, of any material to ultra-violet must be the shortest possible. There is no reason to regard the action on living organisms as a trigger action, a certain time factor is involved, but precautions must be observed to ensure that no change due to the light itself is set up.”
    • DARK GROUND ILLUMINATION.
    • Of much greater practical value is the dark ground illuminator, and especially that pattern which can be used with any Oil Immersion Objective utilising its full aperture without a funnel stop in the Objective to reduce its efficiency, and which is effective through the thickness of an ordinary 3 in. by 1 in. slip. Such is the Nelson Cassegrain of Watson’s make. Mr. Barnard remarks—" In the light of recent experiments it is, in fact, clear that full resolving power is obtained more certainly by an efficient dark ground illumination method than by any other means,” and this undoubtedly is true. The effects obtained by its means are so widely and appreciatively known that full details are not necessary. It is now made in a new form of quartz for ultra-violet light.
    • ^/y/^/^/^/y/^/y/^^^^
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 //zzz/zz////zzzzz/zzzz//zzz///zzzz/zz//zz///zzzzzzzzzz/z/////z/zz/z/z//z///zz//zzzzzZ
    • y/7/^//7/7/7/7/7^/7/^//7^////7/7/7////7/^/7/7//7/^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • f/7^/7//7/7/77//////^////y///^//^^^ 020020000000000
  • n.n. - vue 93/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 92
    • ULTRA-VIOLET LIGHT
    • ESSENTIALS FOR ULTRA-VIOLET LIGHT WORK (INVISIBLE RADIATIONS)
    • Useful for Photographic
    • 1. Source of Light.
    • 2. Quartz Condenser.
    • 3. Quartz Substage Condenser.
    • 4. Microscope.
    • 5. Quartz Objectives and Eyepieces.
    • 6.
    • 7.
    • 8.
    • 9.
    • Purposes only.
    • Quartz Slips and Covers.
    • Special Fluorescent Screen.
    • Camera.
    • Bench.
    • 1. Source of Light. The two best illuminants are (a) The Mercury Vapour Lamp and (b) Arc Lamp with Tungsten Cored Carbons. A suitable enclosing house is needed for the Arc Lamp.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Scalx 19201
    • PRICES £s. d.
    • Mercury Vapour Lamp with Quartz Condensing Lens, Iris Diaphragm and Light Modifier Holder, complete with wire plug, etc., on special saddle
    • Arc Lamp with Tungsten Cored Carbons and enclosing house. Lamp mounted to interchange on saddle with Mercury Vapour Lamp
    • Quartz Condenser with Iris Diaphragm and adjustment for height, mounted on saddle
    • Quartz Substage Condenser for use with Glycerine Immersion, with Iris Diaphragm and Filter Carrier, complete
    • Quartz Dark Ground Condenser, Cassegrain type, mounted to interchange with the Substage Condenser ...
    • Microscope of new design mounted upon a solid casting incorporating in its base an optical bench with slides carrying the saddles of the illuminating system. The Microscope itself is mounted in a vertical position upon the casting which also carries the Photomicrographic Camera in a position at right angles to the Microscope. The Camera is |-plate size and fitted with rackwork extension and special adjustments to ensure the plate lying at right angles with the optic axis. The whole design ensures complete rigidity and entire absence of vibration
    • Centring Substage, Mechanical Stage, and Interchangeable Objective Holders are fitted to the Microscope. The fine adjustment is by lever, ensuring a positive motion while the design is such as to impart the slowest movement yet obtained compatible with efficiency
    • Eyepieces, Quartz, x 5, x 7, x 10, x 14, x 20
    • Objectives, Quartz, x 13-75 x 70 x 67
    • N.A.
    • N.A.
    • 0-256
    • 1-19
    • N.A.... 1-14
    • 12 pairs Quartz Slips 3 in. x 1 in. and cover glasses ...
    • Flourescent Screen to fit over Eyepieces for focussing purposes
    • Price for the Outfit, complete
    • ... 600 0 0
    • Drawings and further specifications submitted on request. Variations can be made to suit special requirements.
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. :
    • &SSS/SSSS"SSS"SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS/SSSSM
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 94/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 93
    • ULTRA-VIOLET LIGHT MICROSCOPY AND DARK GROUND ILLUMINATION
    • Research Microscopes can be used with ultra-violet light, by the addition of certain accessories, a set of which is detailed below. The essentials are :—
    • The Ultra-Violet Light Lamp.
    • Quartz Condenser.
    • Quartz Dark Ground Illuminator.
    • Quartz Slips on which the objects are mounted, and a Light Modifier.
    • Research Microscopes of good quality, and of modern construction, with centring screws to Substage, and mechanical movements to Stage, are absolutely necessary. We recommend the Horizontal type of Microscope. See page 94.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. Scarl No. £s. d. 1930a Mercury Vapour Lamp, of latest construction, specially designed for microscopical work, arranged to work on 100 to 150-volt direct current, or alternatively 200 to 250-volt direct current, complete with adjustable series resistance and holder, fitted with Quartz Condensing Lens, having Iris Diaphragm and Light Modifier Holder, complete, ready for use with supplies of connecting wire, plug, etc. ... ... ... ... 38 10 0
    • Scald 1930b Special Arc Lamp with 50 Tungsten Cored Carbons and en- closing house for Arc Lamp ... ... ... ... ... 16 10 0
    • Scamp Scarp Scand 1930c Quartz Condenser with Iris Diaphragm on stand ... ... 5 5 0 1930d Glass Screen to reduce light intensity ... ... ... ... 0 10 6 1930e Quartz Substage Condenser for use with Glycerine Immersion, with Iris Diaphragm Mounting complete ... ... ... 18 10 0
    • Scatc 1930f Cassegrain Dark Ground Illuminator in Quartz complete with requisite stops, fully mounted for Understage... ... ... 7 5 0
    • Scant 1930g Quartz Eyepieces x 5, x 7, x 10, x 14, x 20 ... ... each 5 0 0
    • Scano 1930h Quartz Objectives x 13-75 N.A. 0-256 ... ... ... 30 0 0 x 70 N.A. 1-19 50 0 0 x 67 N.A. 1-14 50 0 0
    • Scape 19301 Quartz Slips (3 in. x 1 in.) and cover glasses for use with the above ... ... ... ... ... ... per pair 0 10 0
    • Scapa 1930m Laboratory (or other) Photo-Micrographic Camera as per Part V of Catalogue of Microscopes, with double dark slide, etc. 37 10 0
    • The foregoing are suggestive for those who wish to adapt existing apparatus for this form of Microscopy. Quotations and specifications will be submitted for the alteration and equipment of apparatus upon receipt of enquiries.
    • ^/^/77^^/Z^/^7^77^7/>y/7/7^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ^/7////7/^/^/7/7/>7^^/7//'//////7y/7/7/7/^^^
    • 2 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. ^^/^/7/^/7/7/7/////77/7/^/^/7/7^^
  • n.n. - vue 95/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 94
    • SPECIALISED MICROSCOPE
    • THE “HORIZONTAL” MICROSCOPE
    • The most rigid microscope extant for Photomicrography and Projection.
    • This instrument is designed as a fixed horizontal Microscope of the highest class, arranged for attachment to a photographic bench. The base, which is a solid metal one, has four clamp screws, both the Body and Stage being supported on metal pillars so as to impart the maximum of stability.
    • The Body is of extra large diameter, and is fitted with a Draw-tube. Focussing is effected by means of a diagonal rackwork and pinion.
    • The Stage, which corresponds with the one fitted to our Van Heurck Microscope, rotates concentrically and has mechanical movements with long range of traverse. The movements are divided, and read by verniers to 10 of a millimetre. This Stage is moved to and from the Objective in substantial bearings by means of a rackwork and pinion.
    • The construction is unusual in that the Fine Adjustment moves the Stage instead of acting on the Body. This obviates the necessity for re-setting of the light source when a Vertical Illuminator is in use, and very exact adjustment to focus can be obtained by the Fine Adjustment that is provided, which is of the lever pattern.
    • To enable focussing to be carried out on the focussing screen of the Camera which may be some distance from the Microscope, a Hooks’ Joint Handle is provided which gears with the Fine Adjustment milled head. A Bull’s-Eye Condenser for illuminating opaque objects is also supplied.
    • The Substage and Mirror, as shown in illustrations are extra.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. No.
    • Baldor 19401 “ Horizontal ” Microscope ... ... ... ... ... ... £50 0 0
    • Baldent 19402 Mahogany Case extra ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 10 0
    • FOR TRANSPARENT OBJECTS
    • Baldoso 19403 A Compound Substage with screws to centre and rackwork to focus, also large double mirror can be included as figured, at an extra cost of ... - ... ... ... ... ... ... ... £8 10 0
    • For particulars of Photomicrographic cameras for use with this instrument, see Part 5 of this catalogue.
    • ANNS 9
    • 9
    • IP 8 08 2 8
    • Sons 5 4
    • 8H
    • 5
    • ANNeoorg io g d
    • o
    • H8
    • 8 Wd S 2 S 0
    • Lu
  • n.n. - vue 96/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 95
    • THE RAMSDEN
    • MICROGRAPH
    • The need for simplified apparatus for general use in Examination of Structures by Projection, Measurement of Structures, Crystals, etc., by Projection,
    • Photographic Records of Raw Materials or Finished Products, has been long and increasingly felt under modern methods of production and inspection.
    • Many admirably designed instruments are available for this purpose, but the heavy initial cost, complexity of design, difficulty of manipulation save by a specially trained technician, provision of extra movements and fittings necessary only for research, operate against their general employment,
    • An added difficulty with the ordinary micro-scope devices is that of indicating and explaining structure to non-technical observers, but with the Ramsden Micrograph the image is projected, thus structure may be examined and discussed in conjunction with other observers.
    • The Ramsden Micrograph, which is the outcome of research by Colonel Ramsden, and which has been in constant use for over four years, is now being made available for general use by manufacture on a quantity basis.
    • As will be seen from the specification, the instrument is robust and of the simplest design; it will give satisfactory performance even under conditions of the roughest use.
    • METHOD OF OPERATION
    • To set up for the examination of transparent objects by transmitted light.—Place the object on the stage; switch on the light in the upper lampholder. The objective being screwed into the objective collar, focus by turning the focussing screw. The image should appear sharply on the ground-glass screen in the sloping front of the body.
    • To set up for examination by reflected light.—Slide the vertical illuminator into its guide slots on the top of the body, taking care that it is centrally under the objective. Switch on the current to this illuminator. Lay a piece of thin paper on the stage and move the stages up and down the vertical gui de rods till the spot of light is at its smallest size. Then clamp the main stage on to the vertical guide rods by the clamping screw on the right side. Place the object to be examined face downwards on the stage, using a card with a small hole in it to support very small objects. Focus the object as above by means of the focussing screw.
    • @
    • Code Word No.
    • Makba 19501 Ramsden Micrograph with lamp-holder, ground- and plain-glass focussing screens, lamps for transmitted light illumination, dark slide (4-pl.) lamp for label camera
    • EXTRAS
    • Makod 19502 Watson-Conrady Vertical Illuminator, with lamp (for and opaque specimens) metallurgical
    • Makad 19503 Polarizer and Analyser (for crystalline structures) ... ...
    • Mamol 19504 Eyepieces, x 5, x 6, x 8, x 10 ... each
    • Makot 19505 Objectives, 2”, 1|", 1” each
    • Makge 19506 1/ 2/ ... ... each
    • Mam it 19507 Condenser, Abbe pattern, with iris diaphragm ... ... ...
    • Makit 19508 ,, Universal „ „ „ Revolving Stage, graduated to degrees ...
    • Malid 19509 ... ...
    • Malon 195010 Stage Plates, to carry small specimens for examination with reflected
    • light, varying apertures ... ... each
    • Malot 195011 Extra Dark Slides, J-pl., metal ... ... each
    • Malwe 195012 Scales, divided on glass for direct measurement of projected images each
    • Malew 195013 Extra Lamps, for Micrograph ... each
    • Malle 195014 „ „ for Vertical illuminator and label camera each
    • Descriptive leaflet sent on request.
  • n.n. - vue 97/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 96
    • HORIZONTAL READING MICROSCOPE
    • MICROSCOPE.
    • W.WATSON&SONsuO .LONDON
    • The Horizontal Microscope is for the purpose of measuring small vertical distances, or small differences between vertical distances of moderate length.
    • The base is a flat tripod fitted with levelling screws and bearing a circular spirit bubble.
    • From this base rises a tubular column in which a graduated tube slides and can be clamped at any height. At the upper end of this inner tube is a bearing for a bar of triangular section which slides within it and is graduated. The movement of this bar is controlled by rack and pinion. A vernier is attached to the bearing. Upon the upper end of the triangular bar rotates a casting which carries the microscope focussing movement which is by rack and pinion. The horizontal body tube moved thereby is similar to that of an ordinary microscope except that it carries a long spirit bubble for precise levelling.
    • A 2-in. Objective is supplied with the instrument. The Eyepiece is fitted with a micrometer scale at the focus of the eye lens.
    • A telescope object-glass can be supplied to interchange with the microscope objective for distant readings.
    • DIMENSIONS
    • Maximum height of axis 555 mm.
    • Minimum height of axis 370 mm.
    • Adjustment of tube in pillar 110 mm.
    • Rack movement of vertical bar ... ... ... ... 75 mm.
    • Length of body-tube ... 160 mm.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Motle 19601 Microscope as described, complete with Objective and Eyepiece ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 12 10 0
    • Saben 19602 Telescope Object-glass in cell to interchange with Objective,
    • with focussing sleeve ... ... ... ... ... ... I 10 0
    • HURtenoVeRe"/*
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ,
    • 7//77///7/7/7/^//^/7/>Y/^/7/^^^^
    • ^//7/7////^77A^7///77/7/^/^//^^^^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. f Weece/cettee/c/ec/e/e/ece/t/////////:’:,®’*.
  • n.n. - vue 98/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 97
    • VERNIER MEASURING MICROSCOPES
    • VERNIER MICROSCOPES
    • With cast-iron bed, upper surface planed with a V and flat and fitted with a slide, which can be clamped at any point. This slide carries a second slide, which is moved by a fine screw and fitted with a vernier, by which the scale on the bed-plate can be read to 0-02 mm., the total length of scale being 16 cm. A microscope is carried by a knuckle-jointed projecting arm attached to the second slide, by which it can be set, vertically and horizontally— or turned through an angle of 90° on an axis at right angles to the axis of the microscope. Thus it can be set in several different positions with respect to the position of the scale, some of which are shown above.
    • A glass micrometer scale, with which the size of small objects can be measured to one fiftieth of a millimetre and, by estimation, to at least one-fourth of this size, is placed at the common focus of eyepiece and objective.
    • A telescope object glass can be used in place of the microscope objective, thus converting the instrument into a short range cathetometer.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. Sabao No. £s.d. 19701 The Instrument as above, with one objective, 1 in., 2 in., or 3in. 12 16 0
    • Sab at Sabba Sab el Sabla 19702 Additional Microscope Objectives of the powers stated, each 1 18 6 19703 Telescope Object Glass, interchangeable with above ... extra 1 12 0 19704 Case to carry Vernier Microscope, with lock ... ... ... 0 19 6 19705 Dividing on Silver ... ... ... ... ... ... 16 0
    • ^///y/7/^/7/7/////////7/7////77/////7/^/>Y/^^
    • G
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I 20*
  • n.n. - vue 99/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 98
    • MUSEUM MICROSCOPE
    • THE WATERHOUSE PATTERN
    • As supplied to the South Kensington and other Museums.
    • The Museum Microscope gives facilities for the display of a number of mounted microscopic objects in a museum or exhibition, where it is required to leave the instrument unattended, and at the same time prevent injury to microscope and specimens. As here illustrated, it -will be found thoroughly reliable and adequate in every way.
    • It consists of a dust-proof mahogany-framed glass case, in which the Microscope is fitted. The 3 x 1 in. slides, twelve in number, are placed upon a brass drum, which can be rotated from outside the case, a spring catch indicating when the object is centred. The Eyepiece of the Micro-scope projects outside the case, and fine focussing is effected by rotating the eyepiece in a spiral slot.
    • This new pattern embodies useful features suggested by past experience and combines convenience in observation with security against any interference with or removal of parts of the instrument. The door by which alone the inside of the case is accessible is fitted with a good lock.
    • Code Word. No. PRICES
    • Musky 19801 Complete, with one Eyepiece and 12 in. or 2 in. Parachromatic
    • Objective ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... £31 10 0
    • Museum Microscope, No. 2 Pattern,
    • Museum Microscope, No. 2 pattern, is similar in general construction to the large Waterhouse pattern, but is arranged to carry only five mounted objects on 3 x 1 in. slides.
    • The focussing adjustment is by rack controlled from the outside right-hand of case. All the projecting milled heads, etc., are effectually protected against improper treatment. Owing to the smaller number of objects exhibited, this model is recommended where large numbers of visitors are to be provided for without undue waiting.
    • Muste 19802 With Eyepiece and 14 or 2 in. Objective
    • ... £27 10 0
    • ^/^/r/^^/^/^^^/M^^
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
    • 7///7*"rsssssss'wywss'y™™/r/7S/./r/7^^^
    • gNog Soo § 86 8
    • E IE
    • 5 HS S W § 85
    • 5
    • 08
    • S’% Koonon
  • n.n. - vue 100/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 99
    • MUSEUM MICROSCOPE
    • No. 3 PATTERN
    • One of the difficulties associated with revision work in teaching is that owing to restricted space and need for microscopes in classes, demonstrations can only be staged for a matter of a few hours. The hitherto accepted design of Museum Microscope has not provided for its use with high power dry objectives.
    • Model No. 3, constructed originally for an Indian University, meets both these needs. The drum carries twenty-four prepared specimens, these can be easily changed as frequently as may be required and if left in departmental museum or the Laboratory can be used as a demonstration set. All objectives up to and including the 1 in. (4 mm.) can be used efficiently.
    • As will be seen from the illustration the Microscope consists of a teak (or mahogany if preferred) containing case having at the back an aperture to admit light from a lamp mounted exterior to the case. Inside and on the back surface of the case is mounted a substage of standard size carrying an Abbe condenser to efficiently illuminate higher power objectives. Mounted upon a central pivot and with appropriate stops is a revolving wheel carrying at its periphery a series of clamps which serve not only to secure the prepared specimen but to which also an adjustment is fitted so that all specimens may be brought to the same plane of focus. This wheel takes the place of the microscope stage.
    • On the front surface and within the case is mounted a microscope body, fitted with rackwork coarse and lever fine adjustments. On the front of the case will be seen the handle controlling rotation, numbered to correspond with the slide in the field of view, also a roughened surface ivorine plate (easily washed) upon which may be written the names of the specimens mounted within and their order of examination.
    • To set up for use :—After switching on the current for the lamp, focus the condenser to illuminate the field, place each specimen in its clamp, secure lightly until the desired structure has been found (specimens from 2 x 2 in. to 3 x 11 in. can be used), secure firmly by tightening the clamp. Set fine adjustment to its middle position to allow ample focussing latitude for all visions, adjust object to desired plane of focus with fine adjustment as set. Repeat for each specimen, lock and close the case. The instrument may then be left ready for students, etc., the specimens cannot be touched or damaged. The fine adjustment only is available to the observer after the case has been closed.
    • Code Word. No. £s. d.
    • Malbe 19901 No. 3 Museum Microscope as figured and described with provision for 24 Specimens, 1 Eyepiece x 6 with cross line gratunile for centering the specimen, Objective Parachromatic 1 in. and 1 in. or 3 in.
    • and 8 in. at choice, Abbe condenser, holder for lamp ... ... 45 0 0
    • ^/^/77^^A^7^/^77/^/7^///^/^/7/^^//^^//7/7/7//7^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ,
    • mW^7y/’/^^^yM’^^yX^^M^^y/,Xy^^77/7/Xy^^/77//y^^7^^
    • Roog Sos 888 hl B 2 0 80 858 128 hl 08
    • G 2
  • n.n. - vue 101/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 100
    • THE “ CLUB ” PORTABLE MICROSCOPE
    • Height, 84 inches.
    • Weight (with case) 4 lbs. Spread of Tripod, 6 inches.
    • A rigid, compact, and thoroughly efficient Microscope, built to bear constant travelling. Packing does not necessitate taking any part to pieces, the legs fold backwards against the limb ; the mirror tailpiece pushes upwards through the Stage, and the whole packs completely in a stiff leather case, measuring about 7 x 4 x 3 in. with space for Eyepieces and Objectives.
    • The Coarse Adjustment is of Standard pattern, and enables a 3 in. Objective to be focussed. The Fine Adjustment is a direct-acting one with Micrometer Screw.
    • The Mirrors are Plane and Concave.
    • The Body, which is fitted with draw-tube, carries Eyepieces of universal size.
    • It is a microscope suitable for high-power work and carries apparatus of standard size, so that the accessories of larger instruments can be used with it.
    • Price,
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Mosac 11001 Stand only, as figured, in Stiff Leather Case ... ... ... 12 10 0
    • ^/^/^7XA'/^/77X/Z^^/^/7/7/7A^^^
    • € W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. :
    • geegeeegeegeeppeee
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C
  • n.n. - vue 102/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 101
    • MCARTHUR WATSON PORTABLE MICROSCOPE
    • Size 41x42"
    • Weight 3 lbs. 12 ozs.
    • For detailed description by Dr. McArthur see J.R.M.S. Series III, vol. liv. No. 3, Sept. 1934, p. 182/5.
    • soarom
    • This instrument incorporates many unique features and constitutes a radical departure from conventional design. Its portability and simplicity of use, freedom from risk of damage in transit will immediately be appreciated by all who require a travelling microscope and where it may be used far from a base laboratory or research station. For rapid bedside diagnosis the consultant will find this instrument invaluable.
    • The entire microscope is contained between the two stout metal side plates. The mirror folds flat down upon the condenser,—for use it is raised and may be inclined and rotated to any convenient angle for light. The Object stage slides forward between stops and the instrument is ready for use. Light from the mirror is reflected down through the condenser, which is provided with an iris diaphragm, through the specimen to be examined, to the Objective. Provision is made on a moving number for mounting three Objectives, we recommend 12, 3 and 1 or 3, 1 and 7% 0-mm., according to the work to be undertaken. The sliding number carrying the Objectives serves as a nosepiece and can be moved forward against spring stops bringing each objective into alignment. These Objectives being accurately parfocalled a fine adjustment only is needed for focussing. The image formed by the Objective is displaced through an angle of 90° by means of a prism mounted in the base of the microscope frame, a similar prism at the base of the Eyepiece tube diverts the image formed by the Objective up through the Eyepiece to the observer. The prism box is removable for cleaning in tropical climates.
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. I “ 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 3
    • Z4wzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 2 D///*X=0I*/****880000800008000t0eetet.
  • n.n. - vue 103/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 102
    • McARTHUR WATSON PORTABLE MICROSCOPE-Continued
    • The containing case presents little difference from that of a pair of prism binoculars and is of solid bridle leather, stiffened, and will be found efficient under all conditions. It has sufficient space to accommodate tubes of soloid stains, slides, coverglasses, pipette, etc.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Malby 110201 McArthur Watson Portable Microscope with condenser NA TO and iris diaphragm, one Eyepiece at choice x 6, x 8, x 10. Saddle
    • leather case, stiffened ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 15 10 0
    • The case can be supplied to contain special accessories, stains, etc. at a small extra charge to cover the cost of the fitting.
    • Purchasers wishing to use their own Objectives can have them parfocalled to the instrument at a small supplementary charge. Any of our own Objectives, if ordered at the same time for use with the instrument, will be parfocalled free.
    • For Objectives see pages 6-17. We recommend Parachromatic series for this model.
    • FIELD PORTABLE MICROSCOPE
    • A simple instrument, light and rigid, of the greatest value to the Zoologist or Botanist of any of the many microscope users whose profession demands a considerable amount of field work. The microscope stand consists essentially of a central pillar forming the front leg of the tripod and carrying the fine and coarse adjustments. The fine adjustment is of the spring loaded direct acting type while the coarse adjustment,—effected by rack and pinion,—carries a stout metal sleeve within which is the microscope body tube. The tube may be slid up and down within this sleeve to afford an extra focussing latitude for the use of very low power Objectives.
    • Mounted upon the main pillar is the microscope stage, fitted with stage springs, made of metal and of sufficient size to carry a slide with trough or live cell. Dependant from the stage is a tube to carry iris diaphragm or condenser and at the end of the foot pillar the mirror is mounted.
    • For packing purposes the two side legs of the tripod fold inwards to the body, the body is racked downwards to the stage and the whole instrument when closed measures 6|", weight 1 lb. 13 ozs.
    • Objective, Eyepiece and Condenser fittings are all of Standard R.M.S. sizes.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Malbi 110201 Field Portable Microscope as figured and described, without Eyepiece or condenser, stand only
    • Malbo 110202 Leather Carrying Case with sling and with fittings for one Eyepiece and two Objectives
    • Malbu 110203 Abbe type illuminator with iris diaphragm and colour filter carrier in specially shallow mount
    • £ s. d.
    • 7 10 0
    • 100
    • 2 15 0
    • &NNNNN 8 9
    • P 89 8 08
    • OS 2 gol 8 08
    • 5
    • A H
    • 5
    • VoNNAAS
    • y/W7/7/7/77///^^/>^/^//77^/7/77^//7/^/^^^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • <////^/7/////////7^^^/////^//////77/7^//^^7777//////////7^/7//7/////////^
  • n.n. - vue 104/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 103
    • BINOCULAR MICROSCOPES
    • The Microscopist who has always used the monocular form of microscope can have no conception of the assistance accruing from a three dimensional picture of the structure or of the beauties that are to be found among the specimens he is constantly examining. Through the monocular type only one plane of the object can be focussed at a time, consequently the true interrelationship of the cells and other tissues forming the picture must be built up mentally by focussing the different planes in turn. With the binocular instrument the several planes of the objects examined stand up clearly in stereoscopic relief. This three dimensional picture is of assistance in the rapid determination and classification of structures. To lovers of pond life, entomology, etc., it gives a new field of pleasure and study. To the constant worker the use of both eyes affords relief and the Microscope can be used for prolonged periods without any strain or discomfort.
    • Wenham Binocular Body for Microscope.
    • There are four forms of Binocular Microscope body available for the Microscopist :—
    • The Watson Wenham Stereoscopic System.
    • The Watson High-Power „ „ —the " Universal.”
    • The Watson Greenough „ „
    • The Watson Low-Power ,, „
    • THE WATSON WENHAM BINOCULAR MICROSCOPES
    • This well-known pattern has had great popularity with the amateur worker.
    • One instead of paired Objectives is used, and a prism reflects the image into the second tube, while the direct rays pass up the main tube.
    • The Wenham System gives excellent stereoscopic effects, but its practical use is limited to Objectives not higher than 1 in. (12 mm.). Provision is made for sliding the prism out of the axis so that the monocular body only can be used for higher-power work.
    • When a Microscope is to be used for a number of purposes, it is advantageous to have two bodies fitted to the one Microscope Stand, one having a Wenham binocular body, and the other an ordinary monocular tube. Two such bodies can be supplied to interchange in the same fittings.
    • The Wenham Binocular Microscope is highly appreciated for the study of insects, pond life, foraminifera and objects that have several planes. For prices, see page 106.
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ) 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • fa"s/ssA'sssys''ssss/wssss/jVs/7y/s/77//H/7/7//^^^ Y.l ^^z<^z^z^z^zz'zzzzzzzzwzzzz'zzzzzzz/zzzzt/z^^
  • n.n. - vue 105/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 104
    • THE UNIVERSAL BINOCULAR BODY
    • It is well known that, however good the image of an object may be, viewed with either eye singly, it is inferior to the image seen with both eyes.
    • Binocular vision with the Microscope is no less striking. The object is seen in a manner that has never been possible monocularly. It is natural to use the two eyes simultaneously, and the comfort of microscopical work in such circumstances is very pronounced.
    • Disadvantages that have been associated with former attempts to make a high-power Binocular Microscope do not exist in the Universal, as the following outstanding qualities will show.
    • THE UNIVERSAL BINOCULAR BODY
    • It can be used with the lowest power up to the highest power Oil Immersion Objectives.
    • It performs equally well with either.
    • There is no diminution in resolving power of definition, the full aperture of the Objective being utilised in each body.
    • A pronounced stereoscopic effect is produced.
    • Ocular fatigue is obviated.
    • The design is so sturdy that no part is likely to become deranged.
    • It is the ideal form of Binocular Microscope, and the best.
    • No special Eyepieces are required.
    • Maximum efficiency with maximum comfort is secured.
    • CONSTRUCTION. The Universal Body is intended primarily to be an interchangeable unit, which can be immediately attached to a slide on the coarse adjustment fittings of the Microscope to replace an existing Monocular body, and vice versa. The Nosepiece and Objectives, being mounted separately, remain in position during the exchange; the Object under examination therefore is undisturbed. It can be fitted to any Microscope described in our Catalogue, excepting the “ Kima ” model. It is also supplied in a complete microscope, with the binocular body only.
    • The method of interchanging monocular and binocular bodies is by the provision of a separate receiving slide, on which either of the bodies can be immediately fitted and clamped.
    • The inter-ocular adjustment is by means of a horizontal spiral screw, a divided scale being provided to show the exact measurements. The milled head of the screw is seen projecting from the body and leaves the space between the Eyepieces free. An adjustment is fitted to the right-hand Eyepiece for difference of vision, enabling those with unequal sight to obtain the best possible focus for each eye.
    • The prisms are of finest optical glass, of guaranteed durability.
    • Recommendations. The “Service,” “Bactil” and “Patna” Microscopes will be found particularly appropriate for use with the Universal body, or interchangeable bodies. The latter are particularly recommended for laboratory work.
    • The Universal Binocular Body cannot usually be adapted to existing Microscopes. It should be specified when ordering a new instrument or, if specified at the time of ordering, provision can be made by the addition of the extra slide fitting for the binocular interchangeable body to be purchased at any later date. For all existing Microscopes the Universal High-Power System mounted as an Eyepiece to fit into the body tube in place of the ordinary Eyepiece, is supplied.
    • ^^///y/^/^/yy^/^/^/^/^^/^/^/^/^^^ ^////Z/ZZZZZZZZ//////Z//ZZ<Z^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 "e I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
    • ^^^/^//^//7^/7/7^/y7//^7/7^/7^/77^/Z^/7/y/^^/^^^ 2. Wetee/e/ee/etee/e/teensi/eest/teetses/teetersere/eyA
  • n.n. - vue 106/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 105
    • WATSON’S BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE
    • B
    • For prices see page 106.
    • SPANS o sol
    • El 6 E 2 6 IHS S wd s 108 828 2 8 9 S.wsd
    • = . A 683 Ss^g 755 3—
  • n.n. - vue 107/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 106
    • PRICE LIST OF THE “WENHAM” AND “UNIVERSAL” HIGH-POWER BINOCULAR BODIES
    • For the “ Service,” “ Patna,” “ Edinburgh Student’s,” and Research models, for the Binocular body in addition to and interchangeable with the Monocular body, with one pair of Eyepieces, add :
    • Code Word. No. Sabot 11061 PRICES £ s. d. For the “ Wenham ” Pattern (see page 103) ... ... ... 14 0 0
    • Sabre 11062 For the “ Universal ” High-Power Pattern (see page 105) ... 14 0 0
    • For either of the above instruments, fitted with a Binocular body, instead of the usual Monocular, with one pair of Eyepieces, add :
    • Sacbu 11063 For the “ Wenham ” Pattern ... ... ... ... ... 12 0 0
    • Sacad 11064 For the “ Universal ” High-Power Pattern ... ... ... 12 0 0
    • For the “ Royal ” and “ Van Heurck ” Microscopes add to the price of the instrument for a Binocular body in addition to and interchangeable with the Monocular body :
    • Sacch 11065 For the “ Wenham ” Pattern ... ... ... ... ... 14 0 0
    • Saccu 11066 For the “ Universal” High-Power Pattern ... , ... 14 0 0
    • For either of the above instruments fitted with a Binocular Body instead of the usual Monocular, with one pair of Eyepieces, add :
    • Syrin 11067 For the “ Wenham ” Pattern 9 10 0
    • Syste 11068 For the “ Universal ” High-Power Pattern 9 10 0
    • Synco 11069 “ Universal ” High-Power Binocular Body, mounted as an Eyepiece to fit into the body tube of any Microscope, complete with one pair of Eyepieces 10 0 0
    • Synxz 110610 Inclining unit for use with any Watson High-Power Binocular Body (see page 107) 5 0 0
    • The above Binocular Bodies can be fitted to any Microscope described in this Catalogue, with the exception of the “ Kima ” Model, provided it is specified at the time of ordering.
    • ^^/^/^/^/^/^/^^^
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • W////w/////////z/////////z^^
    • ^/^/^/^///////^^/^^/^/^/y^^^
    • | 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
  • n.n. - vue 108/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 107
    • INCLINING UNIT
    • The increasing use of tissue culture technique, the examination of colloids, of materials mounted in serum, and other preparations of a similar nature, necessitates the use of the micro-scope in a vertical position. The fatigue consequent upon the use of the instrument in this manner has led to a demand for apparatus to relieve the worker. Many users to-day have grown accustomed to and prefer the High-Power Binocular Microscope, and because of this the Inclining Unit, as illustrated, has been developed. Thus, the instrument may either be used with the monocular body or the high-power binocular body in the conventional position, or if it is essential that the microscope be used in the upright position so that the stage remains horizontal, the Inclining Unit can be inserted and the microscope used with either the monocular or the high-power binocular body It is of course only possible to add this to an instrument provided with the intermediate slide for the interchangeable bo lies.
    • Code Word No.
    • Makbe 11071 Inclining Unit, as
    • figured ... ... £5 0 0
    • 09
    • TUBE LENGTH
    • CORRECTOR
    • Computed by SIR HERBERT JACKSON, F.R.S.
    • The high standard of correction of modern Microscope Objectives entails a great sensitiveness to accurate Tube Length setting. It is not sufficient to use standardized cover glasses, as the actual depths of the mountant between the specimen under examination and the cover glass may effectively increase cover glass thickness. High-Power Binocular bodies, although fitted with correcting lenses, have no further provision for Tube Length adjustment. Sir Herbert Jackson, Director of the British Research Association, has evolved a piece of apparatus which may be mounted as part of the microscope body, or between the nosepiece and body, whereby Tube Length correction can be carried out simply with all Objectives. Watson’s have always objected to the use of the correction collar, owing to the difficulty in incorporating it in objectives, but as the optical components of this adjunct consist of a concave lens system, sensitivity to accurate centring is not so great and the apparatus enables the most sensitive of apochromatic objectives to perform at its best.
    • No.
    • 7 A
    • K
    • Code Word
    • Makbo 110702 Sir Herbert Jackson Tube Length Corrector, as figured ... Price £7 10 0
    • N.B.—Ranges of Tube Length equivalent to 100-300 mm. are obtainable with this accessory.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. :
    • ^^^^/^^^///^/'/^^^^^^/'/y/y^^/x^/y///^/////^//^/^^/^/^^^
    • So S Sons g PI 2 IH8 8 cd 8 0: RI 2
    • 5
    • 6
  • n.n. - vue 109/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 108
    • WATSON GREENOUGH
    • R ...... = -5
    • BINOCULAR DISSECTING MICROSCOPE
    • Pattern 3
    • — / (======= "
    • For description see page 110.
  • n.n. - vue 110/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 109
    • WATSON GREENOUGH
    • BINOCULAR DISSECTING MICROSCOPE
    • Pattern 4 inclined
    • |
    • WATSON & SONS, LTD, LON DON.
    • @ F i F
    • L 0
    • For description see pages 110-112
    • "XgrC2077ppPpp"XXAXAzz*2zz*zzzz*222222422402252//,
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD I
    • vvvvvPvrrRRRX**VPPppPPPppppXXXXXX*zz*Xe***********
    • , 313 HIGH HOLBORN W.C 1
  • n.n. - vue 111/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 110
    • DISSECTING MICROSCOPE
    • WATSON
    • GREENOUGH BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE
    • By reason of its wide field of view, long working distance, erect image and true stereoscopic effect, the Greenough type of binocular microscope has found increasing favour among all microscopists there is in fact no science in which the microscope is used where additional assistance in the elucidation of problems can not be obtained by the employment of this model. The increasing demand for the Watson Greenough Binocular Microscope and a study of the needs of the workers in every field, has led to a complete reconsideration of our patterns and the introduction of a series which it is hoped will meet every requirement.
    • GREENOUGH
    • BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE
    • Pattern 3 (Illustrated on page 108)
    • As will be seen from the illustration the base consists of an extra large flat horseshoe foot rising from which is a stout solid metal pillar. Upon this pillar is supported a stage, cast integrally with a stout metal sleeve which fits over the pillar rising from the base (Fig. 2). The stage measures 5% in. x 4 in. and consists of a polished glass plate, and etched on the lower surface to disperse the light evenly, mounted in a metal frame. The frame incorporates slots to carry hand and arm rests which are swept backwards giving
    • rest in a natural position to the arms and wrists during a long dissection or series of dissections. The stage itself is drilled with a series of holes to accommodate either the stage springs of conventional design as shown with Microscope Pattern 4 Incl. or the new type figured on this instrument. The stage springs can be accommodated near the pillar, at the edges of the stage or at the front, according to the specimen under examination. It will be noted that the new design is such that petri dishes, pieces of rock, etc. may be firmly held without strain by sliding the spring itself up and down the stem while the forked ends ensure a spaced grip of unusual strength during a dissection.
    • The binocular body itself is of the conventional type but new eyepieces of the large field type, having diameter greater than the standard R.M.S. size and with relatively long eyepoints have been fitted. The field is thus increased and greater comfort in working secured.
    • Rackwork coarse adjustment by rack and pinion is provided but of such range that objects having a thickness up to 2 inches may be placed upon the stage and examined with ample latitude in the coarse focussing.
    • Differences in vision between the two eyes are provided for by fitting to each pair of Eyepieces an individual focussing motion on one Eyepiece.
    • Many occasions arise when it is desired to, make an examination of an object in situ, some fungus on a tree bark, a large metal casting, etc. For this
    • a 9
    • IP 89 08 80
    • 2 8 sons 80 IHI 84
    • 0 Sononods
    • 8000 Sox Sos gl 6
    • E SHS 8 0 § 10 82 2| a 6 SANS
  • n.n. - vue 112/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 111
    • WATSON GREENOUGH BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE
    • —Continued
    • purpose the whole body and stage are removable (see illustration p. 112). The stage then serves as a foot and the specimen may be slid over and across the stage or the glass plate can be removed and the frame used not only as a foot but also to confine and where possible flatten the specimen.
    • For certain examinations and dissections the Long Arm Stand, p. 114, is essential and Greenough Binocular Microscopes, patterns 3 and 4, as well as the Low Power Binocular are fitted as standard with an additional slide permitting the removal of the body and coarse adjustment for mounting upon such a stand or other apparatus.
    • Low power dark ground illumination is frequently of the greatest assistance when used in conjunction with these instruments and for this purpose we supply a metal stage, as an extra, to interchange with the glass stage. This metal stage has mounted upon its under surface a spiral focussing screw or plain tube at choice to carry appropriate condensers. For prices see page 112.
    • GREENOUGH BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE
    • Pattern 4 Inclined
    • For much, if not all, routine work the Entomologist now uses the Greenough Binocular and the fatigue associated with working for long hours over a vertical microscope is obviated by the use of this new model. A great deal of the work also necessitates the use of top light, with the attendant disadvantages of variable intensity and direction if daylight be used or of an illuminant and lamp condenser external to the microscope.
    • These difficulties have been met in Watson’s Pattern 4 Greenough Microscope. The Eyepieces are inclined to a convenient angle, in the body is mounted an electric lamp with plug on the right hand side of the unit. This lamp is provided with a condensing system and inclined at such an angle that the illuminated area is in the same plane as the focus of the Objective.
    • Users of the Greenough Microscope seem to use principally two pairs of Objectives at a time, very rarely are all five available forms employed simultaneously. Watson’s have incorporated in the Pattern 4 Greenough Binocular Microscope, in addition to the electric illumination, a revolving double nosepiece. This nosepiece is so arranged that any two pairs of objectives can be selected as required and mounted in the slides provided and to ensure ease in working all Greenough Objectives are parfocalled.
    • From the foregoing it will be seen that these two new models constitute a real advance in design, and owing to the high degree of standardisation achieved it is only necessary to purchase one stand and to this all the three bodies can be fitted interchangeably.
    • RANGE OF MAGNIFICATIONS
    • LOW POWER BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE
    • Ramsden Eyepiece.
    • x8 x 12
    • Low power Objective x 12 x 18
    • High power Objective x 24 x 36
    • GREENOUGH BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE
    • Wide Field Eyepieces.
    • x 5 x 10 x 15
    • Objectives, 54 mm. x 14 x 26 x37
    • 47 mm. x 19 x 34 x 48
    • 37 mm. x 25 x 45 x 64
    • 27 mm. x 43 x 78 x 111
    • 22 mm. water immersion x 45 x 81 x 116
    • ^zzzzzzzzzzzzzz
    • ^v^/y^y^/^/^/^/^/^/^/z^/^/^/^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. | kezneecceececeececcezzecezezzezzecezzecezeczeccHZERARcReRRAARHeeN*
    • : 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. :
    • 4yss/zs//zsz/s///z/////////////z////z///z/szzzz///////s//sw
  • n.n. - vue 113/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 112
    • GREENOUGH BINOCULARS
    • Code Word.
    • Mamba
    • Mambe
    • Mambo
    • Mambu
    • Mamby
    • Mapba Mapbe
    • Mapbo
    • No.
    • 111201
    • 111202
    • 111203
    • 111204
    • 111205
    • 111206
    • 111207
    • 111208
    • £ s. d.
    • Pattern 3 as figured and described, with bandrests and mahogany case having fittings for eyepieces and objectives, complete with foot, stage and extra slide for interchangeable bodies ... ... ... 20 0 0
    • Pattern 4. Inclined as figured and described, complete with built-in electric bulb and condenser, foot, stage, extra slide for interchangeable bodies, revolving double nosepiece to carry any Watson Greenough Objectives. Resistance for any voltage or transformer, 1 pr. handrests, complete in mahogany case ... ... ... ... ... ... 37 10 0
    • Extras suitable for either pattern microscope, field each pair is provided with adjustment for correction, two between the two eyes.
    • Objectives, 54 mm., 45 mm., 37 mm., 27 mm. ... ... per pair 4 0 0
    • „ 22 mm. water immersion ... ... ... ... ... 5 0 0
    • Interchangeable stage of metal provided with plain tubular condenser carrier 112 6
    • Extra for spiral focussing screw to above ... ... ... ... 0 17 6
    • Greenough pattern lamp, for direct illumination in place of mirror, p. 210 ...................................................... IIO
    • Projector lamp for top light with Greenough Microscope Pattern 3 p. 210 .................................................... 15 0
    • Resistance extra according to voltage.
    • Eyepieces—large : One eyepiece in differences in vision
    • type, x 7, x 10, x 15
    • per pair
    • 2 0 0
    • to . or 60 o Q — Z
    • L 2
    • Low Power.
    • Pattern 3. Pattern 4 Incl.
    • % 0
    • g) a.
    • PRICES FOR BODIES ONLY
    • Mapbu
    • Mapby
    • Marba
    • 111209 Low Power Binocular body, complete with rackwork focussing motion, dovetail slide for attachment to other stands, 1 pair Ramsden Eyepieces x8 x 12 parfocalled, 2 pairs Objectives mounted on revolving double nosepiece ... ... ... ... ... ... 15 0 0
    • 111210 Pattern 3 Greenough Binocular body with rack and pinion coarse adjustment, slide for Objectives but without eyepieces or objectives 12 10 0
    • 111211 Pattern 4 Incl. Greenough Binocular body with rack and pinion focussing motion, built-in electric lamp with condenser system, double nosepiece to carry any two pairs of Objectives but without Eyepieces or Objectives ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 30 0 0
    • STOSS 9 g
    • SR a
    • 8 08 0 2 gi
    • 8 08 10 HI
    • 5
    • Soosooa
    • ^^r^/77/77A/777^^^^^x<^^^^/^/7^/^^^/^/x^yy777/'7^//^/^///7/’/y/'///^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • 4s//7SS/rs/7s/s/y/y/77/s//ss/ssss/sss////ss/s/^^^
  • n.n. - vue 114/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 113
    • LOW-POWER
    • BINOCULAR
    • MICROSCOPE
    • iea
  • n.n. - vue 115/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 114
    • WATSON’S LOW-POWER BINOCULAR DISSECTING MICROSCOPE
    • Embodies new features guaranteeing a robustness and durability which renders this instrument ideal for dissections and for class demonstration purposes. All occupied in teaching will recognise the assistance accruing from showing—in addition to thin sections—thick sections the structure of which, i.e. co-relationship of cells, capillaries, etc., may be seen and grasped in a manner impossible when the specimens are prepared conventionally.
    • For demonstration purposes something more robust than the ordinary Greenough pattern is essential. The Microscope has been designed to stand up to laboratory treatment in the hands of students.
    • The prism system is now incorporated in one box and interpupillary adjustment effected by means of a rack and pinion. As with high-power binocular microscopes, differences in sight between the two eyes are corrected by the milled collar on the right eyepiece.
    • The foot is of large dimensions to ensure absolute stability, and provided with a wide section pillar, flat on one side. The complete binocular body slides up and down on this pillar, and in addition rackwork focussing is provided. By the removal of the glass plate mounted on the foot objects at table level or even below it may be examined and by sliding the complete fitting up the pillar objects up to 6 in. in thickness may be focussed with ease.
    • Two pairs of Objectives are provided and these are mounted on a double nosepiece so arranged that the pair of Objectives not in use is at the back towards the limb and thus protected.
    • The Eyepieces are of Ramsden type, X8, X12, and the working distance with either pair of Objectives is 34 in.
    • Objectives and Eyepieces are parfocal.
    • PRICES £s. d
    • Moupt 111401 Stand, as illustrated, stage-foot with removable glass plate, heavy upright post, sleeve with clamp, slide to fit on sleeve and carrying focussing movement by rack and pinion, special prism systems in one box, parallel eye-tubes with adjustment for interpupillary distance, revolving nosepiece with two pairs of Objectives, two pairs of large-field Ramsden Eyepieces giving magnifications of X12, X18, X24, X36, price complete 17 10 0
    • Moust 111402 Mahogany Case ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 0
    • Mouvt 111403 Stage for the examination of objects with transmitted light sliding in dovetails on the foot in place of the glass plate, complete with hand rests and mirror ... ... ... ... 2 10 0
    • Mouxt 111404 Long arm stand giving 15 inches horizontal motion with counterpoise to equalise the weights, sliding vertical motion 16 10 0 The binocular body complete with the rackwork focussing adjustment is removable from the stand.
    • ^/y/^/^/^/r/^/^/^/x/^/^/^^^^
    • | W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ,
    • ^A^/y/^/^^^^/^^^^y^^^^^^
    • SNA so s 863 g
    • I
    • IP z I
    • 08 IAS W^ BI 2 a 9
    • Siod
  • n.n. - vue 116/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 115
    • BINOCULAR DISSECTING MICROSCOPE ACCESSORY FITTING
    • Long Arm Stand, for either Greenough or Low-Power Binocular Bodies
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTP, LONDON.
    • The examination of large specimens in dishes or in museum jars, the dissection of coarse tissue, the examination of barks, and similar large specimens which are difficult to handle, is facilitated if the whole microscope can be moved backwards and forwards over the specimen instead of a bulky specimen being moved backwards and forwards under the microscope. A special Long Arm Stand has been constructed for this purpose.
    • The pillar supporting the arm, as will be seen by reference to the illustration, is of stout build and is mounted towards one end of a heavy metal base. Thus, specimens in dishes may, if desired, be placed on the base which then forms a rigid stage ; or, if the specimen is to be examined in situ the whole arm may be rotated through 180°, and then projected over the material itself. The various Binocular bodies, complete with the rackwork coarse adjustment, as shown on page 112, can be detached from the stand and fitted into the dovetailed slide on the Long Arm Stand which is provided for the purpose. Adjustment vertically, in addition to the ordinary adjustment to the body by rack and pinion, is secured by sliding the transverse arm up and down on the pillar, and a separate clamping collar is fitted. A horizontal movement of 15 in. is given by rack and pinion, while a counterpoise fitted at the end of the arm overcomes the strain on the horizontal motion sometimes associated with this type of mounting. The body may be rotated through 180° on its own axis, or inclined through an angle of 90°, so that specimens mounted in a vertical position can be readily examined.
    • Code Word No.
    • Makby 111501 Long Arm Stand, as described, price ... ... ... ... £16 10 0
    • Allowance for horseshoe foot, glass plate, and upright pillar to Low-Power Binocular Microscope, if not required ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . •• £2 0 0
    • This mounting can be supplied for use with Greenough Binocular Dissecting Microscopes
    • Nos. 3-4, see pages 108 and 109.
    • ^^x/^/y^/y/^/^^/^^/^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • WZZZZ^ZZ'ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZzZZZZZZZZ'ZZZZZZZZZ>VZZZZZZZZZZZZ/?ZZZZ</ZZZ/ZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZ'^
    • yvxeooroyx-re***3
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
  • n.n. - vue 117/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 5
    • 0
    • LOW-POWER BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE ACCESSORY FITTING
    • 39 25 - u
    • 582
    • O U. 0 2.0 — 00 ” CO -033 58 0 0
    • S
    • The Low-Power Dissecting Microscope is constructed primarily for the dissection of opaque objects, but it is sometimes necessary to be able to make use of transmitted light. This is particularly so where the new technique in demonstrating histological structure by means of thick sections approximately 40u is employed. Binocular examination of such specimens permits the observer to follow the course of nerve fibrils, and capillaries, the position of muscles and of connective tissues, in a manner which conveys a true sense of their relationship to the surrounding tissues, in a way which is impossible when the ordinary thin sections are displayed for examination with the monocular microscope.
    • Therefore so that transmitted light can be used, a simple form of stage has been constructed. This stage is made in such a way that it can be slid into the dovetails provided for the glass stage ordinarily supplied with the microscope. The glass stage is pulled out, and the stage for transmitted light is put in its place. The stage is fitted with hand rests, as shown in the illustration. It is heavily constructed, thus rendering it very suitable for students’ use. Dissection can be carried out on the glass of the stage itself, and then washed clean. This stage, in conjunction with the Low Power Binocular Microscope described on the preceding page, forms a useful adjunct to laboratory equipment.
    • Code Word No.
    • Makbu 11160 Price for stage, complete with hand rests and mirror ... ... £2 10 0
    • For other forms of cheap but effective dissecting microscopes, and for particulars of dissecting instruments, see Part 2 of this catalogue.
    • ^;/7s/7ys//y.'/>r/y//s//////sys'^ss/'/>vs/s/>v7//s/^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 ^W////////////^^^^ /S/rSSSSS//r///7/SS/7S/S/7S7/S//^^^
    • AN00000 08g 80)8 so E 6 E 2
    • SHS 8 wd § 10 838 2 a 9
    • SoooooNS
    • PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN BY ROBERT MACLEHOSE AND CO. LTD. THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, GLASGOW
  • n.n. - vue 118/119
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • INDEX-Part I
    • A PAGE
    • Abbe Illuminator ... 28 “ Alpha ” Mechanical Stage ... ... 48 Amateur’s Outfit ... 80 Angle Eyepiece ... 20
    • Apochromatic Objectives ... ... 11
    • “ Argus " Objectives 16 Attachable Mechanical Stages 47-50
    • B
    • “ Bactil ” Micro-scope ... ... 64
    • Bell-glass Covers ... 62
    • Binocular Eyepiece— High Power 106
    • , High Power Microscope 104 „ Microscope— “Wenham” 103
    • Business Terms ... 3
    • o
    • Cables ... ... 3
    • Carriage ... ... 3
    • Cassegrain Dark Ground Illuminator ... ... 30
    • Centring Nosepiece 22 “ Club ” Portable Microscope ... 100
    • Coarse Adjustment 36 Codes ... ... 3
    • Colour Filters 26-27
    • Comparator Eyepiece 20 Compound Substage 41 Condenser, Abbe Illuminator 28 „ Carriers described 40 „ Changers ... 43 „ Holoscopic Oil Immersion ... 27 „ Para-chromatic 27
    • Condensers, Aplanatic Low-power 25 „ Quartz ... 93 „ Slides ... 43 „ Substage 23-31 „ Tabulated... 24
    • Cover Glass Corrector 107
    • B
    • Dark Ground Illuminators 29-31 „ Ground Stops 28
    • Davis’s Shutter ... 22
    • Dissecting Micro-scopes ... 116-118
    • Dissecting Stage ... 116
    • Drawtube, Mechanical ... ... 51
    • Duplex Eyepieces 21
    • is
    • Edinburgh Student’s Microscope — Fittings for ... ... 74
    • Edinburgh Student’s Microscope ... 70
    • E-continued. PAGE
    • Eisenberg Hanging Drop Slide ... 31
    • Electric Light Attachment ... 32 Expanding Stop ... 25
    • Eyepiece, High Power Binocular 106 ,, Angle 20 Eyepieces, Duplex 21 „ " Holoscopic” 19 „ Huyghenian 18 „ for Micrometer 18 ,, Projection ... 19 „ Quartz ... 93
    • F
    • Field Portable Micro-scope ............102
    • Fine Adjustment ... 37
    • Fluorescent Screens 92
    • G
    • “ Greenough ” Binocular ... 108
    • Guarantee ...... 52
    • H
    • Hanging Drop Slide 31
    • High Power Binocular Microscope 104 Holoscopic Condenser 27 „ Eyepieces 19 , Immersion Paraboloid 29 „ Objectives 12-13
    • “ Horizontal ” Microscope 94, 96
    • Huyghenian Eyepieces ... ... 18
    • a
    • Immersion Oil ... 10
    • Inclining Unit ... 107
    • Iris Diaphragm for Nosepiece ... 22
    • K
    • "Kima” Microscope 56
    • L
    • Long Arm Stand ... 115
    • Low-power Binocular 113
    • M
    • Macro Illuminator... 25
    • Magnification Table 17 Mechanical Stages 46-50 „ Stages, " Alpha ” 48
    • „ Stages, " Service ” 48
    • „ Stages, Student’s 49
    • Micrometer Eyepieces ... ... 18
    • Microscope, "Bactil” 64 „ Diagram of 33 „ Edinburgh Student’s 70
    • Wl—continued. PAGE
    • Microscope, Field Portable ... 102 „ “Greenough” 108 „ “ Horizontal” 94, 96 , “ Kima ” ... 56 „ Low-power Binocular 113 „ McArthur
    • Watson Portable... 101 „ " Museum” 98 „ “ Myral ” ... 54 „ “ Patna ” ... 66 „ “ Portable ” 100 „ “ Reading ” 96 „ “ Research ” 72 „ " Royal ” ... 78 „ “ Service ”... 60 „ “Van Heurck” described 81 „ “Van Heurck” Grand Model 87 „ " Vernier” 97
    • Microscopes, Dissecting ... 118
    • , Principle of Construction 34
    • Murray’s Long Range Stage 49
    • " Museum ” Micro-scope ... ... 98
    • " Myral ” Microscope 54
    • N
    • Nelson’s Dark Ground Illuminator ... 30
    • Nosepieces, Centring 22 „ Rotating 22 o
    • Objective Changers 22
    • Objectives ... 11-17 „ Apochromatic 11 „ “ Argus” ... 16 » Holoscopic 12-13 „ Parachromatio 14 „ Quartz ... 93 „ " Tank” ... 16 „ Variable Power ... 16
    • Oil Immersion Condenser ... 27
    • Optical Bench ... 38
    • P
    • Packing ... ... 3
    • Paraboloid... ... 29
    • Parachromatic Condenser 27 » Objectives 14
    • “ Patna ” Microscope ... 66
    • Payment ... ... 3
    • Photo -micrographic Objectives ... 16 Portable Microscope 100
    • Projection Eyepiece 19
    • %
    • Quartz Condensers 93 » Eyepieces ... 93
    • Q—continued. PAGE
    • Quartz Objectives ... 93
    • » Slips and Covers ... 93
    • R
    • Rackwork Drawtube 51
    • Ramsden Micrograph 95 “ Reading 33 Micro-scope ... ... 96
    • Research Outfits ... 72 “ Research ”
    • Microscope 72 “ Research ” Substage ... 43
    • Rotating Stage ... 49
    • “ Royal ”Microscope 77 „ Outfit ... 78
    • s
    • Scale Reading Microscopes 96
    • “ Service ” Mechanical Stage ... ... 48 " Service 33 Micro-scope ... ... 60 Shipment ... ... 3
    • Sir Herbert Jackson Corrector ... 107 Spot Lens ... ... 25 Stage Rotating ... 49
    • Stage Standard Mechanical ... 75 Stages ... 46-50 „ Murray’s Long Range 49-50 „ Student’s ... 49 Substage Mount ... 31
    • T
    • “ Tank ” Objectives 16
    • Tube Length Corrector ... ... 107
    • U
    • Ultra-Violet Light 93
    • Underfitting with Spiral Focussing Screw ... ... 42
    • Universal Binocular 104
    • Universal Condenser 26
    • V
    • " Van Heurck » Grand Model 92
    • „ Microscope, No. 1 ... 81
    • Variable Power Objectives ... 16
    • “ Vernier ” Micro-scope ... ... 97
    • W
    • " Wenham” Binocu-lar Microscope ... 103
    • Works, Illustrations of... ... ... 45
    • Z
    • Zonal D.G. Conden-ser ............... 31
  • n.n. - vue 119/119
  •  
  •  

TOME 2

• •  
    • CATALOGUE OF MICROSCOPES
    • PART 2
    • MICROSCOPES
    • AND
    • ACCESSORIES
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. LONDON
    • 36th EDITION
  • n.n. - vue 1/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CONTENTS
    • PAGE PAGE
    • Dissecting Microscopes ... ... ... 201 Dissecting Instruments and Apparatus 204 Blood Testing Apparatus 207 Books ... ... ... ... ... 208 Mounting and Culture Media ... ... 241 Microscopic Object Boxes ... ... 242 Objects for the Microscope ... ... 243 Polarising Apparatus ... ... ... 245
    • Lamps ... ... ... ... ... 210 Condensers—Stand ... ... ... 216 Dichroiscope ... ... ... ... 247 Goniometer Eyepiece ... ... ... 247
    • Stage Condensers ... 218 Vertical Illuminators ... ... ... 219 Stage Forceps, Turntables ... ... 248 Micrometer Rule, Insect Holder, Col- lecting Stick ... ... ... 249
    • Light Filters ... ... ... ... 222 Camera Lucidas ... ... ... 225 Spectroscopes ... ... ... ... 250 Classroom Projector ... ... ... 251
    • Live Cells ... ... ... ... 226 Projection Equipment ... 252
    • Live Boxes and Troughs ... ... 227 Heating Stage ... ... ... ... 228 Magnifiers—Hand ... ... ... 230 Micrometers ... ... ... ... 232 Epidiascope ... ... ... ... 253 Eyepiece Camera ... ... ... 254 Tilting Stage ... ... ... ... 255 Sayce-Watson Camera... ... ... 256
    • Microtomes ... ... ... ... 233 Photographic Cameras and Lenses ... 257
    • Mounting Materials ... ... ... 238 Stains and Reagents ... ... ... 239 Binoculars and Telescopes ... ... 258 Index ... ... ... ... ... 259
  • n.n. - vue 2/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 36th Edition
    • CATALOGUE
    • WATSON MICROSCOPES
    • PART 2
    • Microscope Accessories for all the Biological Sciences
    • The Instruments described are suitable for study and research in
    • Agriculture Cytology Physiology
    • Bacteriology Histology Pharmacology
    • Bio-chemistry Hygiene Phytopathology
    • BOTANY PATHOLOGY ZOOLOGY
    • for the work of the amateur and for many technical purposes.
    • The complete Catalogue of Watson Microscopes is issued as follows
    • PART I. PART 2. PARTS 1 & 2. Microscopes, Fittings and Optical Parts. Microscope Accessories. Microscopes and Accessories.
    • PART 3. Objects for the Microscope.
    • PART 4. Metallurgical Microscopes and Accessories.
    • PART 5. Photomicrographic Cameras and Accessories.
    • PART 6. Petrological Microscopes and Accessories.
    • PART 7. Microscopes for Industrial purposes and specialised apparatus.
    • PUBLICATIONS AND LEAFLETS
    • Microscope Record, pubd. three times annually, gratis.
    • Dark Ground Illumination.
    • Magnifiers and Mountings.
    • The Book of the Watson Microscope.
    • Microscopes for Students and Research.
    • Any of the above will be sent post-free on request.
  • n.n. - vue 3/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • Nine times placed Higher
    • THAN ANY OTHER Competitor.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, Ltd.
    • To H.M. Government, The Admiralty, OPT I CIA NS War Office, Royal Air Force, India Office
    • Colonial and many Foreign Governments
    • ESTABLISHED 1837
    • Head Offices and Show Rooms;
    • 313 High Holborn, LONDON, W.C.1, ENGLAND
    • Two doors from Chancery Lane and one minute from the Chancery Lane Tube Station
    • Telephones : Holborn 2767 and 2768
    • Hours of Business
    • - 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.
    • Cables and Telegrams :
    • “ Optics, Holb., London ” (2 words)
    • Saturdays - 9 a.m. to I p.m.
    • Works ; BARNET, HERTS., ENGLAND
    • ENGLAND.
    • SCOTLAND.
    • IRELAND.
    • AUSTRALIA.
    • CANADA.
    • S. AFRICA.
    • INDIA.
    • NEW ZEALAND.
    • EGYPT. FRANCE. FINLAND. HOLLAND.
    • JAPAN.
    • LATVIA.
    • POLAND.
    • Depots and Agencies :
    • BIRMINGHAM : Watson & Glover, 2 Easy Row.
    • LANCASHIRE, CHESHIRE: J. D. Casartelli, Lyme View, Romiley.
    • MANCHESTER : J. Woolley, Sons & Co., Ltd., Victoria Bridge.
    • ESSEX, LINCOLNSHIRE, NORFOLK, SUFFOLK: Chas. Hawksley, Bulmer, Sudbury, Suffolk.
    • GLASGOW : A. Woodger, 530 Great Western Road.
    • BELFAST : S. E. Dickson, 9 Donegall Square West.
    • ADELAIDE: W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 9 Graham Street.
    • BRISBANE: W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 105 Eagle Street.
    • MELBOURNE: W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 117 Collins Street.
    • NEWCASTLE: Wm. Watson & Sons, Ltd., Carrington Chambers, Watt St.
    • PERTH : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 205 St. George’s Terrace.
    • SYDNEY : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., Watson House, Bligh St.
    • OTTAWA : Instruments Ltd., 240 Sparks Street.
    • TORONTO : Wilson Instrument Co. , 59/60 Wellington Street, West.
    • DURBAN : British Instruments & Chemicals Ltd., 350 West St.
    • BOMBAY: A. H. Whelan, Commerce House, Currimbhoy Road, Ballard Estate.
    • AUCKLAND: W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., Lister Building, Victoria Street.
    • WELLINGTON : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 16 The Terrace.
    • CHRISTCHURCH : W. Watson & Sons, Ltd., 137 Cambridge Terrace, C. 1.
    • CAIRO: A. G. Casdagli, 16, Sh. Sheikh Hamza, P.O. Box 885.
    • PARIS: F. C. Dannatt, 198 Rue Saint-Jacques (5e).
    • HELSINGFORS: 0. Y. Chester, A. B. Kaisaniemugatan 5.
    • UTRECHT : F. Kooijman, Korte Smeestraat, 9-11.
    • TOKYO : A. Buckney & Co., P.O. Box 141 Central.
    • Thiseido Building Ginza, Nishi-nanachome Kyobashi-Ku.
    • RIGA: Valsts Electrotecknisha Fabrika.
    • WARSAW : Inz Feliks Lachman, 3 Szpitalna.
  • n.n. - vue 4/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 201
    • UNIVERSAL DISSECTING MICROSCOPE
    • As supplied to the “ Discovery ” Expedition.
    • W.WATSON
    • This instrument is made with jointed arm, to receive all the aplanatic magnifiers mounted for dissection, listed on page 230. The large horseshoe foot and pillar are one casting and carry a large stage, provided with a bevelled glass plate, below which is mounted a metal plate background.
    • A plane mirror and opal glass disc are provided in the mirror box, which is mounted independently of the pillar.
    • Focussing is by means of a rack and pinion adjustment to the lens-carrier arm.
    • Strong metal hand rests, removable at will, are provided.
    • It will be noticed that the arm carrying the dissecting lens is doubly jointed, so as to allow the comfortable examination of an object covering the whole area of the stage.
    • N.B.—The arm carrying the dissecting lens has been made specially stout to permit the use of the Porro Prism erector 2205, page 202. This gives an erect image, it can be used with Standard Eyepieces and Objectives. Thus with a 3 inch (16 mm.) Objective and No. 3 Eyepiece, a magnification of about 80 diameters is available and a free working distance of 3 inch—a working distance similar to that of the ordinary X20 dissecting magnifier.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Movey 2101 Universal Dissecting Microscope, without lenses ... ... 5 0 0
    • Mowle 2102 Aplanatic Magnifiers x 6, x 10, x 15 or x20 ... ... each 0 15 0
    • 2 9
    • IP Os 2 8 sons A MI
    • Si
    • ^/77/7//^//////7/7//y/^//7/7/^/7/^^
    • f 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
    • ^/Z/7/7////////^/y^/7//////^/7^7/^/7////^^^
  • n.n. - vue 5/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 202
    • "6 SIMPLEX: DISSECTING MICROSCOPES
    • Code Word.
    • Muffy
    • Mugle
    • Mulay
    • Multi
    • Specially recommended for Schools, Elementary Laboratories, etc.
    • Stage, 83 mm. x 68 mm.
    • 2201
    • No. PRICES £s. d.
    • 2201 This Stand receives all the Aplanatic Magnifiers mounted for Dissecting, listed on page 230. For focussing, it is fitted with a rackwork and pinion adjustment: glass disc for Stage, plane mirror, and matt opal reflector, double-jointed lens arm, complete with hand rests... ... ... ... ... ... 2 15 0
    • 2202 The above Stand, fitted with simple lens magnifying 8 diameters. Excellent for botanical work ... ... ... ... 3 2 6
    • 2203 The above Stand, with one Aplanatic Magnifier, selected from page ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 10 0
    • 2204 The above Stand, with two Aplanatic Magnifiers, selected from page ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 0 0
    • PORRO-PR1SM ERECTOR for Dissecting Microscopes
    • 2205
    • is
    • Fits the Simplex and Universal Dissecting Microscopes. Standard Eyepieces and Objectives can be employed. A high magnification combined with long working distance is obtained. Further, the image is seen erect instead of inverted, and dissecting can be carried on with the greatest facility. We recommend the 1 in., 1 in., and 3 in. Objectives, giving magnifications x 35, x 50, x 80 with ample working distance.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Murma 2205
    • PRICES £ s. d.
    • Porro-Prism Erector ... ....... 3 0 0
    • Sauel Savor Sawde Sawfl
    • Eyepieces x 5 x6 x8 x 10 each 0 10 0
    • Maygi Mayed Maygx
    • Objectives, Argus 14 in. 1 in. 3 in.
    • £12 6 £12 6 £I 2 6
    • Mawle Mawke Maxil
    • Parachromatic 1% in. 1 in. 3 in.
    • £2 0 0 £1 12 6 £1 12 6
    • f^^/y^/^^^^^^^^/r^^^^/^/^/X^^///^^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. )
    • 8 W
    • 9
    • 2
    • 8 sons
    • HI 8
  • n.n. - vue 6/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 203
    • DISSECTING LENS HOLDERS
    • 2301 2304 2303
    • 058
    • 18.2
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. No.
    • Mumpe 2301
    • £ s. d.
    • A solid casting metal base 4 in. x 33 in. with grooves in which a piece of matt opal glass 23 in. x 2 in. is fitted. Rising from the base is a cylindrical rod on which slides an arm to carry any magnifier in standard dissecting mount. A most popular
    • Dissecting Microscope for elementary Biology, etc. ... ... 0 10 6
    • Munch
    • 2302 Single Lens Magnifier for ditto, magnification about 8 diameters 0 7 6
    • Musha
    • 2303 Magnifier holder with heavy metal base, rackwork focussing and two joints provided with clamps. The Magnifier holding ring rotates around its axis in the socket. Especially valuable for the examination of aquaria, etc. ... ... ... ... 2 5 0
    • This model was supplied for the use of the " Discovery " Expedition.
    • Musia
    • 2304 Magnifier holder of simple but exceedingly robust construction.
    • Heavy metal base with upright rod. The vertical rod carrying the magnifier can be adjusted vertically, horizontally and rotates in its holder. It is clamped in position by one screw.
    • Magnifiers can be instantly interchanged and are firmly held 0 17 6
    • Muslo
    • 2305 The" Cantab" Magnifier Holder.
    • As supplied to the University of Cambridge Zoological Department and many other Teaching Institutions. A firm, indestructible holder for hard use. Solid metal casting, cannot be knocked over, adjustment for friction on ball joints. Standard size lens carrier. Two ball joints ... £1 10 0
    • 2305
    • % '
    • 5 a
    • Z
    • :
    • s
    • Any of the Magnifiers in dissecting mounts quoted on page 230 will fit the above holders.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • *
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ss/r/r/s/r/ssss/rssssss/rssssssssrs/rM^
  • n.n. - vue 7/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 204
    • DISSECTING INSTRUMENTS
    • Code Word.
    • Sacer
    • Sache
    • No.
    • 2401
    • 2402
    • Sacil 2403
    • Seduc 2404
    • Sedox 2405
    • Sagin 2406
    • Salac 2407
    • Salam 2408
    • Salea 2409
    • Salic 24010
    • Salpi 24011
    • Pream 24012
    • Sedow 24013
    • Sedoq 24014
    • Sedat 24015
    • Sedam 24016
    • Sedar 24017
    • Sedol 24018
    • Sedop 24019
    • Scalpels. Stainless steel. Flat handles, all sizes... ... ... each
    • All metal. Sizes 1 to 6, length of blade ranging between approx. 1 in. to 3 in. ... ... ... ... ... each
    • Ebony handles. Sizes 1 to 6 ... ... ... ... ,,
    • All metal, very narrow blade, approx. 2-5 mm. wide „
    • Borrodaile’s Needles, in wooden handles, suitable for dissection of
    • fine structures, such as the eye Scissors. Straight.
    • Curved.
    • Forceps. Straight.
    • 4 , 42 5 in. fine points, open shank..
    • 51
    • 99 99 99
    • 99 99 99
    • ,, closed shank ,, open shank..
    • 99 99 99
    • ,, closed shank
    • 5 in. coarse ribbed, blunt
    • 42, 5 in. blunt point ...
    • 4, 5 in. fine point, milled at end
    • 4% in. needle point
    • 5 ,, ,, ... ...
    • 41 in. fine noints ... ... ..
    • Curved.
    • Cover glass, flat ends, straight ...
    • Cover glass, flat ends, cross action
    • Cornet’s pattern for holding slides and cover glasses
    • Bone Forceps. Liston’s Bone Forceps, 5% in. with spring
    • 7 in.
    • 8 in.
    • 9 in.
    • 99 99 99
    • 99 99 99
    • 99. 29 99
    • Horsley’s Bone Forceps, 7 in. prismatic points
    • Needles. Rosewood handles, ferrules, straight fine points Rosewood handles, ferrules, curved fine points Rosewood handles, ferrules, curved blunt points Unvarnished wood handles without ferrule, per gross21/-
    • Needleholder, all metal, nickel plated
    • all metal, nickel plated, with clamping screw Section Lifter. Double ended, nickel plated
    • Single ended, nickel plated
    • Chain Hooks. Set of 3 ... ... ... ........
    • each each
    • 99
    • 99
    • 99
    • 99
    • 99
    • 99
    • 99
    • 99
    • 99
    • 9
    • 99
    • each
    • Blow Pipe. Nickelled, with stilleto ... ... ... ......
    • Razor. Flat on one side, hollow ground on the other
    • Cole’s pattern Section Knife with fixed steel handle
    • Strops. 8 in. double sided leather, flat, in case ...
    • Canvas Roll, fleece lined, to hold instruments, one size only ...
    • Set of Dissecting Instruments in canvas roll, containing 1 scalpel, 1 straight scissors, 1 straight forceps, 2 dissecting needles...
    • Set of Dissecting Instruments in canvas roll, containing 1 razor, 1 scalpel, 1 straight scissors,! straight forceps, 2 dissecting needles, 1 section lifter
    • £ s. d
    • 0 6 0
    • 0 2 0
    • 0 19
    • 0 2 0
    • 0 0 9
    • 0 2 6
    • 0 2 0
    • 0 2 3
    • 0 2 6
    • 0 2 3
    • 0 2 3
    • 0 2 0
    • 0 16
    • 0 16
    • 0 2 0
    • 0 2 0
    • 0 2 3
    • 0 2 0
    • 0 2 3
    • 0 3 0
    • 0 20
    • 0 6 9
    • 0 7 6
    • 0 8 6
    • 0 9 6
    • 0 14 6
    • 0 0 4
    • 0 0 5
    • 0 0 5
    • 0 0 2
    • 0 1 9
    • 0 2 6
    • 0 3 6
    • 0 10
    • 0 30
    • 0 16
    • 0 2 9
    • 0 8 6
    • 0 16
    • 0 3 6
    • 0 8 6
    • Set of Dissecting Instruments in canvas roll, containing 1 razor, 2 scalpels, 1 straight scissors, 1 curved scissors, 1 straight forceps, 2 needles blunt points, 2 needles fine points, section lifter
    • Set of Dissecting Instruments in canvas roll, containing 1 razor, 2 scalpels, 1 straight scissors, 1 curved scissors, 1 straight forceps, 1 curved forceps, 2 needles blunt points, 2 needles fine points, 1 section lifter, 1 blowpipe Set of Dissecting Instruments in wooden case, 2 forceps, 3 scissors, 2 scalpels, seeker, section lifter, blowpipe, 2 needles, 1 razor, chain hooks
    • 0 II 6
    • 0 15 0
    • 0 17 6
    • 1 7 6
  • n.n. - vue 8/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 205
    • DISSECTION APPARATUS
    • CHAMBERS’ MICROMANIPULATOR
    • . W.WATSON !.SONSIT" LONDON
    • The isolation of a single bacterium for the cultivation of a pure strain.
    • U
    • -a
    • 3
    • CD -
    • The Chambers’ Micromanipulator was designed by Professor Robert Chambers, of the Cornell University Medical School, New York.
    • This apparatus enables the operator to manipulate, dissect, isolate or treat with reagents the most minute microscopic objects with the aid of the highest powers, including oil immersion objectives. By its aid may be performed such operations as—
    • The dissection of the structure of a cell or of its nucleus.
    • The treatment with reagents of a single cell in a tissue living in vitro.
    • The success of the apparatus is due to the avoidance of bearings. The needle is carried by a mechanism consisting of stout lever-bars (p, o) connected by stiff spring steel plates (w). These bars are operated by screws with milled heads (h, i, j) below the level of the stage. The movements of the needle-point are in arcs which, under the microscope, appear straight. The extent of the movement is about 3 mm. The needle is set by means of clamps (b, c) and adjusting screw (f).
    • The illustration shows an instrument for the left hand with clamp (n, n) to attach it to a square plain stage such as is fitted to the “ Service ” microscope.
    • A similar instrument, but reversed in arrangement, is made for the right hand, so that two needles or a needle and a capillary pipette may be employed simultaneously. When attached, the two instruments are quite clear of the illuminating accessories or other parts of the microscope.
    • The right-hand instrument is also supplied with a rigid pillar rising from a large metal base upon which the microscope is clamped (B 4061). For bacteriological use a single instrument will usually suffice, but for work on cells in tissue two instruments are indispensable. The operation of the two instruments simultaneously is effected without any extra difficulty, and the technique is readily acquired owing to the simple and direct action.
    • Chambers’ Micromanipulator has been commended by those who have used it as an instrument with which the most delicate dissections may be performed with considerable facility.
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • ^f^/^//^Z7^7/^7r7r^^7r^f7/^7X/7^^/7///^^77^^^/^«/7^/^//f//t^ j 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I &S/S////7S//7////7///////S//X/7//////7/S////S//W/S/SS/^^
  • n.n. - vue 9/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 206
    • Code Word. Scena No. 2601 PRICES 1 pr. Micromanipulator Instruments, right and left-handed, for clamping to stage of Microscope £ 22 S. 10 d. 0
    • Scent 2602 1 pr. Micromanipulator Instruments, consisting of left-handed instrument, for clamping to stage of Microscope, together with one metal base with vertical pillar rising therefrom and carrying the right-handed Dissecting Instrument independently of the Microscope, this being fitted with syringe plunger and coil for injection work. Specific metal wire control to right-handed Dissecting Instrument on one screw. Base drilled in four places and provided with clamps to permit the use of any Microscope, upright rigid pillar and adjustment for height of Microscope stage, two instruments complete 30 0 0
    • Scept 2603 Special Wax, for securing needle to injection coil, and for securing syringe to coil ... ... ... ... ...per oz. 0 2 6
    • Schen 2604 Separate Shelf for attachment to Microscope where stage is too small to permit the direct attachment of the Dissection Apparatus, complete with screws and instructions for attachment (The thickness of the Microscope stage must be stated at time of ordering, and the dimensions of the stage given. The distance between the optic axis of the Microscope and front of the stage must be given.) 1 0 0
    • Scher 2605 Separate Shelf for attachment to Microscope for circular stage (Same measurements also required.) 1 5 0
    • Seama 2606 Flexible Shaft to control any one of the milled heads of the Microscope (unless ordered at the same time as the instrument the milled heads must be returned for the necessary attachment) 2 10 0
    • Seamy 2607 Special Moist Chamber for use with the instrument; depth 8 mm., size of chamber 1 in. x % in., mounted on thin slips, complete with supply of cover glasses ... I 10 0
    • Secon 2608 Special Condenser for use with above, fully mounted, and with dark ground stops ... 10 0 0
    • Descriptive pamphlet of the above Instrument will be sent on request.
  • n.n. - vue 10/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 207
    • Code Word. No.
    • Muted 2701
    • BLOOD TESTING APPARATUS
    • £ s. d.
    • Ehrlich’s Eyepiece with square adjustable diaphragm, for estimating the relative proportion of red and white blood corpuscles in dry preparations ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 10 0
    • - Ill F ml ed
    • few d till
    • DE
    • 01 s
    • Il 1 ill 1 1 in ya FimE
    • 0
    • Pabac 2702
    • Hafar 2703
    • Pabol 2704
    • Metha 2705
    • Cochx 2706
    • Conhx 2707
    • Codhx 2708
    • Pacha 2709
    • Pachx 27010
    • Pacif 27011
    • Thoma Haemacytometer, complete, consisting of open or closed cell counting chamber with Thoma ruling, two plane cover glasses, pipettes for white and red corpuscles in case ... ... ... ... ... 2 2 0
    • Haemacytometer complete with counting chamber 0-2 mm. in depth and Fuchs Rosenthal ruling in case ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 2 0
    • Haemacytometer complete but with double all Burker counting chamber, in case ... 2 12 6
    • Metal clips for holding cover glass, extra ... ... ... ... 0 4 6
    • Counting chamber only, single cell, open or closed 0-1 mm. deep ... 12 0 „ „ „ 0-2 mm. deep ... ... ... ... ... 12 0 ,, „ „ double all Burker, without clips ... ... Ill 6
    • The above counting chambers may be supplied with the following rulings: Thoma—Turek—Improved Neubauer. Fuchs Rosenthal.
    • Counting chambers with special rulings or cell depths can be made to order. Prices on application.
    • N.B.—The maximum error in the counting chambers does not exceed 0 001 mm.
    • Pipettes. Red cell pipette giving dilution 1—100 ... ... ... 0 5 6
    • White „ „ „ 1—10 .............. 0 5 6
    • Cover Glasses. Optically plane cover glasses, per pair ... ... 0 1 6
    • Myrox
    • Paint
    • Paget
    • Pacio
    • 27012
    • 27013
    • 27014
    • 27015
    • HAEMAGLOBINOMETERS
    • Gower Haemaglobinometer, with permanent glass standard in comparator box, 20 cm. pipette, drop bottle, lancet—complete in case ... 1 17 6
    • Sahli Haemaglobinometer with permanent glass standard in comparator box, 20 cm. pipette, acid bottle, lancet and dropper, complete in box ................................................. 117 6
    • Haldane Haemaglobinometer with authorised C.O. Blood standard graduated tube 20 cm. pipette, 12 lancets, complete in case ... ... 1 10 0
    • Carbon Monoxide Haemaglobinometer (Haldane Method) with permanent glass standards instead of blood standard for use in either day or electric light, in special comparator, complete with 20 cm. pipette, drop
    • Paglx Pagld Paglo Paglm Pagls
    • 27016
    • 27017
    • 27018
    • 27019
    • 27020
    • bottle, lancets in case ............. ... ... ... ... ... 3 3 0
    • Haldane standard tube only ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 7 6
    • ,, „ graduated tube only ... ... ... ... ... 0 2 6
    • Gower permanent glass standard in comparator box ... ... ... 12 6
    • Sahli ,, ,, ,, ,, ... ... ... 126
    • Graduated tube only for Sahli or Gower haemaglobinometers ... ... 0 2 6
    • ^^/7/////7/7//7/7^/77/^/7////77^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. , ?//7/7/S/7/7/7/7SS//7/7/r/////7/7/7^^^
    • ^/7/7/7///7/////////7///7/77/7/7/7/7/^/7/^^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
    • ^/77/7y7/7/7///^//’/yyyyy/y’y/yy'^/y>y^/>y///'/>y/>//^^^
  • n.n. - vue 11/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 208
    • BOOKS
    • BOOKS
    • Code Word. No. THE MICROSCOPE £ s. d.
    • Pamot Palet 2801 2802 BELLING, J. " The Use of the Microscope” CROSS and Martin J. Cole. " Modern Microscopy,” a handbook for beginners and students. Fifth Edition 1 0 4 10 0 6
    • Phaeb Pami 2803 2804 Dowdy, S. E. " The Microscope. How to choose and use it” " Origin and Development of the Microscope,” including bibliography and illustrated catalogue of R.M.S. collection. 303 pages, 30 plates, 36 figures (postage 9d.).. 0 0 2 10 6 0
    • Patem 2805 HALL. " How to use the Microscope.” A guide for the novice 0 2 6
    • Pazx Panel 2806 2807 Heath, C. " The Beginner’s Guide to the Microscope” Marshall and Griffiths. " An Introduction to the Theory and Use of the Microscope” ... 0 0 2 3 0 6
    • Paneo 2808 SPITTA, Dr. E. J. " Microscopy” 1 5 0
    • Panfo 2809 Wright, Lewis. The " Microscope.” Revised by Dr. A. Drew, new edition, 1927 MICROSCOPICAL TECHNIQUE 0 7 6
    • Patik 28010 Ballantyne, F. " An Introduction to the Technique of Section Cutting” 0 3 0
    • Patog 28011 Holder, J. T. " Elementary Histological Technique” 0 7 6
    • Patox 28012 JoHNSON, J. C. " Microscopic Objects. How to Mount them” 0 3 6
    • Parch 28013 Lee. A. Bolles. " The Microtomist’s Vade Mecum.” New edition, 1928 HISTOLOGY 1 10 0
    • Pares 28014 Hartridge & Haynes. " Histology for Medical Students” ... ...... 0 15 0
    • Parot 28015 Hentschell & Cook. " Biology for Medical Students” 0 10 0
    • Pareu 28016 Schafer. " Essentials of Histology” ... 0 14 0
    • BACTERIOLOGY, HAEMATOLOGY, AND PARASITOLOGY
    • Paren 28017 Clough, P. W. " Diseases of the Blood” 0 6 0
    • Paper 28018 Coles, A. C. " Diseases of the Blood” ... ... ... ... ...... 0 10 6
    • Papis 28019 Daniels & NEWHAM. " Laboratory Studies in Tropical Medicine” ...... 1 5 0
    • Papim 28020 Lattes Leone. " Individuality of the Blood in Biology and in Clinical and Forensic
    • Medicine” 1 10 0
    • Patue 28021 Hewlett, R. Tanner. " A Manual of Bacteriology” 0 18 0
    • Patir 28022 Johnston, J. H. " The Principles of Practical Bacteriology for Scientific Workers ” 0 5 0
    • Pardo 28023 Muir & Ritchie. " Manual of Bacteriology” 0 16 0
    • Papio 28024 Muir, R. " Bacteriological Atlas” 0 15 0
    • Papre 28025 Park & Williams. " Pathogenic Microorganisms” ... 1 15 0
    • Papiw 28026 Piney, A. " Diseases of the Blood” (second edition).. ... ... ... ... 0 18 0
    • Parde 28027 Piney, A. " Recent Advances in Haematology” (third edition) 0 12 6
    • Pardg 28028 Tanner, F. W. " Bacteriology” (second edition) ... ... ... ...... 1 8 0
    • Pardi 28029 Tanner, F. W. " Bacteriology.” A textbook of Microorganisms ... 1 2 6
    • Pards 28030 Tanner, F. W. " Practical Bacteriology : an introduction to Bacteriological Tech-
    • nique”... 0 12 6
    • Patyl 28031 WHITBY, L. E. H. " Medical Bacteriology” 0 10 6
    • Patyo 28032 Wyatt, R. B. Hervey. " Bacteriology for Dental Students” 0 6 6
    • Pasab 28033 Yorke, Warrington. " Nematode Parasites of Vertebrates ” 1 16 0
    • CYTOLOGY
    • Panon 28034 Baker, J. R. " Cytological Technique” 0 3 6
    • Panas 28035 Cowdry, Edmund V. " Special Cytology,” 2 vols. The set... 4 14 6
    • Panos 28036 Darlington, C. D. " Recent Advances in Cytology” 0 18 0
    • Paule 28037 Doncaster, L. " An Introduction to the Study of Cytology” 0 10 6
    • Pavil 28038 Gray, J. " A Text Book of Experimental Cytology” 1 5 0
    • Parme 28039 Thomson, David Landsborough. " The Life of the Cell ” ... 0 2 6
    • Panpo 28040 Turck, F. B. " The Action of the Living Cell” 0 18 0
    • GENERAL BIOLOGY
    • Panes 28041 Ash, E. " Ants, Bees and Wasps” 0 1 0
    • Pashy 28042 Ash, E. " British Spiders” 0 1 0
    • Pango 28043 Ash, E. " Pond Life” 0 1 0
    • Pawea 28044 Giltner, W. " An Elementary Text Book of General Microbiology” 0 15 0
    • Panid 28045 Hawks, Capt. " The Microscope shown to the Children” 0 3 6
    • Panod 28046 Cooke, A. " Insects shown to the Children” 0 3 6
    • SN00NN0: A IES
    • HI 80s
    • ZI 80s 8 028 XS di
    • zi |o|
    • 0)8 IE 84
    • 8 8 8% SNANnone
    • ^/^//////^/^///^^/^/^^^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^/7/7/7/7/7/^/^/^/^/y^/y/^/YZ^
  • n.n. - vue 12/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • BOOKS
    • 209
    • BOOKS—Continued
    • Code Word. No. GENERAL BIOLOGY £ S, d.
    • Panle 28047 Kelman, J. H. " Butterflies and Moths shown to the Children” 0 3 6
    • Panto 28048 Hawks, Capt. " Bees shown to the Children” ...... 0 3 6
    • Pavum 28049 Johnstone, Scott & Chadwick. " Marine Plankton” 0 12 6
    • Panos 2901 Mangham & Rae Sherriffs. " A First Biology” 0 6 0
    • Pamax 2902 Needham, James G. " Guide to the Study of Freshwater Biology.” Illustrated
    • keys and tables 0 5 0
    • Paux 2903 PLASKITT, F. " Microscopic Freshwater Life”... 0 13 6
    • Panox 2904 Kelman, J. H. " The Sea Shore shown to the Children” 0 3 6
    • Panit 2905 SHIPLEY. " Hunting with the Microscope” 0 8 6
    • Pannio 2906 Small, Prof. " Pocket Lens Plant Lore,” month by month ... 0 5 0
    • Parxe 2907 Smithson. " Pond Life” Algae ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 2 0
    • Paxg 2908 Step, E. " Ants, Bees and Wasps and Allied Insects of the British Isles” 0 10 6
    • Pauyl 2909 WARD & WHIPPLE. " Fresh Water Biology” 1 16 0
    • Pauyx 29010 WATSON-BAKER, W. E. " World beneath the Microscope” ... 0 5 0
    • Pawog 29011 WOOD. " Common Objects for the Microscope.” Edition with coloured plates ... 0 3 6
    • DIATOMACEAE
    • Pamid 29012 Brown, N. E. " A Monograph on the Arachnoidiscus ” 0 6 0
    • Pamle 29013 Laporte & LEFEBURE. " Diatomees Rares et Curieuses,” 2 vols. 30 plates (helio-
    • gravures) 1930-1931 ... 4 14 6
    • Pamer 29014 Taylor, F. G. " Notes on Diatoms” ... 0 15 0
    • Pamto 29015 Mills, F. W. An Index to the Genera and Species of the Synonyms 1816-1932, consisting of bibliography and ceres” onwards in about 15 separate parts, each part.. Diatomaceae, and their index from " Acantho- 0 10 0
    • PETROLOGY
    • Pasot 29016 Harker, A. " Petrology for Students” 0 8 6
    • Pasox 29017 Barker, T. V. " The Study of Crystals.” A General Introduction 0 8 6
    • Pasaw 29018 Barker, T. V. " Systematic Crystallography” 0 7 6
    • Pasan 29019 Evans, J. W. " The Determination of Minerals” ... 0 7 6
    • Pasce 29020 Evans, J. W., and Davies, G. M. " Elementary Crystallography” 0 7 6
    • Pavan 29021 Hatch & WELLS. " Petrology of Igneus Rocks” 0 15 6
    • Pasci 29022 Holmes, Prof. A. " Nomenclature of Petrology” 0 7 6
    • Pasdo 29023 Holmes, Prof. A. " Petrographic Methods and Calculations” . . 0 15 0
    • Pasom 29024 GREY, E. C. " Practical Chemistry by Micro Methods” 0 4 6
    • Pasma 29025 Johannsen. " Petrological Methods” ... 1 15 0
    • Pasnl 29026 Milner, H. B. " Methods in Practical Petrology” 0 3 6
    • Paspa 29027 Milner, H. B. " Sedimentary Petrography”... 1 1 0
    • Parlo 29028 Rhodes. " Micropetrology for Beginners” ... 0 3 0
    • Pasqu 29029 Rutley. " Elements of Mineralogy” ... 1 15 0
    • Pasq 29030 Rutley. " Mineralogy.” Revised by H. H. Read ... 0 6 0
    • Pasro 29031 Shand, S. J. " The Study of Rocks” ... 0 6 0
    • Passo 29032 Winchell, N. H. and A. N. " Elements of Optical Mineralogy,” Part I. ... ... 0 17 6
    • METALLOGRAPHY
    • Paumo 29033 Bamford, T. G. and Harris, H. " The Metallurgist’s Manual” 0 15 0
    • Pausl 29034 Berglund, T. " Metallographers’ Handbook of Etching” ... 0 12 6
    • Powow 29035 Greaves, R. H. and Wrighton, H. " Practical Microscopical Metallography” ... 0 18 0
    • Parag 29036 Howe. " Iron, Steel and Other Alloys” 1 10 0
    • Parie 29037 Osmond & Stead. " Microscopic Analysis of Metals” 0 10 0
    • Paupe 29038 Reed, Everett, L. " Photomicrographs of Iron and Steel ” ... ...... 1 0 0
    • Parod 29039 SAUVEUR. " The Metallography of Iron and Steel” ... % 2 0
    • TEXTILES.
    • Paswo 29040 Matthews, J. Merritt. " The Textile Fibres, their Physical, Microscopical and Chemical Properties”... 2 10 0
    • Pasxe 29041 ASTBURY, W. T. " The Fundamentals of Fibre Structure.” An introductory study in X-rays and Molecular Interpretation. In the press
    • PHOTO-MICROGRAPHY.
    • Paulo 29042 Barnard, J. E. and Welch, F. E. " Practical Photomicrography” 1936 Edition 1 1 0
    • Pasty 29043 Hind, H. L. and Randles, W. B. " Handbook of Photomicrography” 0 16 0
    • s s SR 84 8 08 |ol 2 89 ons 808
    • Z
    • 80 6 Sosood
    • SoNNX dl 8 zl Seg
    • 0 RI
    • 6 S 8 Sms
    • 0 5 8 ch s 86 s Sawas
  • n.n. - vue 13/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 210
    • LAMPS-ELECTRIC
    • For Visual Purposes
    • The fuller appreciation of the value of condenser technique and illumination referred to in Part I. of this catalogue has led to a revival of interest in the many forms of lamps and lamp mountings now available. For some years past, Watsons have endeavoured to meet the requirements of microscopists and to build lamps to suit their individual needs. From the experience so acquired, a fresh series of lamp mountings has been standardised which it is excepted will meet the wishes of all workers. Watsons are always ready to build special housings to meet the convenience of their clients.
    • PRICES
    • Code Word.
    • Phami
    • No.
    • 2101
    • £ s. d.
    • Phleb
    • 2102
    • Phalp
    • 2103
    • Picul
    • 2104
    • Merge
    • Mergi
    • 2105
    • 2106
    • Welch
    • 2107
    • Vrill
    • 2108
    • Vrall
    • Vroll
    • Vrell
    • 2109
    • 21010
    • 21011
    • The Service Lamp. For university and school laboratory. Constructed of stout metal and finished in stoved black enamel. A bayonet fitting mounted in the top, carries a gas-filled electric bulb suitably grained to diffuse the light. There are two openings, one is hooded so, that no light reaches the observer’s eyes and ensures deflection of light to the text book, while the other is slotted to receive an iris diaphragm or filter holder at a later date as required. Total height 175 mm. and height to centre of apertures 85 mm.
    • Iris diaphragm mounted to fit lamp
    • Colour filters, blue, blue-green, green, yellow, ...
    • 0 15 0
    • 0 15 0
    • each
    • 0 1
    • 6
    • The Universal Lamp. For general microscopy. The lamp consists of a cylindrical metai housing, suitable for lamps up to 100 c.p. Provision is made for adjustment in height and for correct angling in relation to the mirror. It can be used for transmitted light, opaque and dark ground illumination.
    • Price, complete on stand with 60-watt lamp, flex and plug,
    • The Projector Lamp. This small lamp, which was originally designed for use with opaque subjects and binocular dissecting microscopes is, owing to its compactness, very useful for general microscopy. It is fitted with a lens system which projects a concentrated beam of light upon the mirror or object, and the swivel joint permits its direction to be fixed as desired
    • Resistance for 100—125
    • Resistance for 200-250
    • volts volts
    • Described in J.R.M.S.
    • In this lamp an ordinary filament
    • The Welch Lamp.
    • bulb can be used in such a way that no stray light reaches the observer’s eyes. The beam from the filament is internally reflected in a glass rod where it is directed to the microscope mirror. The carrier for the glass rod is adjustable to correspond with the height of the filament in the lamp bulb, and the whole lamp housing can be tilted and retained in position with a clamp. It is mounted on a solid cast frame, and is a lamp especially suitable for high power microscopy
    • Extra rods
    • each
    • The Vril Lamp. This lamp is designed for dark ground illumination, projection drawing and for photomicrography with the various eyepiece cameras now available. The bulb is of the latest 5-amp. low voltage type with spiral filament. The mounting includes a condensing system, focussing adjustment to lamp, and adjustment for height and inclination. The bulb is included in the price, together with 3 ft. flex Extra for iris diaphragm and colour filter holder, to carry two filters
    • ,, for iris diaphragm alone
    • ,, for transformer
    • 30 0
    • 150
    • 1 7 6
    • 117 6
    • 3 10 0
    • 0 4 6
    • 3 13 6
    • 2 5 0
    • 15 0
    • 1 17 6
    • Lopol
    • 21012
    • The Greenough Lamp. Light projected from the mirrors of modern large field dissecting microscopes is difficult of precise control, and often the paired objectives are not evenly illuminated. The Greenough lamp is designed to rest on the table beneath the microscope stage in place of the mirror, and an evenly illuminated field results. The lamp housing consists of a solid finned casting and provision is made for centring the filament. Complete with 15-watt lamp and diffuser ...
    • = =
    • O
    • N.B.—Please specify voltage when ordering. The Vril lamp cannot be used on direct current.
    • PI 3
    • HI 8 06 |O|
    • 2 88 So 8 SH H
    • 5
    • 8008
    • gonoong
    • Sox 8 sms 8093 IE = SHS S J § 80 8 7 8 12
    • a QI
    • Saw
  • n.n. - vue 14/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 211
    • LAM PS-ELECTRIC
    • “PROJECTOR”
    • SERVICE
    • u 0 >
    • Q Wu 0)
    • 2101
    • 2102
    • 2104
    • “VRIL
    • UNIVERSAL
    • 2108
    • WELCH
    • GREENOUGH
    • 2107
    • 21012
    • %
    • 2103 1
    • WATSON
    • LONDON 1
    • WATSON, LONDO
    • ^/7/^/7^/^^/7/7/77//7/777/7/7/7/^/7/^^ wh ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.", f 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
    • &ysyyysysssyssAS7Zzszsssssss/sz/z/zssszs/zssszszzzsssszssszs/zzz^^^ 3I ^M^^^^^yw^M^M^M^M^^^^^^^^^^^^- X
  • n.n. - vue 15/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 212
    • LAMPS-ELECTRIC
    • For PHOTOMICROGRAPHY, PROJECTION, Etc.
    • Code Word, No.
    • Sabor 2121
    • RESEARCH LAMP
    • £ s.
    • Sarob Sarox Saraw Saray Saraz
    • 2122
    • 2123
    • 2124
    • 2125
    • 2126
    • The illustration shows a form of mounting which has found considerable acceptance among microscopists who appreciate the importance of having the fullest control of their illuminant and wish to avail themselves of the full potentialities of their optical equipment. Mounted upon a solid pillar the optical bench limb can be inclined to any convenient angle. The Lamp in its housing is fixed at the upper end while the condenser, with its centring mounting, iris diaphragm may be accurately focussed by means of the rack and pinion. Filter carrier can be mounted on mirror tail piece.
    • Research Lamp, housing suitable for Pointolite, Ribbon filament or pearlite bulb having heavy base with rigid pillar, optical bench with rack work condenser fitting. Condenser fitting with centring screws.. ... ... ... ... ... add Lamp Condenser, Nelson pattern, optical part suitably mounted with iris, add * ,, ,, Macro ,, ,, ,, ,, ... ... add * ,, ,, Watson-Conrady , ,, ,, ... ... add Double filter carrier for filters 2" x 2" ... ... ... ... ... ... add
    • 12 0
    • 2 5
    • 2 5
    • 4 5
    • 6 10
    • 1 15
    • 0 0
    • 0
    • 0 0
    • 0
    • N.B.—These Condensers being Achromatic as well as Aplanatic are particularly recommended for use with Apochromatic or Fluorite Objectives and for Photomicrography.
    • POINTOLITE BULBS AND RESISTANCES
    • The starting device employed with this lamp necessitates the purchase of the special resistance quoted with the bulbs. The advantages of the Pointolite are : — a point source of light—steady illumination—concentration—relative freedom from heat.
    • Sangu Sanil
    • Sanca Sanig Sause Sapid Santo Sapon
    • Sarab Sarca
    • 2127
    • 2128
    • 2129
    • 21210
    • 21211
    • 21212
    • 21213
    • 21214
    • 21215
    • 21216
    • For Direct Current:—2 electrode type.
    • 30 c.p. Ionising current 4-5 amps, consumption, 0-45 amps., bulb only ... ... 1 10
    • 100 c.p. , 1 7 ,, ,, 1-35 ,, „ ........ 1 10
    • Resistances
    • For use with 30 c.p. lamp ) State voltage when ordering ... ... ... ... (3 12
    • ,, ,, 100 c.p. ,, J 3 electrode type. 312
    • 500 c.p. Ionising current 7 amps, consumption 0*6 watt c.p. bulb only ... ... 2 10
    • 1000 c.p. „ e „ 7 amps. „ 0-5 „ ,, ... „ ... 3 10
    • Resistances for use with 500 c.p. lamps. Low voltage £9 10 0 4022b high voltage 12 10
    • „ » 1000 c.p. „ „ £13 10 0 402 3b „14 15
    • For Alternating Current, 150 c.p. type only manufactured.
    • 150 c.p. ionising current 7 amps., consumption 2 amps., bulb only ... ... 1 10
    • Resistance for use with the above ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 4
    • Extras, reflectors, clips, holders etc. if required supplied at catalogue prices.
    • 0 0
    • 0 0
    • 0 0
    • 0 0
    • 0 0
    • Phase
    • 21217
    • Phela Phiat Phono Piano
    • 21218
    • 21219
    • 21220
    • 21221
    • ARGUS ARC LAMP
    • Specially designed for ultramicroscopy, photomicrography and projection or any work where a particularly intense or richly actinic light source is required. The carbons are mounted at right angles, the lamp consumes only 8 amps. Independent carbon feed. Simple and compact mounting. With hood, condensing lens, pillar and massive base
    • Extra for clockwork automatic drive to carbons
    • Resistance for Argus Arc lamp, 100 v.
    • , ,, ,, ,, 200 —250 v. ...
    • Carbons for Arc Lamp, 25 cms.
    • 4 10 0
    • 40 0
    • 1 10 0
    • 1 10 0
    • 0 10 0
    • Sano
    • Sanig Sanag Sanag
    • 21222
    • 21223
    • 21224
    • 21225
    • RIBBON FILAMENT LAMP for Alternating Current only Provides an intense, defined, textureless and steady source of light. Critical illumination as from the lamp flame edge is obtainable. The filament is an actual ribbon of tungsten.
    • Price for bulb only 6 v. 18 amps. (This bulb can be mounted in the housing of the Universal, Welch or Research lamps) ...
    • Transformer for use with the ribbon filament lamp, specify voltage
    • 6v. 9 amps bulb, as foregoing
    • Transformer for above
    • 1 10 0
    • 3 0 0
    • 10 0
    • 2 15 0
    • Sabil
    • Sabix
    • SUPPLEMENTAL PRECISION MOUNTING
    • In Photomicrography the need of a mounting providing mechanical means for adjusting the lamp for height and centring the source of light accurately to the optical system is often felt. This mounting fulfils all requirements.
    • The pillar is exceedingly rigid and mounted thereon is a wide rack. Centring arrangements are spring loaded and give an immediate and positive response both vertically and horizontally.
    • N.B.—When mounted in conjunction with an arc lamp this mounting is perfection both for Projection and Photomicrography.
    • 21226 Precision Mounting as figured to accommodate any lamp hood or lamp mounting, including solid base or 45° saddle for triangular bar ... ... ... ... 15 10 0
    • 21227 If supplied without base or saddle for triangular bar ... ... ... ... 14 5 0
    • y/7^^/7/^//77/7/7/77^yjy/7/7//7/7A//7/7/7/7/>'^^^^^
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
    • ^ZZZZZZZZZZZ/zZ/ZZZZ/ZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZzZ
    • SNA 80 8 2 0 PI pl 0 S S ch § Sen § Soos
  • n.n. - vue 16/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 213
    • LAM PS-ELECTRIC
    • RESEARCH LAMP
    • ARGUS ARC LAMP
    • 21217
    • POINTOLITE BULBS
    • 2121
    • PRECISION MOUNTING
    • Lamp, Type “ B
    • 21215
    • 21226
    • A.C. Lamp, 150 c.p
    • ^Z/Z/ZZ///////ZZZ///ZZ/ZZZ/ZZZZ4'ZZ//Z</Z//ZZZ/Z/Z//ZZZ/ZZZZ/ZzzzzzzzzzzzzZZZZZZzzzZZZZZ^ 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • 7////////////////////////////////^ ‘47/2470072/770000000007000070080007080400
    • FOya toiswA .
    • AC -
    • A 59
    • V
    • Lamp, Type “A”
  • n.n. - vue 17/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 214
    • LAMPS
    • LAMPS—OIL
    • Code Word. No.
    • Pigme 2141
    • Pilfy 2142
    • Pinoe 2143
    • Pirag 2144
    • Pishi 2145
    • Pilot 2146
    • Pitel 2147
    • PRICES
    • Premier. Highest-class microscope lamp with rack-work and screw movements fitted to the upright bar in vertical and horizontal directions by which means the light can be exactly adjusted. Large solid brass foot, brass container, rotating burner so that the flat or edge of the flame may be used. With metal chimney for 3x1^ in. slips...
    • Nelson Aplanatic Bull’s Eye Condenser, mounted on arm attached to oil container with sliding focussing adjustment, etc.
    • extra
    • Mahogany Case for lamp, with handle, lock and key ...
    • Standard. It has a flat glass reservoir, which allows of the light being brought close to the table. The lamp itself may be securely fixed at any height on the upright bar, which latter being square, prevents it from swinging round. A metal chimney, taking 3 x 1^ slips, is provided. This lamp will burn for 10 hours. With supply of blue and white slips
    • This Lamp can be used as an illuminant for Photo-Micrography, providing a suitable time for exposure is given.
    • Ditto, ditto, fitted with Nelson’s Aplanatic Bull’s-Eye Condenser. This is mounted in the manner illustrated, Fig. 2145, and fits the bar of the lamp stand ; means of focussing are provided.
    • Iris diaphragm fitted to Bull’s-Eye 2145 ... ......
    • Case for No. 2144
    • £ s. d.
    • 10 10 0
    • 2 10 0
    • IIO 0
    • IIO 0
    • 1 5 0
    • 1 0 0
    • Premier,
    • 2145
    • Standard, 2144
    • son's
    • ^W////////////////////Z/////Z//////////////////Z//////////Zw^^
    • f 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • %eez, VzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz%czzzzzzzzz/zz4
    • ( W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. [
  • n.n. - vue 18/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • MERCURY VAPOUR LAMP
    • 215
    • THE MERCURY VAPOUR LAMP
    • 1
    • FIG. 1.
    • For
    • MICROSCOPE WORK,
    • MEDICO LEGAL PURPOSES,
    • COMPARATOR WORK,
    • Etc., Etc.
    • Mercury Vapour Lamp with fused quartz tube, which provides an absolutely steady monochromatic light of high intrinsic brilliancy for general microscopical observations, photomicrography, and visual work of all kinds.
    • Mr. Barnard has for years employed this type of lamp for his most exacting researches and dark ground illumination. When mounted upon a board with fixed prism the ideal outfit for rapid diagnosis by dark ground illumination is available.
    • Its intrinsic intensity and monochromatic light makes it ideal for the Photomicrographer who can utilise his screens under theoretically perfect conditions.
    • The M.V. Lamp also provides a very rich source of Ultra-Violet radiation for research work in the invisible region of the Spectrum.
    • Its salient features are :—
    • 1. The fused quartz burner is not exhausted but is at all times freely vented to the atmosphere.
    • 2. No mechanical devices are required for starting the arc.
    • 3. When the lamp is not in operation, the quartz burner tube is completely filled with mercury, and may be transported from place to place without any risk of damage to the burner through hammer action of the mercury contents.
    • 4. The life of the lamp is practically unlimited. The burner can be lowered, raised or rotated on a vertical rod, fixed to a heavy tripod base. It can also be tilted. The metal housing carries a condenser tube and iris diaphragm in the front. A small silvered mirror fitted above an aperture in the roof of the housing enables both vertical and horizontal beams to be employed.
    • The K.B.B. Lamp may be operated off any current supply, provided a series resistance is used to suit the existing voltage.
    • Code Word. Seaba No. £ s. d. 2151 K.B.B. mercury-vapour lamp, direct current, with triangular base, upright pillar, clamp, metal casing and curtain, iris diaphragm ... 20 0 0
    • Seadi Seafo Scarp Seaco 2152 Resistance for 100/150 volts... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 19 3 2153 Resistance for 150/250 volts... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 2 0 2154 Glass Screen to reduce light intensity ... ... ... ... ... 0 10 6 2155 K.B.B. Mercury Arc Illuminant, with transformer for alternating current, with three electrode evacuated type A.C. quartz burner, resistances, etc. 35 0 0
    • y//7///y/7/^/7//7/7/7///////7^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. s ^///7/7///7/7/7///7/7/////^/^/^^^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C
  • n.n. - vue 19/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 216
    • CONDENSERS—STAND OR BULL’S EYE
    • CON DENSERS—STAN D
    • THE WATSON-CON RADY ACHROMATISED APLANAT
    • This is the most perfect combination for every form of work where a condenser is employed. Achromatised and Aplanatised it ensures a solid and colour-free beam reaching the microscope condenser, enabling both that and the objective to develop their capabilities under ideal conditions. Photomicrographi-cally it ensures images free from colour fringes and reduction in exposure. It utilises all rays from the illuminant and is specially suitable for use with modern small light sources.
    • Code Word, No.
    • Perfi 2161
    • Perke 2162
    • £ s. d.
    • Mounted on massive stand with extensible pillar, centring screws and Iris diaphragm. Similar to illustration No. 2165 ... ... ... ... 9 10 0
    • Mounted as No. 2169 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 6 5 0
    • APLANATIC-NELSON FORMULA
    • The computation of this lens system provides a brilliant and even circle of light with a minimum of spherical aberration. It is a great improvement upon the ordinary Bull’s Eye Condenser and should be preferred wherever possible.
    • Code Word. Pence No. 2163
    • Pends 2164
    • Peony 2165
    • Perdi 2166
    • £ s. d.
    • Aplanatic Condenser, mounted as No. 2169 ... ... ... ... 2 0 0
    • With Iris Diaphragm ... ... ... ... ... ... ... extra 1 5 0
    • Ditto, mounted on upright heavy stand (as figured) with lengthening bar and clamp screws, lenses fitting in ring having centring screws, and clamp screw to fix centring, specially arranged for photography, projection, etc. 4 0 0
    • Ditto, ditto, with Iris Diaphragm. This is a most important addition, and enables a clear and evenly illuminated disc to be obtained when photographing, etc. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 550
    • THE SCOP LONG FOCUS CONDENSER
    • Fitted with a lens 23 in. diameter, it is of value for use in Photomicrography, and where a vertical illuminator is employed. An Iris diaphragm is included to control the diameter of the emergent beam. Latitude for adjustment is provided by a sliding motion horizontally, extensible pillar vertically, both with clamps. Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Pegif 2167 As illustrated ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 15 0
    • The Scop Long Focus Condenser with Mechanical Adjustments provides rapid and precise adjustments to facilitate the most perfect performance of the vertical illuminator. Adjustment for height is extensive and precise and is effected by rack and pinion. Horizontal movement is controlled by screw motion. A substantial tripod foot ensures great stability.
    • Code Word. Philo No. 2168 As illustrated £ 8 S. 10 d. 0
    • STANDARD PATTERN STAND CONDENSER
    • Pelvis 2169 With upright lengthening pillar and ball and socket motions, large size, as illustrated 1 7 6
    • Penat 21610 Ditto, medium size I 2 6
    • Penal 21611 Ditto, small size 0 16 6
    • LENS FOR UNIVERSAL STAND
    • Penba 21612 Lens 2 in. diameter with stem to fit socket of Universal Stand 2182, shown on page 218 0 15 0
    • Penno 21613 Extra for Iris Diaphragm 1 5 0
    • : W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • Lzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz2
    • SPA § % 8 86 IE lol g 0 8 2 § 2| a
    • X • « 0
  • n.n. - vue 20/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CONDENSERS—STAND OR BULL’S EYE
    • 217
    • 2165
    • 2169
    • 2167
    • 2168
    • : W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. s '^^^/^/•^//77/7//7/7^/7^^/7/y/^^/^/7//7^/7/^
    • 3 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. | ^/7/77///7//^/////W7//^/^/7////7/^^^^
    • I 111
    • U
    • e
  • n.n. - vue 21/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 218
    • Code Word.
    • Payif
    • No.
    • 2181
    • CONDENSERS, STAGE, ETC.
    • CONDENSERS
    • SILVER PARABOLIC SIDE REFLECTOR
    • PRICES
    • CO
    • For the examination of Opaque Specimens, metallurgical etc., with objectives up to 1 in. (25 mm.) illumination exterior to the objective is advantageous. This reflector can be mounted to fit to the microscope stage in place of a stage spring, the microscope limb or between the objective and nosepeice end of the body. The light is concentrated upon the area to be examined and can be arranged to show in relief details lost when a vertical illuminator is employed. A ball and socket joint is fitted to all forms of mounting
    • 10 0
    • UNIVERSAL CONDENSER STAND
    • To carry Condensers, Lens-Prism and Light Filters.
    • The usual form of condenser mounting necessitates its interposition between the radiant and mirror. The Universal condenser stand allows the lens, prism or filter only to project into the path of light. It can be used with microscopes at all angles from vertical to horizontal, for illuminating objects on the stage, etc. Further, being standardised, alternative fittings can be interchanged as required.
    • 2182
    • Pelem
    • Stand only
    • s. d.
    • 5 0
    • 2183
    • Code Word. Peamb
    • and 2182
    • No.
    • 2183
    • LENS-PRISM
    • A reflecting lens-prism for the illumination of opaque objects. The prism is mounted to fit the Universal Stand as shown.
    • 2182 and 21612
    • £ s.
    • d.
    • Prism only
    • 0 15 0
    • ^/////////////////////////////^
    • t W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • ^///////////y/Zy^^/^^^r^^^X^/^^^X^^///^^^^^^^^^///////^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • ^///////////////////////////////////////////^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 22/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • CONDENSERS—VERTICAL ILLUMINATORS
    • 219
    • VERTICAL ILLUMINATORS
    • By means of these, opaque objects adherent to the cover-glass, uncovered, in water or other media, provided the objective is immersed therein, may be examined with the highest powers. It is essential for the microscopical examination of metal surfaces, or any opaque material when truly axial light is required to yield an image free from diffraction and where the resolving power of the objective must be developed.
    • The Vertical Illuminator is attached to the lower end of the Microscope body and receives the objective. A concentrated beam of light is directed from the illuminant by means of a condenser, through an aperture in the side of the Illuminator, and falls upon a reflector inside. In one form this reflector consists of a disc of thin glass and in the other of a prism. By means of the reflector the light is thrown downwards through the objective to the specimen, thus illuminating it, the objective acting as its own condenser. The lamp condenser must be so arranged to provide a beam of light as from a light source 10 in. distant to yield the best results. The specimen is then viewed through the eyepiece and objective in the ordinary way. Some form of diaphragm, iris or disc, is advantageous to control the diameter of the entrant beam.
    • Note.—Some workers are more successful with the prism Vertical Illuminator than with the cover-glass disc pattern, and vice versa. It will, however, be generally found that both kinds have their distinctive advantages. For a complete equipment, therefore, both are desirable.
    • PRICES
    • For class work and general purposes.
    • o
    • 2191
    • 2193
    • Code Word. No. £ s.
    • Perti 2191 Cover-glass Reflector, as figured 15
    • Perus 2192 Do., with metal diaphragm to aperture 1 6
    • Pesto 2193 Prism pattern, as figured 1 14
    • Petal 2194 Do., with Iris diaphragm 2 5
    • o
    • For Photomicrography with low powers.
    • 2195
    • Code Word. No.
    • Petys 2195
    • Pewle 2196 With Iris diaphragm
    • This improved cover-glass pattern was designed by Dr. Johnstone Stoney, to enable the large back lenses of certain objectives of wide aperture or long focus to be filled with light. The reflector is larger than in other patterns, and fills the largest back lens of objectives in general use. A large body tube is essential with this illuminator. £ s. d.
    • Without Iris diaphragm ... ... 2 0 0
    • ..................................... 2 10 6
    • Phalo 2197 The Iris diaphragm of No. 2196 may be mounted with eccentric adjustment at an extra cost of
    • 0 10 0
    • 8 IRI
    • 2 IP 89 8 08
    • 2 8 Sons 5 4 5 Soonnood
    • "*"********** pvoor*******
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 3
  • n.n. - vue 23/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 220
    • ILLUMINATOR
    • THE WATSON-CONRADY
    • CONDENSER VERTICAL ILLUMINATOR (Patent)
    • For the most exacting Research and for daily routine work.
    • B
    • COMDENSERMIATICAL:
    • "London, 215
    • Three outstanding disabilities have to be overcome by all users of Vertical illumination or illumination by reflected light :—Glare—accurate centration and focussing of the light source— need for complete rearrangement of the illuminating train if coarse or fine adjustments of the microscope are used.
    • These problems were satisfactorily solved for the first time by the introduction of the Watson-Conrady Vertical Illuminator which is not only the original of these vertical illuminator units but the best, and is in use throughout the world. It offers facilities to be found in combination in no other self-contained unit.
    • Incorporating the lamp, optical system, reflector and iris diaphragms it is possible :—•
    • To bring the illumination under the same complete control which is obtained with transparent objects and the best substage apparatus and to obtain the maximum illumination from a small source of light.
    • To simplify and render certain the correct placing of the illuminant, whether it be supplied as a fixed portion of the illuminator or separate.
    • For general purposes a small 3-5 volt, 6 volt or 12 volt electric lamp may be fixed in a suitable position at the end of the condenser system, and when work is to be done, it is only necessary to switch on the current from the battery or main current supply (if a resistance is employed) and a satisfactory result is at once obtained. With this illumination can be obtained not only sufficient for visual but also for photographic purposes or can be used in conjunction with arc or other lamp if preferred. Metallurgical work to be done on an ordinary Microscope, for—when once attached to the body tube—when the body is focussed, the whole of the Vertical Illuminator and its Lamp is carried with it.
    • The apparatus is used in the following manner :—
    • The illuminator is attached to the nosepiece of the microscope, the objective is screwed into it and approximately focussed on the polished metal object. The light is switched on, and the illumination is then regulated by the inner Iris Diaphragm so as to cover the extent of the object actually under observation. This eliminates a large amount of stray light, and consequent gain in the contrast in the image is obtained. The Iris Diaphragm nearest the illuminant is then used in precisely the same manner as that of the ordinary substage condenser, and by its means the cone of illumination is adjusted to give the best effect.
    • If an independent illuminant is used, it should be set about 14 inches from the outer end of the tube. Any small source of light can be used, such as the edge of an oil lamp flame or small incandescent lamp, or if a very brilliant illumination is required for projection, etc., a small arc lamp should be used, such as our " Argus ” model, or a ribbon filament lamp suitably mounted.
    • 's''sss'yr/’ss'wr/x/’ss/>7/s/7/7/7rs7s/s^^ «ns
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • ONRrg 8 2
    • IP 89 8 08 2
    • 8
    • Sons
    • IO 1
    • 2
    • 10 SH MI 5 Sowows
  • n.n. - vue 24/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • COMBINED VERTICAL ILLUMINATOR
    • 221
    • THE WATSON-CON RADY
    • CONDENSER VERTICAL ILLUMINATOR—Continued
    • Code Word. No.
    • Perme 2211
    • Perni 2212
    • Perys 2213
    • Merge 2214
    • Mergi 2215
    • Malba 2217
    • PRICES £s. d.
    • Condenser Vertical Illuminator with disc reflector and adjustment without Lamp ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 6 0 0
    • Do. do. with 3-5 Volt Lamp fixed to Condenser tube with one yard silk-covered wire ... 6 5 0
    • 4 Volt Accumulator for 3-5 Volt Lamp, with switch, in case ... ... 15 0 Resistances for use when main house current is employed
    • 100-125 volts I 7 6
    • 200-250 volts • I 17 6
    • 3
    • COMBINED VERTICAL ILLUMINATOR
    • 2217
    • 6
    • TOP
    • 2216
    • Code Word. No.
    • Phamo 2216
    • PRICE, Complete £ s. d.
    • Metallurgists usually find in their microscopical work that for some purposes they need a Prism reflector, and for other purposes a Disc reflector pattern is better. To obviate the necessity of having two separate pieces of apparatus we have devised a holder into which the Prism Carrier " A ” or the Glass Reflector “ B ” can be set, as required. When in position, rotation within necessary limits can be effected, and adjustments for centrality can be made by means of a screw acting on a wedge. Mounted on the side of the apparatus is an Iris Diaphragm “ C,” and a small Condenser lens " D.” Either of these can be removed when desired. This combination arrangement will be found highly convenient, saving time, expense and superfluous fittings ... 3 10 0
    • SUBSTAGE MACROGRAPH
    • Designed originally by Prof. Tulloch as a part of the microscope substage for typing bacterial colonies by means of the surface reflections, it has been mounted to permit its universal use for the illumination of specimens on the stage or at table level.
    • The small electric bulbs ensure shadowless illumination of the specimen and sufficient brilliancy for photography with either low power microscope objectives and eyepieces or photo micrographic lenses.
    • This accessory fills the long acknowledged need for a method of bridging the gap between the vertical and other illuminations and prism top lighting systems for photography.
    • If used in combination with a Greenough or Substage lamp much valuable detail, both internal and external, can be successfully and easily recorded
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • 3 10 0
  • n.n. - vue 25/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 222
    • RHEINBERG’S COLOUR DISCS
    • For optically differentiating in colour, structures, organisms, etc. Can be employed with Objectives having apertures up to 0-45. Designed expressly for use with the Abbe illuminator. Unstained objects can be shown in colour contrast with the background.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Pitye 2222 Set of coloured Gelatine Discs, to fit the Stop Carrier of Abbe Illuminator per dozen pairs 0 2 6
    • STAND FOR LIGHT-FILTERS
    • The holder carries 2 filters 2x2 in., and fits on the socket of the arm on the Univeral Condenser Stand. Adjustable for any height and inclination in the path of light rays.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Phusi 2223 Holder as described, to fit Universal Stand 10 0
    • Pelem 2224 Universal Stand to carry light-filters, Amici
    • prism, condenser, etc. ... ... ... 15 0
    • See p. 218.
    • WRATTEN “ M ” FILTERS
    • Pelum 2227 For Photomicrography and Visual Work. Special booklet dealing £ s. d. with the use of these filters in Photomicrography ... ... ... 0 5 0
    • STAINLESS STEEL MIRRORS for MICROSCOPES
    • The necessity for a Mirror giving one reflection only of the lamp flame has long been recognised, and in special cases parallel worked mirrors have been supplied, as well as, in some cases, mirrors with surface silvering. These, however, have had obvious disadvantages. Stainless Steel is well known in connection with cutlery ; it is non-corrosive, takes a very high polish and can be worked perfectly plane.
    • After extended experiments, we have produced Stainless Steel Mirrors with a perfectly flat su rface and suited in every way for microscopical work.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Pound 2225 Made in one size only, 50 mm. diameter (about 2 inches) ... each 0 15 0
    • PRISM REFLECTOR
    • An important difficulty connected with the stainless steel mirror is that of % reflection. There is a maximum reflective power after 3-4 months use of about 60% and this remains reasonably constant for considerable periods.
    • Where the maximum brilliance is essential a 45° Prism will be found the ideal solution. Not only is there a single reflection but little light is lost by absorption and if correctly mounted upon the mirror stand the beam must be transmitted along the optic axis of the instrument.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Pouvu 2226 2" square face 45° prism unmounted
    • £ s. d.
    • 2 10 0
    • Cost of mounting depends upon work necessary and will be quoted separately.
    • greng
    • Pi | 1H|
    • O k!
    • 1 co 1
    • Mw>
    • ^//z//zzz/z/z///z<zz/zzzzwzzz <z ^^^^^^^^^^/7^^/7^/^^7///^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • <7////////////////////////////////////A///////^^
  • n.n. - vue 26/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • LIGHT-FILTERS
    • 223
    • LIGHT-FILTERS
    • Among the advantages obtained by the use of light-filters in photomicrography may be mentioned the following : Contrast, adaptation to plate-sensitivity, resolving power, maximum distinctness with non-apochromatic objectives.
    • Light-filters may consist of coloured glass plates, coloured liquids in glass troughs, coloured gelatine films, or any of these in combination. When consisting of coloured glass or of coloured gelatine film (mounted or plain) they are usually in squares 2x2 in., or in circles to fit the substage mount.
    • CHANCE-WATSON LIGHT-FILTERS
    • The use of coloured glass light-filters is essential for those who use radiants or high intensity. They are utilised to diminish brilliancy, reduce heat, accentuate structure of stained specimens. Coloured glasses are also more permanent in tint than stained gelatine. The present series of light filters has been carefully selected for colour by spectrophotometric methods. The glass is coloured evenly throughout, and is known as " pot metal” to distinguish it from the so-called “flashed” glass. This excellent series of coloured glasses has been made by the eminent and old-established firm of Chance Brothers & Co. Ltd. The selected material is cut, polished and edged in our own works.
    • The Chance-Watson glass light-filters are as follows : —
    • 2 Red
    • 3 Deep orange
    • 4 Orange
    • 5 Green
    • 6 Blue-green
    • 7 Blue
    • 8 Purple
    • 9 Daylight
    • 10 Neutral
    • 11 Yellow
    • In ordering, the colour should be mentioned as well as the number.
    • Special quotations will be submitted for any selected transmission in the foregoing colours, also for any size of plate.
    • CU
    • Density.
    • 2
    • No
    • 6
    • an
    • 6
    • N
    • Cu
    • 6
    • 5
    • N.B.The
    • orange filter will be found exceptionally successful in photography on misty subjects, and does not affect the performance of any well-corrected photographic lens.
    • ge V/iy/7,yX/7/7/7//7/^/^//7^//^///7/7/^/^/7/7/7/^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 i^/^^^/’X7/7/7^/777^/^/y//77^/^/777^/77/77//77^^/7/7/////7^'Af/7^y/7MMi
    • Jf'zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz zzzzZzzzzxzzz/Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz 74 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. , ^ZZ/ZZZ/ZZ/Z//////Z/ZZZZ/ZZZ//Z/ZZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZ//ZZ//XZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZzZ
  • n.n. - vue 27/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 224
    • L IGHT-FI LTE RS
    • The diagrams represent the absorption of light of different wavelengths by each of the light-filters in terms o • density for a thickness of 2 mm.
    • Density =log. opa city—log. transparency ; thus density 2 represents a transparency of 1 per cent.
    • Code Word, No. PRICE £ S. d.
    • Batail 2241 Special stand to hold one or two 2-in. square filters ... ... ... each 2 10 0
    • Shako 2242 Chance-Watson light-filter, in circles of 13 in. dia., to fit substage ring ...... 0 2 6
    • Shall 2243 Ditto optically worked 0 4 6
    • Shaft 2244 In squares, 2x2 in. 0 3 0
    • Shagi 2245 Ditto, optically worked 0 5 0
    • Shame 2246 In squares, 4x4 in. 0 10 0
    • Shalt 2247 Ditto, optically worked 0 15 0
    • ILFORD “ MICRO " LIGHT-FILTERS
    • A set of nine light-filters made by the Ilford Company offers advantages in adaptability. Beside the use of each light-filter singly, seven useful combinations may be made to obtain a wide or narrow band in any desired region of the spectrum. The light-filters are of coloured gelatine sealed between polished plates of glass. These light-filters are numbered 1 to 9. No. 8 is the " Alpha,” which is generally useful for the correction of Ilford panchromatic plates.
    • Ilford light-filters for photomicrography are supplied as 2 x 2 in. squares, or in circular form to fit the swing-out rings of substage condensers.
    • Code Word. No. PRICE £ s. d.
    • Beper 2248 Ilford " Micro ” light-filters, square, 2x2 in. ... ...... each 0 5 6
    • Bepit 2249 Set of nine 2 4 7
    • Bepos 22410 Ilford " Micro” light-filters, 13 in. circles, for condenser-ring each 0 3 0
    • Bepuz 22411 Set of nine 1 4 4
    • For the utilisation of one only, the lines in the spectrum of the mercury-vapour lamp : —
    • Berba 22412 Square, 2x2 in., transmitting only Hg. green line ... 0 5 6
    • Beree 22413 Ditto, for Hg, blue 0 5 6
    • Berek 22414 Ditto, for Hg. violet 0 5 6
    • cO
    • + ‘07 O %’ to to ou to cO
    • +
    • 1
    • 1
    • 1 *
    • 1 1
    • a al
    • a F
    • 4
    • I E
    • E Id 14
    • qeeeeeeeeeeeececceeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeceecovgeeeeecegepezeeceeeeeeeereeeeeyepeoreyy*g
    • /z/yzzzzzzzz//z/zzz//zz/z///z///z//z//zzzz/////z///z/zzzz/zz/zz/zz/z//zzzzzzz///z/zz/zzzz 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. , 47ZZZ/Z<Z/Z'Z<'ZZZZ/Z4ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/z • * *
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. I ^/Z//Z/////////ZZZZZZZ/Z/Z/Z//////ZZ/Z///ZZ/ZZ/ZZ//ZZZZ/ZZZZ//ZZZZ///ZZ//Z//ZZ/ZZ//ZZZz2
  • n.n. - vue 28/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 225
    • CAMERA LUCIDAS
    • Watson-Abbe. No. 2251
    • Beale’s. No. 2252
    • WATSON-ABBE CAMERA LUCIDA
    • The Abbe drawing apparatus is probably known better than any other. The user observes through the microscope in the usual way except for the interposition of a reflecting device above the eyepiece. By means of this, and a mirror held above the drawing paper, the drawing and object are seen simultaneously and can be made apparently coincident by focussing. Thus a pencil point on the paper may be made to trace the outlines of the object without any special skill in drawing.
    • The original Abbe apparatus was somewhat troublesome to adjust and difficult to use with any but eyepieces of low power. The Watson-Abbe Camera Lucida is entirely free from such objections, which it avoids by the use of a special reflecting prism.
    • The apparatus may be kept on the microscope if desired, the reflecting prism being swung aside for ordinary observation or the changing of eyepieces.
    • Success in using this apparatus depends upon the relative brightness of microscope image and drawing This is best adjusted by subduing the illuminating rays by means of neutral-tinted glasses and not by shades camera lucida.
    • paper, on the
    • Code Word. No.
    • Patex 2251 Watson-Abbe Camera Lucida, in case
    • £ s. d.
    • 4 5 0
    • Pause
    • BEALE’S
    • 2252 Beale’s neutral-tint Reflector, as figured
    • 0 7
    • E E
    • 2253
    • 2254
    • Pavel
    • DRAWING EYEPIECE.
    • 2253 This is a combined Eyepiece and Camera Lucida, for use when the Microscope is inclined at an angle of 45°. The drawing paper and pencil point are reflected into the field by the prism attached to the Eye Lens, and tracings can be made with great precision, comfort and rapidity.
    • With tinted glasses to regulate light, complete ... ... ... ... ... 2 0
    • The Eyepiece with the above Camera Lucida fits the Student’s size. If required of larger size, an adapter is supplied at an extra cost of ... ... ... ... ... 0 7
    • 0
    • 0
    • Pawns
    • Pazuc
    • 2254
    • 2256
    • DRAWING TABLE
    • Inclines to any angle, thus obviating distortion of image. Size of table, 19 x 12 inches, as figured, and of best make ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 15.0
    • Dr. Caiman’s pattern, of fixed height with inclining top, very rigid ... ... ... 10 0
    • PROJECTION AND DRAWING PRISM
    • The most accurate method of drawing a microscopic object is to project its image upon paper and to trace its outlines direct. This is done by placing the microscope with its axis horizontal and attaching the Watson Projecting Drawing Prism over the eyepiece. The image is reflected downwards to a sheet of paper on the bench. A fairly intense illuminant is advantageous and the image should be shielded from other lights. This method can also be used for projection over short distances in teaching.
    • CodeWord. No. £ s. d-
    • Paz'on 2257 Projection Drawing Prism to attach to draw-tube ... ... ... *** ... 2 0 0
    • ^^/^7Z^/7//7/7^/77^/^//7/7///%^7^^^
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • ^/r^/y^/r/^/y/r/y/r/r/z/rrA^^^
    • KX/PAMAPAAAKAPeeceececcececececcecencencececee, 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I ^/y/y/y/y/^/^/^/^/r/rr^/y/y^^^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 29/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 226
    • LIFE-CELLS, ETC.
    • LIFE CELLS, ETC.
    • REVERSIBLE COMPRESSOR
    • Code Word'
    • Pivot
    • No.
    • 2261
    • PRICE £ s. d.
    • The two parallel plates are separated mechanically by means of a screw pushing in a block, thus accommodating the pressure for any thickness of object. The plates on each side are cover glasses, easily replaced when broken. With this form the specimen may be examined from either side. Made of aluminium throughout. With covers 2 2 0
    • ROUSSELET’S COMPRESSOR
    • B 3536
    • Plaid 2262 The compression is by means of a screw in the drum, and the cover glass having a square top, media may be introduced during examination of specimens. The objective may be used at any point where compression takes place. The arm carrying the cover glass can be turned completely aside for cleaning or replacing covers, and is held centrally by a spring catch. We have introduced a special improvement with two screws, instead of cement to hold the cover glass ............................................. ... ... ... ... ... 017 6
    • The central glass tablet is sufficiently thin to allow its use in combination with any substage condenser having a working distance of 1 mm.
    • ROUSSELET’S LIVE BOX
    • Piano 2263 Rousselet’s Live Box for use with Oil immersion dark ground Condenser, Paraboloid, etc. ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 17 6
    • The advantages of this are :—It can be used with the Substage Condenser, Spot Lens, etc. There is sufficient margin between the edge of the glass base disc—on which the object is compressed—and the edge of the cell carrying the cover glass, for the objective to work at any point where compression can take place. For the examination of living ciliated organisms by dark ground or transmitted light illumination this apparatus will be found superior to anything else obtainable, while the sleeve carrying the cover glass has sufficient margin between the edge of the lower tablet and the rim of the cell to use a 1" Objective to the edge.
    • Satob 2261 Extra covers for Live Boxes, sold in dozens only, per doz. ... 0 2 6
    • ///X////////Z////////Z//////Z//Z PPPAXHEXPEHEHRePPRAXERPHARHeePPG:
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ,
    • ^///77^x^7J'^^/^^^^/’7////7^^x^^^^^^/’J'^//////^77/J'x/'^7/^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 30/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • LIFE SLIDES
    • 227
    • LIVE BOXES AND TROUGHS
    • GLASS TROUGHS
    • LIVE BOXES
    • 2271
    • Code Ward. No. PRICES 2274 £ d.
    • Plate 2271 Live Box, large size, best quality ... ... ... ... | 0 0
    • Pligo 2272 Ditto small size ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 6 6
    • Plode 2273 Troughs for Animalcules ; various widths mounted upon slides, 3x1, 1/6 and 3x1| ... ... ... ... ... _ 0 2 6
    • Pluce 2274 Zoophyte Trough, with plate, wedge and spring 0 6 6
    • Plumo 2275 Watch Glasses, flat bottom, per dozen ... ... ... ... ... 0 4 6
    • BOTTERILL’S TROUGH
    • 2273
    • 2276
    • Plyat 2276 This has two plates of vulcanite, held together by three screws, between which are placed two slips of glass separated by an ordinary indiarubber ring. The glass can be readily taken apart and cleaned, and in the event of being broken can at once be replaced ... ... ... ... ... 05 0
    • SIMPLE TYPE MOIST CHAMBERS
    • Shave 2277
    • Shawl 2278
    • Glass Slip 3x1 in., with glass plate cemented on, aperture 10-18 mm., as specified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... each 0 4 6
    • Glass Slip 3x1 in., with cemented glass ring 20 mm. diameter, and having
    • 2 glass tubes to conduct gases or liquids to the object ... ... each 0 10 0
    • EISENBERG CAVITY SLIDE
    • For tissue culture, living bacteria observations, etc., see page 31
    • [ W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. |
    • b777/7^/y^/7/^/7^/7/77^/jy/'7r^/7/7//^
    • ^^ lot hi Pl IOI PI LM M 1P1
  • n.n. - vue 31/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 228
    • GLASS TROUGHS
    • GLASS TROUGHS
    • “ Vitrified " Type
    • Acid Proof Cement
    • For Colour Filter Media, Cooling Troughs, Spectroscopic Purposes, Chemical Reagents, Pond Life, Etc.
    • Workers constantly experience difficulty owing to the fact that, with the exception of the Kingsford type of trough, few cemented troughs remain water-tight for long, and none remain water-tight under all conditions. These new vitrified troughs remain water-tight and whether subjected to the action of heat, powerful acids or any other dissolving agent, these troughs remain intact. This is effected by employing a fusible glass cement and the sides are cemented in the furnace. The plates of glass forming the sides are optically polished, thus the troughs can be used for storing and examining animalcule, pond life, etc, As light-filters they are unequalled as the sides are parallel, so there is no inequality in the quantity of light filtering medium, and owing to the polished sides no seeds or other impurities interfere with the beam from the light source.
    • The method of manufacture causes these troughs to be more expensive than the ordinary cemented type, but if the length of their life is considered they are very cheap.
    • Three sizes are kept permanently in stock, and can be supplied in quantities.
    • Code Word. No. £ d.
    • Shank 2281 Outside measurements, 4 x4 x1 inch 1 7 6
    • Shape 2282 ,, „ 34 x 3 x1 „ 0 17 6
    • Shard 2283 „ , 2 x 2 1 2 99 ••• ••• 0 12 6
    • All sizes and types can be made and supplied to order. Send particulars of requirements and a quotation will be forwarded.
    • HEATING STAGES. Self-regulating Type
    • Designed by Dr. MACLAREN, Anatomy Department, Glasgow University.
    • This heating stage is the most effective of all designs and can be used directly from mains current without the interposition of a resistance. A filament lamp is mounted in circuit, this serves as an indicator of where the current is switched on, no fluid is needed.
    • Designed for temperatures up to 50° C. It is electrically controlled and automatically maintains the temperature constant to within 0-1 degree.
    • It is simple and clean to handle, and can be used directly with voltages of 110 v. or 220 v.
    • £ s. d.
    • 6 10 0
    • L
    • Code Word. No,
    • Share 2284 Price ...
    • Full instructions for use accompany each stage.
    • ^//////////////////////////Zr/zw///^^^^^
    • ) W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • ^^M^^y^/^^/^^^/r/x/////^^^^^^^
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C
  • n.n. - vue 32/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • GLASS TROUGHS
    • 229
    • GLASS TROUGHS
    • CO:
    • 38
    • 59
    • This trough is designed especially for watching the development of Pond Life, and for use as a small Aquarium. It is exceptionally advantageous for light-filter media. The construction is very simple, consisting essentially of an outer circle of brass, drawn together at the top by means of a screw or screws. The brass circle is lined with indiarubber, and with blocks of indiarubber so placed as to keep the glass faces, which are circular, in position. These glass discs are gripped by the indiarubber when the tension on the outer metal band is increased by the tightening of the screws. It is absolutely water-tight.
    • The distinct advantages over all other troughs are that :—
    • By merely releasing the screws, all parts can be taken to pieces and cleaned.
    • Any broken part can be at once replaced.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Poems 2292 Large Table Trough, as figured, with 6 in. solid metal base. In-
    • ternal diameter of Trough, 75 in. mounted in gymbals, with
    • clamp to fix at any desired angle, complete ... ... ... 3 3 0
    • Poets
    • Beema Beelo
    • PHOTOMICROGRAPHY AND PROJECTION
    • 2293 This trough has been designed for mounting upon any saddle of existing photomicrographic or projection apparatus. Made solidly, no risk of breakage arises, the aperture facing the condenser (microscope) is of smaller diameter than the face and no deposit need be feared. In addition a carrier for two filters 2" x 2" is incorporated. The whole is exceedingly compact and efficient. Size 32" dia. State diameter of saddle sleeve when ordering. £ s. d.
    • Price for trough with colourfilter holder ... ... ... ... 3 10 0
    • 2294 Extra for solid table stand ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 15 0
    • 2295 „ saddle—45° type ... ... ... ... ••• I 5 0
    • PHOTOMICROGRAPHS
    • Photomicrographs of macro and microscopic specimens are taken by a photomicrographer of exceptional skill for illustrations, demonstrations, lantern slides, etc.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Stave 2296
    • Stead 2297
    • £ s. d.
    • Magnifications under 500 diameters with one negative and one print ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 010 6
    • Ditto. over ditto ... ... ... ... ... 0 15 0
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • Weecer/e/ee/e/eteer/ece/etteey/c////*?/***//*////////////,///////*//*///******
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • 4ZZ<ZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
  • n.n. - vue 33/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 230
    • MAGNIFIERS
    • MAGNIFIERS—APLANATIC
    • (also known as Platyscopic Lenses.)
    • 2301
    • Flat field, bright and exquisitely crisp image.
    • 2305-8
    • 2301-4
    • Optically these magnifiers consist of three lenses cemented together, as shown in Fig. 2300 They give a large and very flat field, exquisite definition, and good working distance. They all have large apertures, and yield very brilliant images. They are unexcelled both for dissecting purposes and as pocket lenses, and are strongly recommended.
    • The dissecting magnifier mounts are all standard size and can be used on any dissecting microscope by other makers.
    • Magnifying Power Diameter of Visual Field Focal distance from lower surface of Lens to Object No. 2301 x 6 No. 2302 x 10 No. 2303 x 15 No. 2304 x 20
    • 1-4 in. •8 in. •4 in. 25 in.
    • 1-5 in. •9 in. 6 in. •45 in.
    • Three patterns of mounting are supplied for these Magnifiers :—
    • 1. Similar to 2301-4, to fit any of the Dissecting Microscopes and Lens Stands quoted on pages 201 to 203
    • 2. Similar to 2305, in nickelled metal or shell mounting for the pocket.
    • 3. A Combination pocket mount, similar to 2305, to receive either of the Dissecting Mounts, pattern 2301-4, so that the same magnifier may be used either for dissecting or the pocket.
    • In
    • In Combination
    • In Nickelled Mount
    • Code No. Magnifying Dissecting No. Metal No. as describe
    • Word. Poiver. Mounts. Pocket Mount. above.
    • £ s. d. £ s. d. £ s. d.
    • Poice 2301 6 diameters 0 15 0 2305 10 0 2309 15 0
    • Point 2302 10 0 15 0 2306 10 0 23010 15 0
    • Poise 2303 15 0 15 0 2307 10 0 23011 15 0
    • Poila 2304 20 0 15 0 2308 10 0 23012 15 0
    • We are frequently asked to supply pocket mountings with 2 or 3 magnifications.
    • Any combination of 2 magnifications permanently mounted, ... £1 12 6 Chromium plated or nickelled mounts at choice.
    • SPECIAL DOUBLET MAGNIFIER
    • This Magnifier is composed of two Lenses only, but gives very good results. As a useful and cheap Dissecting or Pocket Lens it is much appreciated. Magnification, 8 diameters. Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Pokel 23013 In Dissecting Mount, as figured ... ... ... ... 0 8 0
    • The Magnifier fits the Dissecting Microscopes and the Dissecting Lens Stands, pages 201 to 203,
    • 23013
    • y/’/y^/y/x/y/^/^////^/^/^/^///^//^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • ^^^^/7JW7/7^/7/7^^ WWZ/////////////////^^^^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • ^yryyyyyyy/yyryyyyyy7yy/y//yyy7yy77yyyyy^^
  • n.n. - vue 34/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • MAGNIFIERS 231
    • POCKET MAGNIFIERS
    • 2311
    • 2317
    • 2318
    • Code Word.
    • No.
    • WATSON z SONS
    • Polar 2311 Pocket Magnifier, in folding tortoise-shell mount, of very best quality, three lenses with diaphragm, as figured £ 0 S. 12 d. 6
    • Polem 2312 Ditto, ditto, 2 lenses, 10/0 Ditto 1 lens 0 7 6
    • Polka 2313 Ditto, ditto, in horn or vulcanite, 1 lens 0 1 6
    • Pooli *2314 Ditto, ditto, ,, ,, „ 2 lenses 0 2 3
    • Popae *2315 Ditto, ditto, ,, „ ,, 3 „ 0 3 6
    • Posty 2316 Stand to hold either of the preceding, for dissecting 0 5 0
    • Potch 2317 Watchmakers’ Eye-Glass, as figured 0 1 9
    • Pouri 2318 Pocket Magnifiers, with Horn Cases, in 3 sizes, as figured
    • 27 mm. 2/-, 36 mm. 3/3 40 mm. 0 5 0
    • * Nos. 2314 and 2315 are adopted by many Technical Schools, Botanical Classes, etc., and are eminently
    • suitable for the purpose. They are mounted as 2311.
    • WATSON’S INDUSTRIAL MAGNIFIER
    • Obviates the strain associated with the use of Watchmakers’ Eyeglasses, permits the use of both cyes. Ideal for watch, electric meter, telephone assembly, etc.
    • Consists of two rectangular magnifier lenses 6" x 4". Larger sizes available. Prices on application. Code Word. No. £s.d. Marbe 2319 Pair of lenses only ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 3 0 0
    • Usually supplied in plain wooden frame, can be mounted to suit any desired purpose. Cost of mounting quoted on application. Special quotations for quantities.
    • WATSON’S "SPEERA" BINOCULAR MAGNIFIER
    • MOUNTED in Adjustable Spectacle Frames.
    • “ Speera ” Binocular Magnifiers, mounted as spectacles, have been found exceptionally valuable in numerous and unexpected ways, because when in use, both hands are free to manipulate the object. The range of usefulness is wide, embracing all work that is of a minute or delicate character, such as the examination and dissection of natural history subjects, operations on structures such as the eye, fine machine work, watch repairing, etching, engraving, cinema film exami-
    • nations, etc.
    • They are more convenient and comfortable than other magnifiers because :—
    • I. The lenses are achromatic, and give a sharp flat field.
    • 2. They give a stereoscopic effect.
    • 3. They can be fitted to the face with accuracy and facility.
    • 4. The skeleton nature of the frame enables the wearer to locate ordinary objects without removing the magnifiers.
    • 5. No fatigue in use as prisms to aid convergence are incorporated.
    • “ Speera ” Binocular Magnifiers are made in three powers, the focal lengths being 5 in., 7 in., and 10 in., giving magnifications of 3-5, 2-5, and 1-75 diameters, respectively.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Speea 23110 Price complete in case, with instructions for use ... ... ... ... 2 0 0
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. | “, I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 3
    • ^/77/r/////^r/^//r///7/^/7/7/7/r/7/////7/y^^
  • n.n. - vue 35/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 232
    • MICROMETERS
    • SCREW-MICROMETER EYEPIECE
    • Code Word. No.
    • Pounc 2321 This is constructed almost entirely of aluminium, and is very light in weight. The teeth are cut to 1 mm., and the drum indicates the 1/100 part of each tooth. The reading can therefore be taken to 1/100 part of a millimetre. The fixed web is set a little to the side of the field, as recommended by Dr. Dallinger. Of best and most accurate construction. With Huygenian Eyepiece ... £7 15 0
    • Powdy 2322 Screw-Micrometer Eyepiece, similar design to above, but in brass. The eye lens has sliding focussing adjustments and it is of the utmost precision throughout. It is made for Eyepiece fittings of the Universal size ... ... £5 10 0
    • Screw-Micrometer Eyepiece, 2321
    • -WATSON & SONS.
    • STUDENTS’ MICROMETER
    • EYEPIECE
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Power 2323 Micrometer Eyepiece, for use with Micrometer No.
    • 2324 or 2325, Eyelens mounted on telescopic sliding tubes for focussing micrometer. Without micrometer 0 15 0
    • Eyepiece Micrometer, 2324
    • EYEPIECE MICROMETERS
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Prace 2324 Ruled with scale, as figured, 1 cm. in 100 parts 0 10 0
    • Pragm 2325 Ditto, ditto, in Squares, 1 cm. in 100 parts 0 10 0
    • Prais 2326 Ditto, ditto, the same as No. 2324 or 2325 but mounted to fit large-sized capped Eyepiece (Eyepiece not included) 0 12 6
    • Shear 2327 “ Step ” Eyepiece Micrometer, the simplest and most accurate form of eyepiece micrometer, as illustrated, to fit any eyepiece 0 15 0
    • Sheax 2328 Cross line disc suitable for Petrology, in place of spider lines—diamond ruled on glass, to fit Eye-
    • piece... 0 7 6
    • NOTE.—The values of ' the lines of the Eyepiece Micrometer are ascertained by means the
    • Stage Micrometer and vary with every objective and tube-length. It is not therefore important tvhat the divisions represent, so long as they are equi-distant.
    • Eyepiece Micrometer in squares, 2325
    • •
    • - 0
    • -20
    • E-30
    • STAGE MICROMETERS
    • Code Word. No.
    • Prank 2329
    • Prate 23210
    • Shelf 23211
    • Shelo 23212
    • On 3 x1 slips, Ruled to 1/10 and 1/100 mm. ... On Ditto, ditto, 1/100 and 1/1000 inch Maltwood Finder. The simplest method of recording special positions on specimens retained for further reference
    • Cross lines ruled at centre of 3x1 slide for centering rotating or mechanical stages, etc. ...
    • £ s. d.
    • 0 12 6
    • 0 12 6
    • 0 6 0
    • 05 0
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • 170 (‘80
    • ) 100
    • Step Micrometer
    • 2327
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C
  • n.n. - vue 36/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • MICROTOMES
    • 233
    • 2331 2334 2335
    • W. WATSON & SON
    • Code Word.
    • Prawn
    • No.
    • 2331
    • PRICES
    • Mr. Cole’s Pattern Section-Cutter, as figured. This is a most useful and efficient Section-Cutter, being very solid and rigid in use. The screw for raising the sections is very fine, and the milled head extra large, enabling very thin sections to be cut
    • £ s. d.
    • 2 12 6
    • Preac
    • 2332
    • Set of Punches, complete in case, for cutting out embedding substances, extra ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 10 0
    • Pream 2333 Mr. Cole’s Pattern Section-Knife, in case
    • Prebo 2334 Hand Section-Cutter, for Botanical work
    • 0 8 6
    • 0 9 6
    • Preca
    • 2335 Darlaston’s Hand Section-Cutter, as Fig. 2335. Of simple construction, but of especially solid make, enabling considerable accuracy to be obtained. It is of solid brass, 14 inch diameter, and has a well 16 inch diameter. The raising screw— which is purposely fitted loosely to facilitate exact adjustment —has 35 threads to the inch ... ... ... ... ... 0 14 6
    • MICROTOME ACCESSORIES
    • Sunny 2336
    • Super 2337
    • Suppo 2338
    • Suppl 2339
    • Suppi 23310
    • Surna 23311
    • Predu 23312
    • Pregy 23313
    • Metal Moulds, L-shaped for casting, Paraffin blocks per pair 0 4 0 Elder Pith, for Embedding ... ... ... per bundle 0 0 9
    • Paraffin Wax, Hard or Soft ... ... ... ... per lb. 0 18
    • Strong Razor of good quality ... ... ... ... ... 0 2 9
    • Cole’s Pattern Section Knife, with fixed steel handle ... ... 0 8 6
    • Plane Iron with handle for Cathcart Microtome ... ... 0 8 6
    • Embedding Baths, Hot plates, etc. for electric, gas or oil supplied at makers list prices.
    • Celloidin Solution, thick ... ... ... ... 25 grms. 0 3 0
    • „ „ thin ... ... ... ... 25 grms. 0 2 0
    • ^/7'/77/^y7//7//7///^///7///7///7//7///X/7^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 ^y^/^/^^^^///^/^^^
    • K.
    • goodegg Soos Sos El o P Sri ids OS 88 hl o Sowoonas
  • n.n. - vue 37/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 234
    • MICROTOMES
    • MICROTOMES—Continued
    • THE CATHCART
    • Specially Recommended for Schools
    • THE CATHCART MICROTOME
    • This popular form of microtome is fitted for Ether Freezing or Embedding. For freezing tissues it is arranged as shown above; to embed tissues the tubes, bottle and the freezing tube are drawn out, the latter being replaced by another tube, with clamp. The substance to be cut (embedded in paraffin or other medium) is then inserted, and the clamp screwed up. This instrument is thoroughly well finished, and the adjusting screw milled head is made specially large to permit a fine movement.
    • Code Word. No. PRICES £ s.
    • Prayl 2341 Microtome as above, with double clamp to fasten it to table, spray bellows and freezing apparatus, tubes for making paraffin blocks, etc., complete 2 0
    • Preis 2342 The above Instrument, arranged for Ether Freezing only I II
    • Prema 2343 Ditto, ditto, for Embedding only 1 10
    • Prepo 2344 Plane Iron Section Knife, in handle 0 8
    • Prest 2345 Ether Points, extra sets 0 4
    • Pride 2346 Rubber Spray Bellows 0 5
    • W. WATSON & SONS’ KNIFE CARRIAGE PATTERN
    • CATHCART
    • This is a similar
    • MICROTOME
    • instrument to No.
    • 2341, but the razor carrier runs on brass, and not glass, guides. This latter has an adjustment allowing the razor edge angle to be adapted to the work in hand. The milled head for raising the materials is also furnished with an indicator by which the thick-can be accurately
    • ness of section
    • gauged.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Prim 2347
    • Prism 2348
    • Priva 2349
    • PRICES
    • For Freezing and Embedding with one razor
    • For Freezing only
    • For Embedding only
    • 2347
    • 3
    • 2
    • 2
    • 5
    • 15
    • 17
    • 0 0
    • 6
    • 5 on o Z
    • % (A
    • O to:
    • APNonorg
    • 6
    • SEX
    • H 80
    • Z 08 808
    • 68 zi 808
    • HI
    • KI s 8
    • VANNA
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C
  • n.n. - vue 38/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • MICROTOMES
    • 235
    • MICROTOME S—Continued
    • 2351 A
    • THE CATHCART-DARLASTON (Registered)
    • Realising the demand for a low-priced microtome, which, while preserving the simplicity and excellence of the Cathcart pattern, would yet enable the worker to cut sections of a definite thickness, we carried out a suggestion made by Mr. Darlaston, and produced an elaboration of the ordinary Cathcart microtome which will, we believe, be much appreciated by careful workers. The illustration shows the general principle, which is briefly as follows :—The forks A are attached to the knife carriage, and in drawing the latter back one of the forks engages with a lever attached to the milled head, and thus raises the material a distance of from 1/250 to 1/5000 of an inch, according to the position in which the forks are placed ; thumb-screws permit the distance between the two being varied at will. The forward traverse of the carriage causes the second fork to engage, which replaces the lever in its original position ready for the return thrust. The entire system is automatic, and work as accurate as that of a complicated and expensive instrument is possible. The automatic motion may be dispensed with at pleasure, and the milled head rotated by the hand as usual.
    • Code Word. No. PRICES £ s. d.
    • Priby 2351 Complete, for Freezing and Embedding ... 4 7 6
    • Prize 2352 For Embedding only 3 17 6
    • Probe 2353 For Freezing only 4 2 6
    • Proct 2354 Razor for above 0 2 9
    • ANNAS a a
    • SP 9
    • 8 00 Os 2 8 Sons 5 4
    • HI 0
    • f 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • ^y’/y/y^/7/7/7/////7//7///^/7//7/X/7/7^/7/7/7/7/7^//7/^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 39/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 236
    • MICROTOMES
    • THE CAMBRIDGE ROCKING MICROTOME
    • The Cambridge Rocking Microtome is most popular of all on account of its striking simplicity of construction and efficiency in action. Its accuracy and reliability in working are due to the geometrical design, which avoids the use of slides and bearings which might wear or become loose.
    • The action of the Cambridge Rocking Microtome may be described as follows :—The material to be sectioned is carried downwards across the knife, which is held with its edge upwards, by means of a rocking movement. The rocking arm to which the material is clamped turns on knife-edge bearings, thus ensuring an exact and smooth movement. The advance of the material towards the knife is effected by the movement of another rocking arm carrying the bearings already mentioned.
    • The handle which actuates the rapid movement of the material also acts by means of ratchet and pawl on a screw movement controlling the slow advance towards the knife. The actual advance of the specimen for each section is controlled by a stop which can be set for any desired section-thickness by means of a scale having 12 divisions, each division being equivalent to a thickness of 2u.
    • The object-holder will carry either the usual paraffin block or the wood block. An orientating object holder is also supplied, to enable the object to be cut in any desired direction.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Soabe 2361 Cambridge Rocking Microtome, complete with simple object holder, orientating object holder, simple pattern, and knife 6 18 0
    • Soach 2362 Simple object holder... 0 2 6
    • Soadl 2363 Object holder for wood blocks 0 15 0
    • Soafn 2364 Hard wood blocks, 22 mm. square... ... ... per doz. 0 2 0
    • Soagu 2365 Ditto, 16 x22 mm. ... 0 2 0
    • Soaki 2366 Orientating object holder, simple pattern... 0 7 0
    • Somas 2367 Knife ... 0 3 6
    • ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^y^^7/7/7X/7/y77/7/’77/y^X777/'/7/7/X/7/777^/’/7’/y’/’/7/'/7^ , 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I ^7/7////7/^/^/^/^/^/7/Z^^^
  • n.n. - vue 40/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 237
    • CAMBRIDGE FLAT CUTTING MICROTOME
    • 4
    • t. on
    • 8
    • /% -meeae
    • The instrument illustrated has been designed for cutting perfectly flat sections from specimens embedded in paraffin wax or when the dry celloidin method of mounting is employed. It is capable of cutting sections 3 cm, square, and the thickness of the cut can be varied from 0 to 20 microns. The instrument can be used for ribboning with certainty and ease. Any possible wear of the essential mechanism is automatically compensated and the instrument will, therefore, remain in perfect adjustment over long periods. Extreme rigidity characterises the entire design.
    • The mechanism is similar to that of the well-known rocker microtome in which the embedded object is fed forward automatically by rotation of a micrometer screw which is effected by the action of a pawl upon a milled disc rigidly fixed to the base of the screw. The pawl is operated by a reciprocating handle. In this new microtome rotation of the micrometer screw raises one end of a horizontal arm pivoted on knife edges, which in turn feeds the specimen forward by an amount proportional to the rotation of the screw, and may be varied by adjusting the amount during which the pawl is in contact with the milled disc by moving an index pointer over a scale divided in microns. The entire system is free from back-lash and the knife holder is of very rigid design. Two types of knife are made, one being hollow ground and the other having almost straight sides. Both are supplied with removable backs for sharpening, giving a cutting angle of 17 degrees for one knife and 21 degrees for the other knife. Special backs can be supplied with which to increase this angle to 24 degrees for the cutting of very hard specimens.
    • A simple object holder is supplied with the instrument but three types of holder can be supplied as follows :—
    • (1) A plain holder on which paraffin wax blocks are directly cemented.
    • (2) A vice holder for a wood block to which the embedded specimen is fixed.
    • (3) An orientating holder of very rigid construction.
    • Code Word, No. £ S. d.
    • Soaps 2371 Flat cutting Microtome with simple knife holder, one 17° knife and handle, and one simple object holder 25 0 0
    • Soars 2372 Vice holder for wood blocks 2 0 0
    • Soaxs 2373 Simple Orientating object holder... 4 0 0
    • Soaws 2374 22° Knife 2 0 0
    • Soayd 2375 17° Knife (Spare) ... 2 0 0
    • ^6TZ^^/Z</Z<^/ZZ/ZZZZZZZZ/Z///7ZZ/ZZ^ZZZZ/Z////Z/Z///Z<//ZZ/////Z'Z'/Z^ZZ<<'^>
    • ( W. WATSON & SONS, LTD.
    • “vxeeeeeeeeeececeezteeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeccedceecece?e0tcc£7600XE2X222E22AEE0A£00£A£6%
    • rsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssss/ssssssss^^
    • 3I3 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 41/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 238
    • MOUNTING
    • MOUNTING MATERIALS
    • 2381
    • 15 == =
    • Code Word. No.
    • COMPLETE CABINETS FOR MOUNTING
    • Containing Asphalt varnish, 3 Bottles for Solutions, Brass Table, Canada Balsam, Cells, Cover Glasses, 2 Dissecting Knives, Dissecting Needles, Forceps and Scissors, Glass Slips, Gold Size, Labels, Marine Glue, Spirit Lamp, Spring Clips, Turntable, etc.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Sherb 2381
    • In mahogany case.
    • £6 10 0
    • Code Word. No.
    • Sheri 2382
    • In polished pine case.
    • £5 15 0
    • Shell 2383
    • Shent 2384
    • Sheph 2385
    • Shepo 2386
    • Brushes for Ringing ... ... . Buff Blocks for cleaning Cover Glasses Clips, Spring Wire, for mounting
    • Mica in sheets 2" x 3" for mounting
    • per pair per doz. per doz.
    • COVER GLASSES (Best quality only)
    • In three thicknesses—No. 1, very thin, approx. *15 mm. No. 2, medium, approx. *21 mm. and No. 3, approx. -3 mm.
    • Code Word.
    • Circles, § in., 1 in., % in. diameter.
    • 1 oz.
    • No. £s.d.
    • Squares, § in., 1 in., % in. square.
    • Code Word. No.
    • 1 oz.
    • £ s. d.
    • Sherr 2387 No. 1
    • Shewd 2388 No. 2
    • Sibbo 2389 No. 3
    • 0 5 6
    • 0 4 2
    • 0 3 3
    • Shift 23810 No. 1
    • Shine 23811 No. 2
    • Shipp 23812 No. 3
    • 05 0
    • 03 8 0 2 9
    • These prices are for not less than 1 oz. of any size or thickness.
    • Only the above sizes regularly kept in stock.
    • Special quotations for quantities. If in smaller quantities than 1 oz. of any size add 1d. per | oz.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Shore 23813
    • Shorn 23814
    • Smaller, intermediate or larger sizes for not less than 1 oz., can be cut to order at1 /O per oz ex. Special Thin No. 1 Covers. Circles, J in. diameter only. These are excessively thin — •005 inch—for high-power work. Not less than 1 oz. supplied, 17/6 oz.
    • GLASS SLIDES OR SLIPS
    • 3x1 inches, ground edges. £ doz S. d. £ gross.
    • s. d.
    • Shing 23815 " The Student’s,” greenish tint, thin ... 0 0 5 0 2 0
    • Shive 23816 Extra thin, white 0 0 9 0 4 0
    • Shoal Shock Shoon Shoot 23817 23818 23819 23820 Glass Slips, 3x1 ins., with round or oval excavation in life, or objects to be mounted without pressure Blue Slips, 3 x 1 ins., for use with lamp chimneys Pot Green, 3 x 1 ins. for use with lamp chimneys Adhesive Slide Labels, square, 3 lines, per 100 Ditto, oval, for 3x1 inch slips, per 500 centre, suitable for pond doz. doz. each
    • Shoph 23821 Ditto, square, with printed name or other m atter to ord er. per 1000
    • 1 gross.
    • £ s. d.
    • 0 3 9
    • 07 6
    • 0 2 0 07 6
    • 0 16 00 6
    • 0 10 08 6
    • CELL RINGS
    • Shosi
    • 23822
    • Aluminium, thickness
    • 16, 21 or 3, in., diameters 5, 1 or % in., per doz. 8d. p. gross
    • 07 6
    • EV3 is a 5 898 8 ,21 S.X 8 sons 80s 28
    • 808 5 9 ^ww^
    • 8% s • 8 IC B
    • Z
    • IA
    • O 8 ms 80:
    • H
    • III
    • 0 =
    • S cos 8 ro 8 % X Sonoosce
  • n.n. - vue 42/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 239
    • STAINS AND REAGENTS FOR BIOLOGICAL PURPOSES
    • These dyes are prepared under standardised conditions and provide a product on which biologists and histologists may rely absolutely as regards purity and consistency to formula.
    • 5 gms. 10 gms. 25 gms. 5 gms. 10 gms. 25 gms.
    • Azocarmine 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Methylene Blue, Pure Medi-
    • Azure I, 1 gm. 2/- 9/- 17/9 35/6 cinal 1 /3 2/3 4/6
    • Azure II, 1 gm. 1/6 ... 6/- 11/9 23/6 Methylene Blue Polychrome... 1/6 2/9 5/6
    • Azure A, MacNeal, 1 gm. 2/- 9/- 17/9 35/6 Methylene Violet Bernthsen
    • Azure B, MacNeal, 1 gm. 4/6 22/- — 1 gm. 4/6 ...... 22/- — —
    • Biebrich Scarlet 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Neutral Red 2/6 4/9 9/6
    • Bismarck Brown 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Nigrosin 1 /- 1/10 3/6
    • Bordeaux 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Nile Blue 1/3 2/3 4/6
    • Brilliant Green 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Napthol Green 1 /- 1/10 3/6
    • Congo Red 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Orange G. 1 /- 1/10 3/6
    • Crystal Violet ... 1 /3 2/3 4/6 Orange II 1 /- 1/10 3/6
    • Dahlia 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Orcein, 1 gm. ... 3/- 14/- 26/-
    • Eosin Bluish 2/- 3/9 7/6 Phloxine 1/3 2/3 4/6
    • Eosin Ethyl 2/6 4/9 9/6 Picric Acid 1 /- 2/3
    • Eosin Yellowish 2/- 3/9 7/6 Ponceaus S. 1/6 2/9 5/6
    • Erythrosine 2/6 4/9 9/6 Pyronine 1/9 3/3 6/6
    • Fluoresceine 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Rose Bengal 2/- 3/9 7/6
    • Fuchsine Basic 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Safranine G. 1 /- 1/10 3/6
    • Fuchsine Acid 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Safranine 0. 1 /- 1/10 3/6
    • Gentian Violet 50% Dextrin 1 /6 2/9 5/6 Soluble Blue with Dextrin 1 /- 1/10 3/6
    • Gentian Violet, extra 1 /6 2/9 5/6 Soluble Blue Extra 1/9 3/3 6/6
    • Indigo Carmine 1 /6 2/9 5/6 Spirit Blue 1/6 2/9 5/6
    • Jenners Stain ... 3/9 — Sudan II 1/6 2/9 5/6
    • Light Green 1 /3 2/3 4/6 Sudan III 1/6 2/9 5/6
    • Malachite Green 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Sudan IV 1/6 2/9 5/6
    • Martius Yellow 1 /3 2/3 4/6 Thionine 3/6 6/9 13/6
    • Methyl Blue 1 /6 2/9 5/6 Thionine Blue 2/- 3/9 7/6
    • Methyl Green ... 2/- 3/9 7/6 Toluidine Blue ...... 2/3 4/3 8/6
    • Methyl Violet ... 1 /- 1/10 3/6 Vital Red, 1 gm. 2/3 10/- 19/9 —
    • NATURAL DYESTUFFS AND COMPOUND STAINS
    • 5 gms. 10 gms. 25 gms. Aniline Blue, Orange G. Mallory 1/6 2/9 5/6 Azure II, Eosine 1 gm. 2/- ... 9/- 17/9 35/6 Brazilin, 1 gm. 1/9 7/6 14/9 Carbol Fuchsine ... ... 1/- 1/10 3/6 Carbol Gentian Violet ... 1/- 1/10 3/6 Carmalum ... ... ... 1/6 2/9 5/6 Carmine, Alum Soluble ... 1/9 3/3 6/6 Carmine, Borax Soluble ... 1/9 3/3 6/6 Carmine, Picro-magnesia ... 3/- 5/9 11/6 Carminic Acid, 1 gm. 2/- ... 9/- 17/9 35/6 Ehrlich’s Acidophilous Mixture ... ... 2/- 3/9 7/6 Ehrlich-Biondi-Heidenhain- Triple Stain ... ... 1/6 2/9 5/6 Ehrlich’s Triacid Stain ... 1/6 2/9 5/6 Giemsa, 1 gm. 2/- ... ... 9/- 17/9 35/6 5 gms. 10gms. 25 gms. Gram’s Iodine ... ... 1/- 1/10 3/6 Haemalum 1/- 1/10 3/6 Haematin, 1 gm. 1 6 ... 6/- 11/9 23/6 Haematoxylin ... ... 3/- 5/- 12/- Leishman’s Stain ... ... 3/9 7/3 14/6 Methyl-Green-Pyronin (Papp- enheim) ... ... ... 2/3 4/3 8/6 Orcein, 1 gm. 3/- ... ... 14/- 26/- — Phlorogucinol Pure ... ... 3/6 6/9 13/6 Pianese 11-lb. Stain ... ... 1/- 1/10 3/6 Picro-Indigo-Carmine ... 1/- 1/10 3/6 Romanowsky ... ... ... 3/9 7/3 14/6 Tetrachrome MacNeal 1 gm.1/3 5/- 9/9 19/6 Van Gieson 1/- 1/10 3/6 Weigert's Elastic Stain Soluble 4/- 7/6 15/- Wrights ... ... ... 3/6 6/9 13/6
    • PRICE LIST OF STAIN SOLUTIONS
    • 25 c.c. 100 c.c.
    • Albert’s Diphtheria Stain No. 1... 1/3 2/9
    • Albert’s Diphtheria Stain No. 2... 1 /-
    • Aniline Blue-Orange G, Mallory 1/3 2/6
    • Biebrich Scarlet, Scott 1/3 2/6
    • Bismarck Brown in 40% Glycerol 1/3 3/-
    • Bordeaux ... 1/3 2/6
    • Carbol Fuchsine, Ziehl 1/3 2/6
    • Carbol Gentian Violet, Nicolle ... 1/3 2/6
    • Carbol Methylene Blue 1/3 2/6
    • Carbol Thionine, King 1/3 3 /-
    • Carbol Thionine, Nicolle ... 1/3 3/-
    • Carmalum ... 1/3 2/-
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. )
    • Zcezszezecececeseeeeeeeeei eceZPPRCVVCcRVVHHZcccceccecceZvcZvccceZvececeeAX
    • 25 c.c. 100 c.c.
    • Carmine :—
    • Alum Acetic 1/3 2/6
    • Alum, Anderson 1/3 3/-
    • Alum, Grenacher 1/3 2/6
    • Alum, Nayer 1/3 2/6
    • Ammonia, Ranvier 1/3 2/6
    • Bests 1/6 2/6
    • Borax Alcoholic, Grenacher 1/6 4/-
    • Magnesia Stock, Mayer 1/3 3/-
    • Paracarmine 2/6 7/6
    • Picro, Ranvier ... 1/3 3/-
    • Picro-magnesia ...... Cochineal Alcoholic, Mayer's old 1 /3 3/-
    • Formula 2/- 6/6
    • pSS/SS/r//////SS/7//S//S/7S/7/S/77/7/^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
  • n.n. - vue 43/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 240
    • PRICE LIST OF
    • STAIN SOLUTIONS-Continued
    • Cochineal Alcoholic, Mayer's New 25 c.c.
    • Formula 2/-
    • Congo Red 1/3
    • Ehrlich’s Acidophilous Mixture ... 2/-
    • Ehrlich-Biondi-Heidenhain Triple
    • Stain ... 1/3
    • Ehrlich’s Triacid Mixture 1 /6
    • Elastic Tissue Stain, Weigert's ... 3/6
    • Eosin Methylene Blue, see Leish-
    • man's & Wright's Stains.
    • Eosin Yellowish, 1% aqueous 1/3
    • Gentian Violet, Alcoholic Conc. 3/6
    • ,, ,, Alcoholic 1/3
    • ,, ,, Aqueous 1/3
    • ,, ,, Aniline Water,
    • Ehrlich 1/3
    • „ ,, Carbol, see Carbol
    • Gentian Violet.
    • Giemsa’s Stain 2/6
    • Glychaemalum 1 /3
    • Goodpasture’s Stain 2/-
    • Gram’s Iodine
    • Haemalum 1 /3
    • Haemalum Acid ... 1/3
    • Haematoxylin : —
    • Acid, Ehrlich 1 /9
    • Delafield’s 1/3
    • Phospho-Molybdic acid, Mallory 1/3
    • Phospho-Tungstic acid, Mallory 1 /3
    • Unna's ... 1 /3
    • Heidenhain No. 1, Iron 1/3
    • ,, No. 2 1/3
    • Held s Molybdic acid ... 1 /3
    • Weigert No. 1 ... 2/-
    • ,, No. 2, Iron 1 /3
    • Indulin-Aurantia-Eosin, see Ehr-
    • lich's Acidophilous Mixture.
    • Leishman’s Stain ... 3/6
    • Magenta Acid Aniline Water,
    • Altmann 1 /3
    • Magenta Acid Aqueous 1/3
    • Magenta Basic Conc. Alcoholic ... 3/6
    • Magenta Basic Collodion 1 /6
    • Methyl Blue-Eosine, Mann 1/3
    • Methyl Green 1/3
    • Methyl Green-Pyronine, Pappen-
    • heim 1/6
    • Methyl Green-Pyronine, Unna ... 2/3
    • 25 c.c. 100 c.c.
    • Methyl Violet 1/3 2/6
    • Methylene Blue : — Alcoholic Conc. 3/6 10/6
    • Aqueous 1/3 2/6
    • Carbol, see Carbol Methylene Blue. Eosin, see Leishman’s & Wright's stains. Loeffler 1 /3 3/-
    • Nissl 1/6 5/6
    • Polychrome 1/6 4/3
    • Terry 1/6 6/-
    • Unna 1/3 3/-
    • Nigrosine W.S. 1/3 2/6
    • Nile Blue for fat, acid 1 /6 4/-
    • Nile Blue for fat, neutralized 1 /9 5/-
    • Orange G. ... 1/3 2/6
    • Paracarmine, see Carmine. Pasini’s Stain 2/- 6/6
    • Pianese III b Stain 1/3 3/-
    • Picro-Indigo-carmine 1/3 2/6
    • Romanowsky’s Stain, see Leish-man's & Wright's Stains. Safranine Alcoholic, Babes ,, Aniline Water, Babes 2/6 7/6
    • 1/3 3/-
    • ,, Aqueous 1/3 2/6
    • Scharlach R, see Sudan IV. 2/- 6/6
    • Sudan II Pyridine, Proescher 2/- 6/6
    • Sudan III Alcoholic 2/- 6/6
    • Sudan III Alkaline Alcohol, Hera-heimer 2/6 7/6
    • Sudan III Acetone-Alcohol, Herx- heimer ... .. 2/6 7/6
    • Sudan IV Alcoholic 2/- 6/6
    • Sudan IV Alkaline-Alcohol, Herx-
    • heimer 2/6 7/6
    • Sudan IV Acetone-Alcohol, Herx-heimer 2/6 7/6
    • Tetrachrome Stain, MacNeal 2/6 7/6
    • Thionine Acetic, Frost 1/3 3/-
    • Thionine Carbolic see Carbol Thionine. Van Gieson’s Stain 1/3 2/6
    • Vesuvin, see Bismarck Broun. Water-Blue-Orcein Unna 2/6 7/6
    • Weigert’s Elastic Stain 3/6 10/6
    • Wright’s Stain 3/6 10/-
    • BURROUGHS WELCOME & CO.’S
    • “SOLOID” BRAND MICROSCOPIC STAINS
    • (Trade Mark)
    • “ Solid ” Microscopic Stains will be found exceedingly useful for the rapid preparation of small quantities of Solution. Each tube contains 6 “ Soloid ” products.
    • A descriptive list, in each packet, gives full directions for making up and staining.
    • Price 1/11 per packet, excepting those marked otherwise.
    • The following “ Soloid ” stains are obtainable :—
    • Bismarck Brown, pure 0-1 gm. s. d. Gram’s Iodine Solution 15 S. c.c.
    • Borax Methylene Blue Ehrlich Triple Stain ... Eosin, pure 0-1 gm. 1 8 Haemalum Haematoxylin, pure Methyl Violet, pure 0-1 0-1 gm. gm.
    • Eosin-Azur (for Giemsa Staining) Eosin-Methylene Blue (Louis Jenner’s Stain) Fuchsine (Basic): pure Gentian Violet, pure ... 0-038 gm. 0-05 gm. 0-1 gm. 0-1 gm. 1 8 Methylene Blue Neutral Red Romanowsky Stain (Leishman’s Powder) Thionin Blue, pure Toison Blood Fluid Toluidine, Blue 0-1 gm. 0-1 gm. 0-015 gm. 0-1 gm. 0-1 gm.
    • gooong hi 1 1 o 1
    • Z 88 Sons 08 : * iHS 848 5 SoNNANoS
    • ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^/^r//7/7/7y7/^/X/77^^7XAW^/^/7^/^/77/77W'AW7Xf
    • 3 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
    • ^/^/^/^^/^/^/^7^^^^
  • n.n. - vue 44/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 241
    • MOUNTING MEDIA, STAINS
    • Code Word. No. MOUNTING MEDIA, Etc.
    • Shoul 2411 Asphalt or Black Cement ... ... ... ... ... ... ... Per Bell’s Cement ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... „
    • Shout 2412
    • Shove 2413 Canada Balsam, Natural ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Shown 2414 ,, ,, in Benzole ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Shred 2415 ,, ,, in Xylol ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Shrex 2416 ,, ,, Bottle, with neck turned in so that rod can be scraped against edge, with glass rod, capacity about 2 ozs. ... ,,
    • Siate 2417 Cedar Oil, for clearing ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Shrew 2418 Cedar Oil, thick, for Immersion ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Sibec 2419 Deane’s Medium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Sicca 24110 Farrants’ Medium ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,)
    • Sider 24111 Glycerine Jelly ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Shrie 24112 Gold Size ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Siflu 24113 Hyrax, a synthetic resin, N...L72, in Xylol; J-oz. bottle 4/6, 1 oz. bottle ,,
    • Sikan 24114 Styrax, Oriental ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Silva 24115 Styrax, American ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,, Marine Glue ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... „
    • Shril 24116
    • Shrif 24117 Zinc White Cement ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ,,
    • Shrof 24118 Clove Oil... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ?5 25 grms. 100 grms.
    • Shrog 24119 Celloidin ... ... ... ... ... ... 8/- —
    • Shroh 24120 Celloidin Solution, Thick ... ... ... ... 3/- 11/-
    • Shroj 24121 Celloidin Solution, Thin ... ... ... ... 2/- 7/-
    • Shrok 24122 Dammar Mastic... ... ... ... ... ... 1/- 2/6 Pale. Vert.
    • Shrol 24123 Euparal, 1 oz. ... ... ... ... ... ... 2/6 3/-
    • Shrom 24124 Euparal Essence, 1 oz. Flemming’s Solution, Strong ... ... ... ... 3/6 12/6 Flemming’s Solution, Weak ... ... ... ... 2/6 9/3
    • Shron 24125
    • Shrop 24126
    • Shror 24127 Gum syrup for Freezing Microtome ... ... ... — 2/6
    • Shros 24128 Iodine, resublimed ... ... ... ... 2/- 7/3
    • Shrot 24129 Oil of Cloves ... ... ... ... ... 1/9 4/6
    • Shrov 24130 Osmic Acid 2% ... ... ... ... ... 12/6 42/6
    • Shrow 24131 Osmic Acid, 1% solution ... ... ... ... 7/- 25/- Paraffin Wax—
    • Shrox 24132 Melting point about 120°F. (49°C.) in 1 lb. blocks — —
    • Shroy 24133 „ ,, 125°F. (52°C.) ,, ,, — —
    • Shroz 24134 ,, ,, 130°F. (54°C.) ,, ,, — —
    • Shulm 24135 „ ,, 140°F. (60°C.) „ „ — — Schulze Solution ... ... ... ... ... 1/3 3/-
    • Shuvt 24136
    • s. d.
    • Bottle 1 6
    • „ 4 6
    • ,, 2 0
    • ,, 2 0
    • „ 2 0
    • 1 0
    • 1 6
    • 1 0
    • 1 0
    • 1 6
    • 6 6
    • 2 0
    • 5 0
    • 1 6
    • 2 0 o n
    • 500
    • SOLID MEDIA (to order only — - • I I -
    • Agar—acid lactose (pH 5*6)
    • „ —ascitic, 5 c.c. in phials
    • ,. —Fildes’ for B. influenzae, in phials
    • ,, —glycerin, 6 c.c. in tubes
    • 10 c.c. for plating, in phials
    • ,, —maltose (Sabouraud’s), in phials only
    • ,, —MacConkey’s, in phials (10 c.c.) ... ... ... ... ......
    • and bottle ...
    • ,, —nutrient, 6 c.c. in tubes
    • „ —nutrient with human blood (mixed or smeared), in phials
    • ,, —Sabouraud’s—vide supra, agar—maltose—serum, in phials ...
    • ,, —tellurite, for B. diphtheriae, in phials
    • ,, —whey (pH 6-8), in bottle ...
    • Blood serum, Loeffler’s, 5 c.c. in tubes ...
    • in phials ...
    • Bordet’s medium for B. pertussis (in plates on loan) ...
    • Gelatin (nutrient), in tubes 6 c.c. ..
    • in phials
    • LIQUID MEDIA (to order only)
    • Broth—acid lactose (pH 5-6), in phial and bottle
    • ,, —MacConkey’s glucose, in phial (10 c.c.) and bottle
    • ,, —MacConkey’s lactose, in phial (10 c.c.) and bottle
    • ,, —nutrient, in phial and bottle
    • ,, —Whey (pH 6-8), in bottle ... ... ... ... ......
    • Brilliant—green-bile enrichment medium, in phial 12 c.c.
    • Bile (ox) in sealed tubes of about 10 c.c.
    • Meat medium for B. acne and other anaerobes, in phial (15 c.c.)
    • ,, (Ministry of Health’s formula) in phial (15 c.c.) ...
    • Milk (phenol red indicator) in phial and bottle ...
    • Peptone water with fermentation tube and acid fuchsin indicator, containing glucose, lactose, mannite, maltose or saccharose, in phials
    • ,, do. containing dulcite, in phials
    • All the above can be supplied to order. Unless otherwise stated all are standardised to pH 7-6.
    • Other media will be made to order or special formula (in quantities of not less than 2 dozen tubes or in bulk in A litre bottles) ... ... from
    • Sterilized plugged tubes Sterilized phials
    • Per doz. Per 1
    • gross.
    • 4/6 24/-
    • 6/- 33/-
    • 4/- 22/-
    • 5/- 28/-
    • 4/4 24/-
    • 4/4 24/-
    • 4/- 22/-
    • 7/- 39/—
    • 6/- 33/-
    • 5/- 28/-
    • 4/- 22/-
    • 4/4 24/-
    • 12/- —
    • 4/- 22/-
    • 4/4 24/-
    • 3/4 18/-
    • 3/4 18/-
    • 3/4 18/-
    • 3/4 18/-
    • 3/6 18/6
    • 3/6 —
    • 4/4 24/-
    • 4/4 24/-
    • 3/10 21 /-
    • 4/- 22/-
    • ... 5/- 27/6
    • 6/- 33/-
    • 1/2 6/-
    • 1/6 8/-
    • toX
    • 8
    • IR (9 8 0s
    • 2 sl sons
    • OS 80s
    • ^ZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZZZZ/ZZZZZZZ////////ZZZ////Z/ZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/ZZ/ZZZZ/ZZZ/Z//Z/ZZJ 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. , 4CZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ/£
  • n.n. - vue 45/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 242
    • OBJECT CABINETS
    • MICROSCOPIC OBJECT
    • 18
    • WATSON LONDON
    • i “g. P “ ^n— ^
    • 666000000
    • CABINETS AND BOXES
    • * * *
    • Estimates submitted for any size or style of cabinet, in any suitable wood, for any climate, with plain or metal bottom trays on receipt of enquiry or specification.
    • * *
    • 2421
    • 2425
    • Code Word. No.
    • Punie 2421
    • Punch 2422
    • Punti 2423
    • Pupef 2424
    • Pupil 2425
    • Puppy 2426
    • £ s. d.
    • Neatly-made Cabinet of polished pine, with glass door, lock and key to hold 200 objects, as figured ... ... ... 2 10 0
    • Ditto, ditto, 500 objects ... 4 10 0
    • Ditto, ditto, 1000 objects ... 7 15 0
    • Mahogany Cabinet ofsuperior workman-ship with mouldings top and bottom, to hold 280 objects, each drawer numbered, with an extra deep drawer for materials etc. ... ... ... ...10 0 0
    • Large handsome Mahogany Cabinet to hold 500 objects, each drawer numbered and furnished with porcelain plates, as figured ... ... ... ... ...15 0 0
    • Ditto, ditto, to hold 1,000 ... 21 0 0
    • MICROSCOPE SLIDE BOXES
    • Cloth-covered Cardboard Boxes, with drop fronts, white cardboard trays with linen-jointed flaps.
    • No. s. d.
    • 2427 With 6 trays to hold 54 slides flat 3 0
    • 2428 „ 12 „ ,, 108 „ 5 6
    • 2429 „ 16 „ „ 144 „ Polished Wood Object Boxes, with partitioned trays. 6 9
    • 24210 To hold 1 dozen slides in 2 trays ... 3 0
    • 24211 „ 2 „ „ 4 „ 4 0
    • 24212 „ 3 „ „ 6 „ 6 0
    • 24213 „ 4 „ „ 8 „ 8 0
    • 24214 „ 6 „ „ 12 „ 24215 ,, 12 ,, ,, 12 doubletrays ...... 11 0
    • ... 15 0
    • 24210
    • 2/
    • 8 38 89
    • S
    • F
    • Rack Boxes. The most convenient form for storing quantities of specimens for teaching or for those with restricted space.
    • 24216 Cloth covered, book form, with index, for 100 slides ... 6 3
    • 24217 Black cardboard, with index for 100 slides ... ... 4 0
    • 24218 Wooden boxes, semi-polished, folding, with index, to hold
    • 100 slides ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 0
    • Folding Pocket Cases, flat.
    • 24219 To hold 12 slides ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 9
    • 24220 To hold 6 slides ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 0
    • 2
    • 9 s IP
    • 98
    • 8 08 0
    • 2
    • 8 sons 80
    • E 8 Soosands
    • Soong Sos 803 8
    • E 6 F g
    • SHS 8 W § 10
    • Z a 0 aNNoNS
  • n.n. - vue 46/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • OBJECTS
    • 243
    • PREPARED OBJECTS FOR THE MICROSCOPE
    • So typical as to be almost diagrammatic, perfect examples also of microtomy, staining and mounting.
    • For more than fifty years we have maintained the premier position in the scientific world for the supply of highest class Microscopic Objects, and they are in universal use for Biological, Medical and Industrial study, book illustrations and other purposes, including the varied interests of the amateur.
    • No worker who values his Microscope as an aid to Natural Science should fail to provide himself with our Illustrated Classified List of Microscopic Objects (Part 3), which forms a separate publication. The stock of slides numbers over 40,000. The slides are prepared by experts, each of mature experience in his speciality. The objects are, therefore, fitted to be used in the most critical manner. As standard specimens for demonstrations and students they are unsurpassed.
    • The Microscope is constantly extending its field of usefulness and new branches of research have consequently to be provided for ; especially is this the case in numerous manufacturing processes ; new specimens are therefore continually being added to our cabinets to assist workers, and correspondence is always invited.
    • The following subjects are fully dealt with :—Botany, Comparative Anatomy, Diatomaceae and Foraminifera, Entomology, Geology, Palseontology, Histology, Pathology, Parasitology, Bacteriology, Marine and Fresh Water Life, Polariscopic Specimens, Public Health Series, Textiles, Tropical Diseases, Zoology, etc.
    • Amateurs are strongly recommended to investigate the particular sections which appeal to them. It is always possible to obtain for selection a large number of striking preparations.
    • It is our endeavour to maintain our stock in such a condition of completeness that we may be in a position to despatch any specimen that is quoted in our catalogue immediately ; but it sometimes happens that a temporary cessation in the supply of material occurs, or the time of the year may not be suitable for obtaining gatherings and, in consequence, delays may be experienced. We suggest, therefore, that when an order is given, extra alternative specimens may be named, to replace any that might be temporarily out of stock.
    • Special attention is drawn to the staining methods, by means of which all the tissues are differentiated, thereby aiding demonstrators very considerably.
    • Our exceptional facilities enables us to prepare objects for the Microscope from customers’ materials to the greatest advantage. This service is proving of daily help to industrial firms. Special care is displayed in such work.
    • Every slide is examined before being placed in stock, and special care is taken in selecting specimens when forwarding ; satisfaction to customers is assured by this means. We claim for our Objects a quality superior to the usual commercial level and it will always be our aim to maintain this.
    • We beg that you will take the opportunity of proving the excellence of our specimens by entrusting us with your orders and kind recommendations.
    • On the next page are several standard sets, which are typical of the subjects in the general collection.
    • 8 2
    • SR 898 8 08
    • 2 89 Sons 108 88 H HI
    • 5
    • di 8 z SAs 8 m 1
    • 6
    • E j z | Iffi I 8 co 8 3 co 8
  • n.n. - vue 47/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • "T * CM
    • OBJECTS
    • CABINETS OF MICROSCOPIC OBJECTS
    • COMPLETE FOR PRESENTATION, Etc.
    • Code Word.
    • Prope
    • No.
    • 2441
    • PRICES
    • Handsome Mahogany Cabinet of finest workmanship and finish, containing 1000 objects of varied interest. Each specimen is a carefully selected example of the subject it typifies. Many novel and interesting preparations are included, Anatomical, Entomological, Zoological, etc., also many rare Diatomaces, Fora-minifera and Radiolaria, forming a collection of the highest order, eminently suited for presentation. Each drawer has a tablet of its contents
    • Th
    • 97 10 0
    • Prose 2442
    • Pushe 2443
    • Prote 2444
    • Proud 2445
    • Prove 2446
    • Handsome Mahogany Cabinet, equal to the above in every respect, but containing 500 objects ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 50 0 0
    • Mahogany Cabinet, as above, containing 280 objects, all carefully selected, including many novel and attractive slides for exhibition purposes, as well as a large number of rare specimens of Zoological interest, etc. ... ... ... ... 29 5 0
    • The Student’s Cabinet, of polished pine with glass door,lock, and key, containing 200 preparations, illustrating Anatomy, Bacteriology, Pathology, Physiology, Urinary Deposits, etc. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 22 10 0
    • The Amateur’s Cabinet, containing 200 specimens of general interest— Botanical Sections, Crystals for polariscope, Diatomaceae, Entomological Objects, Foraminifera, Hydrozoa for Dark Ground Illumination, Soundings, all of the highest quality ...
    • 18 10 0
    • Pine Case, containing 72 objects of General Interest, all carefully prepared and selected ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 6 5 0
    • Other Microscopic Object Cabinets made to any size or style and furnished with slides typical of any required subject.
    • EDUCATIONAL SERIES FOR STUDENTS
    • BOTANY
    • Prows 2447 Two sets of Typical Structures, the first being 24 Elementary Tissues, and the £ s. d. second illustrating the Comparative Anatomy of Plants. These have been
    • adopted by the London County Council for use in their Technical Classes,
    • Series 33 in case ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 2 0
    • Prune 2448 „ 35 „ 2 3 6
    • EMBRYOLOGY
    • Pryor 2449 Six slides, illustrating the development of a Chick, mounted in Canada Balsam,
    • showing with great distinctness the nervous and circulatory system, etc., in case 15 0
    • EXHIBITION SLIDES
    • Pruce 24410 An attractive selection of 36 interesting objects, many of which are quite novel in character, including slides for Polariscope and Dark Ground Illumination ... 3 10 0
    • Pufti 24411 Forensic Medicine.—Set of twenty-four slides of hairs, blood corpuscles,
    • starches, etc., as suggested by R. Henslowe Wellington, Esq., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P.,
    • Barrister-at-Law, etc. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 2 0
    • GEOLOGY
    • Pukeo 24412 Twenty-four Typical Rock Sections, sedimentary, metamorphic and igneous.
    • The series will be found very useful for Petrological candidates for the B.Sc. degree 2 15 0
    • PHYSIOLOGY
    • Pulls 24413 Four complete sets (Nos. 67-73) each set containing 24 Typical Tissues, each a selected example of its kind. The complete series illustrates the Standard Text-
    • books of Histology. Per set of 24, in case ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 2 0
    • Ditto, complete set of 96 slides ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 8 8 0
    • PUBLIC HEALTH
    • Pulse 24414 Seventy-two specimens, suitable for candidates for the Diploma, as approved by Dr. F. J. Allan and mentioned in his " Aids to Sanitary Science” ... ... 6 15 0
    • ZOOLOGY
    • Pumps 24415 Twenty-four selected specimens, Coelenterata, Infusoria, Polyzoa, Protozoa,
    • Vermes, etc. Many of these, apart from their Biological interest, will be found
    • of great value as exhibition objects. In case ... ... ... ... ... 3 0 0
    • yzzzzzzzzazzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz/zzzzzzzzzzzzzzz/y/zz^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1
    • GzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzZ
    • SANPANN3 9
    • 803 gi 8 2 68
    • AS 8 0 § (2, 8 6 iooonoodS
  • n.n. - vue 48/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • POLARISING APPARATUS
    • 245
    • POLARISERS AND ANALYSERS
    • 2454
    • 2459
    • Complete Sets, suitable for all Standard Microscopes.
    • The Polarizer slides into a standard substage or understage fitting and is provided with rotary movement. The analyser can be screwed into a nosepiece, body-tube or draw-tube, receiving at its lower end any objective having the standard screw.
    • Code Word. No.
    • Purre 2451
    • Purge 2452
    • Purga 2453
    • Purgb 2454
    • Purlo 2456
    • Purla 2457
    • Purlb 2458
    • Purse 2459
    • PRICES
    • Polariser and analyser, small size... ..............
    • Medium size polarizer and analyser .................
    • Medium size polarizer only ... ........
    • Medium size analyser only .................................
    • Large size polarizer and analyser ... ......
    • Large size polarizer only ...
    • Large size analyser only
    • Extra for rotary movement to either of these Analysers
    • £ s. d.
    • IIO 0 2 5 0
    • IIO 0 0 15 0 3 2 6
    • 117 6 1 5 0 0 7 6
    • A disc of Selenite is supplied with sets 2451, 2452, 2456.
    • 5 |c
    • 1
    • 24510
    • ATSON & SO
    • LONDON
    • 24511
    • Pyred 24510
    • Polpe 24511
    • Poley 24512
    • Polxa 24513
    • mmmKwwa*
    • Polarizer, with large prism, rotated by milled graduated flange, with fixed pointer and spring detent at quarter circles 3 10 Analyser Eyepiece with Divided Circle, consisting of a Huyghenian eyepiece with cross webs, circle graduated in degrees, with large field square-ended prism mounted to rotate over the Eyepiece, rotation being read by means of a pointer.
    • Universal size ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 5
    • Large size ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 5 0
    • Extra for slotting eyepiece to receive Calcspar plate, Bertrand quartered quartz plate, etc. ... ... ... ... ... 0 15
    • o
    • 0
    • 0
    • 0
    • : W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 3 ^^//^/y/^/y/y/y/^///^^^^
    • ^yyyyyyyyyy/yy/yyyyyy//y///yyyyyyyyyy^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
    • ^yy/yyy//y////////////////////////y/yyyy///////7/7//y////y////yy//^/yyy/M7/////////^
  • n.n. - vue 49/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 246
    • POLARISCOPE-SELENITES
    • POLARISCOPE-SELENITES
    • 2461
    • PRICES
    • Code Word. No. £0 d.
    • Prose 2461 SELENITE STAGE, as figured, with pinion to rotate the central well carrying the Selenites. With a set of 3 Darker’s Best Selenites, having P/A marked on each, complete ... ... 3 15 0
    • Promi
    • Prone
    • Proni
    • a
    • Mica-Selenite Stage. 2462.
    • MICA-SELENITE STAGE
    • 2462 A film of Mica is mounted in a revolving disc fitted in a brass plate, on which the object is placed. Beneath the Mica there is a sliding carrier, containing three different Selenites, so that each one may be brought under the Mica, and the latter rotated. Thus a variety of colours is obtainable, giving very fine effects.
    • It can be used on any Microscope. ... ... ... ... 2 12 6
    • 2463 Selenites mounted on 3 by 1 slips, 3 varieties ... ... each 0 2 6
    • 2464 Mica Films, according to size, mounted in circles or on 3" x 1"
    • slips... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... from 0 2 6
    • Bi-axial Crystals, Etc. See Catalogue, Part 3.
    • IMPROVED DICHROISCOPE
    • Code Word. No.
    • Precr 2465 This improved model is provided with a revolving stage fitted with a small cup filled with wax for holding the mineral. This cup can be raised or lowered and rotated in two azimuths. It can be thrown right out of the field to allow of the careful adjustment of the object on the wax. The ocular and prism slide through a tube for focussing
    • £3 15 0
    • ANNA 1 1
    • H 8
    • 8 0 8 O § 2| 9l Son 8 808 808
    • HI
    • H 5
    • ^^^/^^/y^x/^^^/^/x/T^/x/^/^^^/^^^^^
    • I 3I3 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 50/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • REFRACTOMETERS
    • 247
    • REFRACTOMETERS
    • Code Word.
    • Prefr
    • Preto
    • No.
    • 2471 As described, in cabinet
    • 2472 Nicol prism to fit ocular of above
    • GEM REFRACTOMETER
    • Although primarily designed to meet the requirements of jewellers and dealers in precious stones, this instrument does practically all that is necessary for the mineralogist, physicist and chemist. The refractive index of the substance under examination is read off direct on a scale in the telescope and is accurate to two or three units in the third place of decimals ; the range extends from 1-40 to 1-79. To facilitate the measurement of double refracting substances the dense flint hemisphere is made to rotate on a circle divided to every 5°. The hemisphere is surrounded with a light-tight casing provided with a shutter which allows of illumination by either reflected light or light at glancing incidence at will. The large aperture at the side o the casing is for cleaning the hemisphere, which operation should be performed with the greatest care. The stand is adjustable for height.
    • £ s. d.
    • ......................... 20 0 0
    • 2 10 0
    • DICH ROISCOPE
    • Predi
    • 2473 This instrument is for the accurate comparison of the different colours of Dichroic minerals. It is extremely useful for distinguishing gems from coloured glass imitations... £1 17 6
    • ilHUNRHEHIEIS
    • GONIOMETER EYEPIECE
    • An important part of the study of crystallography consists in the measuring of the interfacial angles on the crystals of all minerals. For this purpose a goniometer eyepiece has been devised, and this takes the form of an eyepiece of universal size (-9173 ins.), fitted with a circle divided to 1 degrees with vernier reading to one minute. One spider web is fixed 0°—180°, while the other moves round with the circle.
    • Code Word. No
    • Preli 2474
    • Price
    • £ s. d.
    • 5 0 0
    • yS/S'sssss/S/y/7/S/rs///SS/////>Y7/^7/^7/7^/y^/7/7//^^^
    • 3 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. , frss7/7/s/s/7ss//77//7/s/s7/s/y/sss/sssr/7'//s^^^
    • ^Sr/7WrS//////7S////S/7SS////S/77S///S%t/7^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C
  • n.n. - vue 51/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 248
    • STAGE FORCEPS, TURNTABLES
    • STAGE FORCEPS
    • 2483
    • 2482
    • 2481
    • Code Word. No.
    • Procu 2481
    • Prodi 2482
    • Produ 2483
    • PRICES ,
    • £ s.
    • Forceps, to fit into stage or limb of Instrument to hold objects during examination ... ... ... ... ... ... 0 12 6 Ditto, ditto, best quality ... ... ... ... IIO Brass Hand Forceps, straight ... ... ... ... ... 0 16
    • TURNTABLES
    • 2484
    • Prode
    • 2484 The “ Facile” Ball-bearing Turntable. An improvement on all existing patterns. In this form the table is balanced in the ordinary way on a hardened steel pin and rotates on a dead hard steel ball, thus reducing friction to a minimum, and ensuring a smooth and steady revolution. The hand support is placed high, enabling a controlled application of the brush. The brass table is engraved with a circle which exactly encloses a 3 x 1 slip, thus giving instant centring .........
    • 2 6
    • Promo 2485
    • 2485
    • Turntable, ordinary pattern, as figured ; very efficient
    • 0 10 6
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f
    • X
    • Is I ol
    • E
    • Is I
    • O
    • SH 8
    • S WJ §
    • 0
    • 87
    • 2 |
    • s o
  • n.n. - vue 52/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • MICROMETER RULE
    • 249
    • MICROMETER RULE
    • CHESTERMAN -
    • lllllliilllllll
    • -1 2
    • 5
    • =
    • IiIUIIIII
    • -1
    • 2
    • 3
    • 5
    • 6
    • -7
    • -8
    • •9
    • CO O)
    • 8
    • 9-
    • £ T 2 0 7Z ZE
    • O J 9
    • 5 6-
    • —NMACN0 unlinlimiuunununumn
    • =—1
    • =2
    • =3
    • —4
    • 5
    • 7
    • —8
    • 59
    • 0. 1 * u . SHEFFIELD ENGLAND
    • 6
    • 8
    • S Z
    • 2 9
    • wo. S
    • cu C
    • o £
    • 2 > o—
    • Mr. E. M. Nelson’s Micrometer Rule measures objects not larger than 2/10 inch to 1/1000 inch or 25 micra. It therefore will be found useful not only to physicists, engineers, manufacturers, etc., but also to microscopists. The thicknesses of slips, cover glasses, etc., can be read off at sight, without having to turn a screw or use a lever or slide. As the scale is so simple in construction it is necessarily cheaper than the various instruments now employed for the purpose. At the back of the Micrometer scale is an Imperial Standard Wire Gauge, extending from 5 to 33 ; also scales of inches in 3, 1/10, and smaller divisions are ruled on the edges. It measures 54 x 18, and so is quite portable.
    • Code Word. No. PRICES £s. d.
    • Shibb 2491 ................................................................ 0 15 0
    • INSECT HOLDER
    • By means of this piece of apparatus, which is constructed to give rotary movements in two directions, the whole surface of an impaled insect may be brought into view. The socket is filled with cork, to receive the pin, and may be set at any angle to objective.
    • Code Word. No. £ s. d.
    • Shibt
    • 2492 Insect holder complete
    • 110
    • Shibw
    • 2493
    • PINHOLE EYEPIECEfor Centring. This consists of a dummy eyepiece, with a pinhole in a metal disc, in place of the usual eyelens, and constitutes a distinct aid when centring the condenser to the rest of the optical system.
    • For universal size tube
    • For 1-27” size tube
    • 0 10 0
    • 0 5 0
    • POND AND ROCK POOL COLLECTING STICK
    • B
    • The Stick is of Bamboo, with an inner extensible rod which is removed by unscrewing the ferrule cap and not as illustrated. Crook handle of Horn.
    • The outfit consists of the Stick, with two wide-mouth bottles and metal clip for same, metal ring for net, cutting hook, metal spoon, triple drag hook with line and reel.
    • Code Word.
    • Ponds Pends
    • Pands
    • No. 2494 2495 2496
    • £ s. d.
    • Price ................................................................................. 112 6
    • Bolting silk of very fine mesh, sufficient for net, per piece ... ... ... 0 5 0
    • Square Net, metal rim fitted with bolting silk and glass tube ... ... ... 0 8 6
    • VZAdeXXRVPPXPXPXHXPHXXPXPXXXPEXMXXMXKXXX% , W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. f VZZZ/WYZZ^ZZZZZZZZZZyZ^ZZ<<ZZZZ/ZZZ'ZZZ/ZZZZZZ/ZZZZ<*ZZ/^ZZZZZZZZZ'ZZZZ/^^
    • SHA So § sos its SHs B IE IHS 8 td § 108 85 8 2 3
    • P
    • Sowoond
  • n.n. - vue 53/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 250
    • SPECTROSCOPE
    • SPECTROSCOPE FOR MICROSCOPE
    • Code Word.
    • Mispe
    • No.
    • 2501
    • PRICES
    • ch co
    • With the aid of a Micro-spectroscope, the position of the lines of emission and absorption spectra may be read off directly in wave lengths. The spectra of different objects may be viewed side by side by means of a comparison prism, which can be turned aside when not required. This apparatus is valuable in certain forms of advanced research, Pathological and Forensic work. The illustration serves only as a guide, we reserve the right to vary the design. The micro-spectroscope takes the place of the ordinary eyepiece, and is clamped into position by means of a screw to the drawtube top ... ... ... ... ... 21 0 0
    • POCKET SPECTROSCOPES
    • Crisp 2502 Pocket Spectroscope, with fixed slit, 3 prisms ...
    • Bispe 2503 Pocket Spectroscope, with adjustable slit, 5 prisms, achromatic object glass, in case
    • Trisp 2504 Pocket Spectroscope, with achromatic object glass, 5 prisms, comparison prism, in case ...
    • Krisp 2505 Pocket Spectroscope, with adjustable slit, 5 prisms, achromatic object glass, micrometer scale, in case ...
    • 115 0
    • 3 15 0
    • 4 7 6
    • 6 10 6
    • ^/z////z//z//z/zzzv////zz///zz///z////z/z////////////////z////////////////////z////z//^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. s
    • , 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • ^Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz/zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz'z/zzzzzzzzzz/^
  • n.n. - vue 54/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 251
    • MICRO-PROJECTION IN THE CLASSROOM
    • For lecture-demonstrations of microscopic specimens no method is so satisfactory as projection on a screen. Every detail may be pointed to and it is only necessary to do this once for the whole class.
    • 90%97005i3 tie. IBS
    • The most practical micro-projector yet devised is shown in the illustration. As will be seen, it is a strongly-built microscope focussing by rack and pinion, with heavy cast-iron foot and large horizontal stage with plate-glass surface. Light is provided by a special substage projection lamp consuming 36 watts and working at 12 volts, the current being obtained from a transformer connected by ordinary lamp flex to any A.C. house supply. A condenser is fitted above the lamp to illuminate a large field evenly and brilliantly. The projection lens is a triple achromatic combination giving a brilliant image magnified 80 diameters on a screen at 15 ft. distance. The beam is reflected in a horizontal direction by a large prism which also corrects the transposition which occurs with simple projection on an opaque screen. The horizontal stage is more convenient for mounted objects than a vertical one, and is, of course, the only possible means of exhibiting unmounted objects or objects in fluid and chemicals in suspension or solution.
    • This type of micro-projector has been found very useful for demonstrations in pharmacology, in which the structural characteristics of drugs and their reactions may be seen by a class of students, but it has a much wider application in the teaching of biology and chemistry in schools, and may be recommended as the most easily managed apparatus made for that purpose.
    • Code Word.
    • Polot
    • Poxot
    • Pomot
    • 2511 School Micro-projector, complete as described, with transformer
    • for any specified A.C. supply ... ... ... ... ... 10 10 0
    • With resistance for any specified D.C. supply, add to above price.
    • 2512 100-125 volts .............................................. 2 15 0
    • 2513 200-250 volts ............................................... 4 0 0
    • Xoooong 9 2
    • IPs
    • M
    • 8 08
    • OS 2 8 Sons
    • Os 9 SHS
    • 5
    • Seooeooed
  • n.n. - vue 55/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 252
    • WATSON’S MICRO-PROJECTION EQUIPMENT
    • Micro Projector
    • Resistance Board
    • Apparatus Case
    • power dry (8 4 mm.) Objectives over distances
    • Suitable for projection with all powers up to and including high power dry (% 4 mm.) Objectives over distances up to 20 ft. For shorter distances oil immersion Objectives may be employed but their use is not recommended owing to the difficulties inseparable from the use of immersion oil.
    • The apparatus consists essentially of a triangular bar mounted upon a mahogany board and carrying an arc lamp with clockwork drive and precise, spring loaded centring adjustments. Mounted beyond the lamp is a light baffle shield ; the Watson Conrady Condenser is provided with iris diaphragm and centring screws and its high order of correction ensures efficient utilisation of the light source with freedom from colour fringes. Water cooling trough of ample dimensions serves to protect delicately stained specimens from damage. Another light baffle shield with iris diaphragm is mounted between the cooling trough and microscope substage condenser. The microscope is the Service model fitted with Service mechanical stage and Research substage. The Research substage with its co-axial condensers permits immediate interchange from low to medium or high power projection. The Service mechanical stage gives steady and responsive movement over the whole specimen allowing the best field to be selected with ease. The 34 mm. draw-tube of the Service microscope allows all light from the objective to proceed to the Eyepiece but with freedom from glare or internal reflections. The whole apparatus is covered with asbestos lined mahogany board and surrounded with light excluding curtains having divisions for the lecturer or assistant to insert the specimen.
    • In micro projection the steadiness of the source of light is of fundamental importance. The arc lamp supplied with this equipment is manufactured in Watson’s High Barnet Factory and it is used in combination with a specially designed resistance board. The fluctuations of mains current are known to all users of scientific apparatus. This board is fitted with ammeter and voltmeter, and sliding resistance. Fluctuations in current can be read off immediately and the flow of current maintained at the optimum pressure. By these means the crater is held steady for long periods.
    • MICRO PROJECTOR, complete with microscope and accessories :
    • Code Word. No. Marbo 2521 ‘ S s. d. " Service ” Microscope mounted on plate carrier on two saddles, with : Research pattern Substage with centring screws, and built in iris diaphragm, complete with dovetail slides to receive condenser changers and two Condenser Changer Slides with independent centring ... ... ... ... ... ... 21 15 0 " Service” pattern attachable mechanical Stage, with 3 in. horizontal, 35 mm. vertical motion, fitted with scales and reading by verniers to OT mm. ... ... 9 5 0 Abbe Condenser Optical Part to fit to substage slide ... ... ... ... 15 0 Low Power Condenser Lens, to fit to substage slide ... ... ... ... ... 0 15 0 Projection Eyepiece x6 ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 10 0 Objectives—Parachromatic series 2 in. 0-15 N.A. ... ... ... ... ... 2 0 0 „ „ 3 in. 0-28 N.A 112 6 Apochromatic 4 mm. 0-85 N.A. ... ... ... ... ... ... 9 0 0 1 in. Oil Immersion ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 5 10 0 Micro Projection Apparatus consisting of : Arc Lamp and Clockwork Drive with special Hood to eliminate the maximum of stray light ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 8 10 0 Special adjustments both horizontally and vertically for centring on saddle ... 15 10 0 Adjustable resistance set consisting of : Board having mounted thereon Zenith resistance, voltmeter and independent switch ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 10 0 0 Special Achromatised Aplanatised Lamp Condenser mounted with adjustment for height, centring screws and clamp to centring, iris diaphragm ... ... ... 10 15 0 Light Shield, adjustable for height provided with 2 in. iris diaphragm ... ... 2 5 0 All the above mounted on saddles Triangular Bar ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 2 10 0 Cover Board with side curtains... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 15 0 Cooling Trough, on saddle ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 15 0 Mahogany Base and Mounting ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 4 10 0
    • The items enumerated above are quoted separately to permit the utilisation of apparatus already in the possession of purchasers.
    • If, however, it is supplied as a complete outfit, a special charge of £4 17 6 is made for the final adjustment, and this charge includes the engraving of the triangular bar to show position of each unit, the supplying of a case to contain objectives, eyepieces, etc., and also the supplying of 25 pairs ol carbons.
    • soeanog
    • Si a
    • IP 98
    • 8 08 OS 2 8 sons 88
    • 9 SI SNNNoood
    • SPANS
    • So 8 803 8
    • E
    • SEX
    • E
    • 2
    • SH8
    • S Wd §
    • 21
    • 12 a
    • 9
    • SoNooo
  • n.n. - vue 56/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 253
    • PROJECTION APPARATUS
    • EPIDIASCOPE
    • No Epidiascope can claim to have fulfilled all the purposes originally claimed by its sponsors, but it does, by obviating the necessity for the perpetual production of lantern slides, afford considerable assistance to the Lecturer, allowing him to emphasise points by projecting text book illustrations, tables, etc.
    • Watsons do not manufacture Epidiascopes but in recent years, in response to enquiries from their many clients, they have from time to time supplied such instruments as seemed to be the best available. Owing to the fact they are not manufacturers of these instruments and have no intention of undertaking such work they are able to give unbiassed advice.
    • 2
    • 12'
    • 6
    • In their opinion the Aldis Epidiascope is at the moment the most efficient of all the medium-priced Epidiascopes and incorporates many features which are unique.
    • The originality of the designer has completely overcome the need for fans to keep the specimen cool and it was found by comparative test that this Epidiascope is the coolest of all within its price range. Any Lecturer will appreciate the freedom from irritation implied by the absence of a fan. The change from Diascopic to Episcopic projection is effected by a gauged connecting rod and the movement through 90° of the lens cap arm effects immediate change over. The movement is positive, controlled by two rods and cannot get out of order.
    • The brilliancy of projection is all that can be desired, a system of internal mirrors, mathematically designed and adjusted ensures a shadow-free image, while a 500 w. lamp will be found to give a projected image as brilliant as that attained by many other projectors with a 1000 w. lamp and all its additional heat. By a simple but extremely effective device the illumination between the two forms of projection is reasonably well balanced.
    • The Object Table is circular and books or diagrams can be orientated by the operator by watching the projected image on the screen; all fumbling and loss of time is eliminated. Simple movements permit accommodation of books of any thickness while the whole table may swing aside to accommodate large specimens such as skulls, museum jars, terrestial globes, etc.
    • At the suggestion of Professor Goodrich of the Zoological Department, Oxford University, an attachment for oblique illumination for the projection of fossils, etc., has been introduced.
    • An ingenious diagram changer is available with accommodation for thirty diagrams—sufficient to illustrate a complete lecture. This can be loaded beforehand and each diagram is brought into the field
    • by a single movement. S. d.
    • Code Word. No. PRICES £
    • Marbu 2531 Epidiascope complete with both projection lenses, curtain, etc. ... 42 0 0
    • 2532 Diagram Changer for above ... 5 0 0
    • 2533 Lamp, any voltage ... I 6 0
    • Full illustrated leaflet will be sent gratis on request. Demonstrations gladly given by appointment.
    • ^XWXW^ Q IE H son
    • Z
    • 0 80
    • d zi 8 0)8 SHI 848 iR s Sonoond
    • ^/^/7/^/77/7^/7/77/7/7//7/77/^/7/7/777/77/7/^/7^^^^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
    • ^/7/y7y^/7^/^/^77/7/7^7/7/7/^^/7^^^
  • n.n. - vue 57/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 254
    • WATSON S EYEPIECE CAMERA
    • FOR USE WITH THE MICROSCOPE
    • #
    • 1
    • 4
    • 8
    • Watson’s Eyepiece Camera enables a photographic record of a microscopical observation to be made in the easiest possible manner.
    • This camera replaces the microscope eyepiece and is fixed rigidly in the draw-tube of the microscope by a special clamp. The object is viewed through an eyepiece in a side tube and is brought into exact focus by the fine adjustment of the microscope. This action simultaneously focuses an image on the photographic plate. The shutter is adjusted and the plate is exposed. The field on the photographic plate has the same extent as that seen in the eyepiece.
    • Made entirely of metal, the lowest portion slides into the draw-tube, and is held by a clamp with three-point contact. Above this is a box containing a prism and shutter, the latter being independently and directly attached to the lower tube and therefore incapable of transmitting vibrations to the upper portion. The prism is a cube of glass with an internal face half silvered by which the rays are partly reflected sideways into the viewing eyepiece but mainly transmitted into the camera. The shutter is adjustable for time, bulb, or instantaneous exposures and is operated by an antinous wire release. A special lens is fitted above the shutter to bring the image to a focus on the photographic plate when the image seen in the eyepiece is in focus. The camera proper is fitted to take a dark slide
    • for plates 44 x 34 in. (4-plate) and a hooded ground-glass focusing screen. The complete camera includes: x 6 eyepiece, dark slide, focusing screen and wire release.
    • Code Word
    • Matca
    • No.
    • 2541 Price
    • ... £10 10 0
    • WATCHING EYEPIECE
    • The “ Watching ” Eyepiece presents two images of the object, one being viewed through a side-tube and the other image projected on a photographic film, plate, or focusing screen.
    • The “ Watching ” Eyepiece was designed originally for cinephotomicrography. In use it is arranged so that the observed image and the projected image of the object are in sharp focus at the same time. Only ten per cent, of the light is diverted to the observer’s eye, the greater intensity required for the projected image not being appreciably reduced thereby, photographically.
    • In ordinary photomicrography the “ Watching ” Eyepiece may be used for arranging and focusing the object and also for watching objects in which changes may occur.
    • When photographing the life-phases of microscopic organisms the objects may be kept under observation until the appropriate moment for a “ shot ” and observation may
    • be continued during the exposure. Code Word No.
    • Matce
    • No.
    • 2542
    • Matco
    • 2543
    • “Watching” Eyepiece, complete with one matched pair of Huy-genian eyepieces Connecting flange to fit the socket of photographic lens
    • £4 15 0
    • 0 5 0
    • ^/7/7/)W7//7/^/77/X/7/X/%<^/7^/7/>Y/Z/>Y^^
    • | W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. I
    • w^y/yy^^i^^/r^y/^/T^^/^^^ 07/0070088CXXCXEXXCCEEXXXX
    • The eyepiece is thus safe for the observer and efficient
    • 1/077010701147002800000807%%
    • 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. I
    • 6y/y>>y^7>y/7^/^^/^/^A^/7/%^^^ exzceecetci
    • a
    • (A
    • WATSON % SONS,UP, LONDON.
    • I/3 SCALE.
  • n.n. - vue 58/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 255
    • A TILTING STAGE
    • FOR TAKING STEREOPHOTOMICROGRAPHS AT ALL MAGNIFICATIONS
    • 04
    • WATSON, LONDON.
    • 34 SCALE.
    • @
    • 8
    • 2
    • 0
    • V
    • designed by
    • Dr. John R. Baker
    • University Lecturer in Zoology at Oxford
    • DESCRI PTION
    • The Tilting Stage has been primarily designed to be attached to the built-in mechanical stage of Watson’s“ Edinburgh ‘ H “ Research,” and " Royal ” Microscopes; but the makers will adapt it to suit other built-in stages if possible. It is fastened to the upper plate of the mechanical stage by means of the two lugs at its lower edge and a clamping screw.
    • The Tilting Stage is designed to take microscope slides one-half millimetre in thickness and 25 x 25 mm. square. This thickness
    • ensures that the object is on the line on which it is rotated. The slide drops into the rebated opening in the frame, and is held in place by springs. The frame slides upon the tilting frame, being moved along it by the screw, and clamped in position. The tilting frame is held parallel with the stage by a spring detent but may be tilted 7 degrees to the left or right by depressing the milled projections. The tilting frame turns on its axis. By means of a special slide engraved with a guiding line the axis of rotation must be made to intersect the optical axis of the microscope.
    • CAPABILITIES
    • Stereophotomicrographs may be obtained with the aid of the Tilting Stage at any magnification. The appliance may be used as an easy means of securing stereoscopic photographs with the lowest powers, the results being similar to those produced by means of the " Greenough ” Binocular Microscope. The apparatus was developed with a view to its use with moderate and high powers, and is recommended specially for those magnifications with which good stereoscopic pictures have hitherto been unobtainable. The claim that oil-immersion objectives may be used with it to advantage is substantiated by results, but it is necessary, of course, that the objective should have sufficient working distance to allow the required amount of tilt in the specimen. Watson’s Versalic Oil-Immersion Objective is recommended as being suitable in this respect. Homogeneous oil contact both above and below the slide obviates any possible ill effects of the tilt on the image, and both objective and oil-immersion condenser may be used as for critical work. Good images are also obtained with high-power dry objectives and ordinary condensers.
    • Owing to the lack of penetration of objectives having large numerical apertures the stereoscopic effect cannot be as pronounced with them as with low powers and to strengthen the effect it may sometimes be considered advisable to use a somewhat smaller cone of illuminating rays than would be used in ordinary observation. With objectives having a focal length of about 12 mm. the stereoscopic effect is very marked and most valuable in its elucidation of structure.
    • Stereophotomicrographs are more effective in the case of separate objects having structure at different planes.
    • Code Word. Nc. Price £ s. d.
    • Matey 2551 Baker-Watson Tilting Stage, as arranged for attachment to the mechanical stages of the “ Edinburgh' H ’,” “ Research,” and “ Royal ” Microscopes, complete with engraved glass setting plate ... 12 10 0
    • Mateu 2552 Glass Slides, square, 25 x 25 mm., 1 mm. in thickness ... per dozen 0 2 0
    • Full explanatory leaflet on request; instructions for use accompany each stage.
    • g70
    • exececerereecereeroeere;
    • W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. s
    • ^^/7/7//////////7/y/y//7/^////7/777/77/7/^^^
    • I 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. f ^/^^7^/^///^/77/x//^/7/^/^/y//'/7x//7x//^/y^^
    • $
  • n.n. - vue 59/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 256
    • THE SAYCE-WATSON CAMERA
    • id
    • B
    • D
    • h
    • TECHNICAL PHOTOGRAPHY
    • Photographic work in academic institutions and industrial undertakings, by reason of its varied nature and the complexity of its problems, has hitherto required a diversity of apparatus, an abundance of space and a high degree of personal skill.
    • These considerations have undoubtedly prevented the full exploitation of photography in directions where it might, if more conveniently available, be of great service, as, for instance, in the production of:—
    • Copies from books, maps, plans, diagrams and other documents.
    • Photographs of specimens, apparatus and machines.
    • Photomicrographs of biological, mineral and metal specimens.
    • Lantern slides and enlargements upon paper from all the foregoing subjects.
    • The apparatus usually required for dealing with such a variety of output is elaborate and expensive, for each type of work has needed its own specific equipment.
    • All such equipment may now, however, be replaced by the Sayce-Watson Universal Camera.
    • Send for Catalogue of Photographic Cameras and Lenses
    • 1 W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. , “ 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. 1
    • Weecceceececeececteteeteteeceteeceteceeteteeteecekeceecetececceccectieceececcoek 2. ^^/^/^/^^^/yy/^^^/y/^^
  • n.n. - vue 60/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • THE CAMERA FOR SCIENTIFIC RECORDS
    • 257
    • THE CAMERA FOR SCIENTIFIC RECORDS
    • Photography is now a normal feature in all scientific and technical research, and there are numberless occasions for the use of a good photographic camera of general utility. Photographs of materials before and after treatment, photographs of apparatus, plant and equipment, copies of plans, diagrams, graphs, tables, charts, book illustrations, these and other records may be made by the use of a single camera of suitable design. The type of camera which is most suitable for general photography and copying is represented most perfectly by Watson’s “ Premier ” Camera. This camera is designed with all the movements which are necessary combined with the most rigid construction. The materials employed are selected with care for durability in all circumstances.
    • WATSON’S
    • “PREMIER”
    • CAMERA
    • Specification.—The camera is constructed of well-seasoned mahogany and has the highest degree of strength, durability and rigidity. The front is fixed and braced; the back moves for focussing either by slide or rack and pinion motion. The lens panel provides rise, fall and cross movements and the back body has swing motions in vertical and lateral directions. The double dark slides are made in book form with hinged shutters, and can be provided with flat film sheaths.
    • This camera is made in five sizes as follows :—
    • 64 x 43 in. (half-plate); 84 x 64 in. (whole-plate); 10 x 8 in. ; 12x10 in.; and 15 x 12 in.
    • WATSON’S
    • HOLOSTIGMAT
    • LENSES
    • The Finest Photographic Lenses obtainable
    • Watson’s Holostigmat Lenses are double cemented anastigmatic lenses with most perfect corrections for colour, spherical aberration, coma, astigmatism, curvature and distortion. Each half of the system is independently corrected for coma and astigmatism and may be used alone. There are only four glass-to-air surfaces, thus ensuring freedom from false reflections and haze. These lenses have been proved to be more brilliant and consequently more rapid than other lenses of larger aperture.
    • Watson’s Holostigmat Lenses have found permanent favour among expert photographers for copying works of art and for wide-angle views, that is to say, for work in which perfect correction for coma, astigmatism and distortion are most valuable.
    • Write for Catalogue of Cameras, Lenses and Photographic Apparatus, Department 1. Sent Post-free.
    • gexeeeeeeeecot y/x/^/xx/^/^ , ^^/>^/^^/7////^^^
    • f W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. ,
    • ^//7/7/7^/^^/7/^/7/7/7/7^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. (
    • ^//z////z/z//z//zz//////////z//z///zzz//zzz//zzzz//z//z//zz///z/z<<z/zzz//z/zzzzzzz/z^
  • n.n. - vue 61/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 258
    • WATSON’S PRISM BINOCULAR GLASSES THE FINEST OBTAINABLE.
    • Watson’s manufactured and supplied more than 30,000 of their Prism Binocular Glasses for the Great War, in addition to more than 7,000 large Telescopes for Gun Sighting, Submarine Periscopes, Fire Directors and other instruments.
    • (57!
    • 1
    • The " Lynceus ” x6 with large Object Glasses.
    • The " Sunica ” the universal glass for all purposes.
    • Damp-proof.
    • Dust-proof.
    • Water-proof.
    • Stable in adjustment.
    • From £5 0 0
    • Full particulars of the above Binocular Glasses, and Portable Telescopes of every description, see Catalogue Department 6.
    • ASTRONOMICAL AND PORTABLE TELESCOPES
    • WATSON, LONDON
    • In addition to their other activities Watson’s manufacture both Astronomical and Portable telescopes, suitable for all purposes. Particulars of these are published in two separate catalogues, which will be sent post free, on request. Prices from £2 5 0
    • A separate list of second-hand Astronomical and Portable Telescopes together with accessories is published.
    • g^^/^^/^///^^^^/^/^^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD
    • ^^/^^/^^/X/^/^/^^/^^/yyA^^^
    • , 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C.
  • n.n. - vue 62/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • INDEX
    • 259
    • INDEX
    • to Parts 1 and 2
    • A PAGE
    • 225
    • 28 241 253
    • 48
    • 80
    • 245
    • 20
    • 230
    • 11
    • 16
    • C—continued
    • PAGE
    • Abbe Camera Lucida ... Abbe Illuminator
    • Agar
    • Aldis Epidiascope Alpha Mechanical Stage Amateur’s Outfit Analyser Eyepiece Angle Eyepiece Aplanatic Magnifiers Apochromatic Objectives Argus Objectives
    • Clove Oil...
    • ...241
    • Club Portable Microscope 100
    • Coarse Adjustment ... 36
    • Codes ... ... ... 3
    • Coles Section Knife ... 233
    • Collecting Stick ... 249
    • Colour Filters ... 26-27
    • 20 41
    • Comparator Eyepiece ... Compound Substage Condenser, Abbe Illum-
    • E—continued PAGE
    • Eyepiece, High Power Binocular ... 105
    • ,, Watching ... 254
    • Eyepiece Micrometers ... 232
    • Eyepieces, Duplex ... 21
    • 19
    • 18
    • 18
    • — p-XPXPX
    • Huygenian for microm
    • Projection ... 19
    • Quartz ... 93
    • L—continued PAGE
    • Life Cells ... 226-227
    • Long Arm Stand ... 115
    • Low Power Binocular ... 113
    • M
    • Stages... ... 47-50
    • B
    • Bactil Microscope ... 64
    • Beale’s Reflector ... 225
    • Bell Glass Covers ... 62
    • Bell’s Cement ... ... 241
    • Bile ... ... ... 241
    • Binocular Eyepiece, High
    • Power ... 106
    • ,, High Power
    • Microscope 105
    • ,, Glasses ... 258
    • ,, Microscope
    • “ Wenham ” 103
    • Blood Serum ... ... 241
    • Blood Testing Apparatus 207
    • Blow Pipe ... ... 204
    • Bone Forceps ... ... 204
    • Books ... ... 208—209
    • Bordet’s Medium ... 241
    • Borrodailes Needles ... 204
    • Botterill's Troughs ... 227
    • Broth ... ... 241
    • Brushes Ringing ... 238
    • Buff Blocks ... ... 238
    • Bull’s Eye Condensers ... 216-217
    • Burroughs Wellcome
    • Stains... ... ... 240
    • Business Terms ... ... 3
    • inator ... 28
    • Carriers described ... 40
    • Changers
    • Holoscopic Oil Immersion
    • 43
    • 27
    • “ Mount ... 31
    • ,, Parachromatic 27
    • Condensers, Aplanatic, Low Power 25
    • ,, Quartz ... 93
    • ,, Slides ... 43
    • ,, Stand 216-217
    • ,, Substage 23—31
    • ,, Tabulated... 24
    • Counting Chambers ... 207
    • Cover Glass Corrector ... 107
    • Cover Glasses ... ... 238
    • Cover Glasses, Plane ... 207
    • Culture Media ... ... 241
    • D
    • Dammar ... ... 241
    • Dark Ground Illumina-
    • F
    • Farrants Medium ... 241
    • Field Portable Micro-
    • scope ... ... ... 102
    • Fine Adjustment ... 37
    • Flemming’s Solution ... 241
    • Fluorescent Screens ... 92
    • Forceps ... ... ... 204
    • ,, Bone ... ... 204
    • ,, Hand ... ... 248
    • ,, Stage ... ... 248
    • G
    • Gelatin, Nutrient ... 241
    • Gem Refractometer ... 247
    • Glass Troughs ... 227—229
    • Glycerine Jelly ... 241
    • Gold Size ... ... 241
    • Goniometer Eyepiece ... 247
    • Greenough Binocular ... 108
    • Guarantee ... ... 52
    • Gum Syrup ... ... 241
    • Macrograph, Substage... 221
    • Macro Illuminator ... 25
    • Magnification Table ... 17
    • Magnifier Holder ... 203
    • Magnifiers ... 230-231
    • Marine Glue ... ... 241
    • McArthur-Watson Port-
    • able Microscope ... 101
    • Meat Medium ... ... 241
    • Mechanical Stages 46-50
    • Mechanical Stage, Alpha 48
    • ,, ,, Service 48
    • , , Stud-
    • ent’s 99
    • Mercury Vapour Lamp... 215 Mica for Mounting ‘ "
    • Mica Selenite Stage Micro-manipulator, Chambers
    • 238
    • 246
    • vu«ox„vxo ... 205-206
    • Micrometer Eyepiece
    • tors 29-31
    • 99 —die ••
    • Micrometers, Eyepiece ...
    • „ . Stage
    • Micro-projector ... Micro-Projection Equipment
    • Microscope, Bactil
    • ,, Diagram of
    • ,, Edinburgh
    • Students
    • 18 249 232 232 251
    • 252
    • 64
    • 33
    • ,, ,9 Stops ... 28
    • Darlaston’s Section Cutter 233
    • Davis Shutter ... ... 22
    • Dean’s Medium... ... 241
    • Dichroiscopes ... 246-247
    • Dissecting Instruments 204
    • ,, Instrument Sets 204
    • ,, Lens Holders 203
    • ,, Microscopes 10 8—115
    • 201-203
    • H
    • Haemacytometers Haemaglobinometers Hanging Drop Slide Heating Stages
    • High Power Binocular Microscope
    • Holoscopic Condenser ...
    • ,, Eyepieces ...
    • ,, Immersion
    • 207
    • 207
    • 31
    • 228
    • 105
    • 27
    • 19
    • 70
    • Field Port-
    • able ... 102
    • Greenough ... 108
    • Horizontal
    • 94, 96
    • Kima ... 56
    • ,, Low Power Binocular 113
    • Cables ... ... ... 3
    • Cambridge Micro-
    • tomes ... ... 236-237
    • Camera Eyepiece ... 254
    • ,, Lucidas... ... 225
    • ,, Sayce-Watson 256
    • Cameras... ... 256-257
    • Canada Balsam... ... 241
    • Cantab Dissecting Stand 203
    • Canvas Roll ... ... 204
    • Carriage ... ... ... 3
    • Cassegrain Dark Ground
    • Illuminator ... ... 30
    • Cathcart Microtomes 234—235 Cathcart-Darlaston
    • Microtome ... ... 235
    • Cavity Slide, Eisenberg 31
    • „ Slides ...............238
    • Cedar Wood Oil... ... 241
    • Celloidin ... ... 241
    • Celloidin Solution ... 241
    • Cell Rings ... ... 238
    • Centring Nosepiece ... 22
    • Chain Hooks ... ... 204
    • Chambers Micro-manip-
    • ulator ... ... 205-206
    • Chance-Watson Filters... 224
    • Clips, Spring Wire ... 238
    • Dissection Apparatus ... 205
    • Dissecting Stage ... 115
    • Drawing Eyepiece ... 225
    • ,, Prism ... ... 225
    • „ Table ... ... 225
    • Draw Tube, Mechanical 51
    • Duplex Eyepiece ... 21
    • Dyes ............. 239-241
    • Edinburgh Student’s
    • Microscope, fitting for
    • Edinburgh Student’s
    • Microscope
    • Ehrlich’s Eyepiece
    • Eisenberg Hanging Drop
    • Slide..................
    • Elder Pith
    • 74
    • 70
    • 207
    • 31
    • 233
    • 29
    • ,, Objectives 12-13 Holostigmat Lenses ... 257 Horizontal Micro-
    • scope ... ... 94 & 96
    • Huygenian Eyepieces 18 Hyrax ... ... ... 241
    • I
    • Illuminators, Vertical ............. 219-221
    • Immersion Oil ... ... 10
    • Inclining Unit ... ... 107
    • Insect Holder ... ... 249
    • Iodine ... ... ... 241
    • Iris Diaphragm for Nose-
    • piece ... ... ... 22
    • ,, McArthur
    • Portable... 101
    • ,, Museum 98—99
    • ,, Museum No. 3 99
    • ,, Myral ... 54
    • ,, Patna ... 66
    • „ Portable 100-102
    • ,, Reading ... 96
    • ,, Research ... 72
    • „ Royal ... 78
    • ,, Service ... 60
    • Grand Model 81-89
    • ,, Van Heurck,
    • ,, Vernier ... 97
    • Microscopes, Dissecting
    • 108-115, 201-203
    • ,, Principle of Construction 34 243-244 ... 250 233-237
    • Microscopic Objects Micro-Spectroscopes
    • Electric Lamps ... 211-213
    • Electric Light Attachment ... ... ... 32
    • 533
    • Epidiascope
    • Equipment for Micro-projection
    • Erector, Porro Prism
    • 252
    • 202
    • Euparal ... ... ... 241
    • Expanding Stop ... 25
    • Eyepiece, Angle ... 20
    • ,, Camera ... 254
    • ,, Drawing ... 225
    • y/7y/^7/y/7/7///7/y/y/7/7/7/7/7/>Y^^^
    • I W. WATSON & SONS, LTD. 1 ^^7///^//^/7^//////////^/7/77//////////i.'’.<////////^//^/^/////////////7^
    • K
    • Kima Microscope ... 56
    • L
    • Lamps, Electric 211—213
    • Lamps, Oil ... ... 214
    • Lamp, Mercury, Vapour 215
    • Lenses, Holostigmat ... 257
    • Lens-Prism ... ... 218
    • Light Filter Carriers ... 222
    • Light Filters ... 223-224
    • Microtome Accessories
    • 233-237
    • Milk Media ... ... 241
    • Moist Chamber ... ... 227
    • Mounting Cabinets ... 238
    • „ Materials ... 238
    • ,, Media ... 241
    • Murray’s Long Range
    • Stage ... ... ... 49
    • Museum Microscope 98—99
    • Museum Microscope No. 3 99
    • Myral Microscope ... 54
    • 8%
    • 6 8
    • 2 IAi
    • 6 S mas
    • as B it
    • =
    • 8 cos 8 co 8 Soronod
  • n.n. - vue 63/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • 260
    • INDEX
    • I N D EX—Continued
    • N PAGE Needle Holder ... ... 204 Needles ... ... ... 204 Nelson’s Bull’s Eye ... 216 Nosepieces, Centring ... 22 ,, Rotating ... 22
    • 0
    • Object Boxes
    • Object Cabinets
    • Objects for the Microscope Objective Changers
    • ... 242
    • ... 242
    • 243-244
    • 21
    • 11-17
    • ,, Apochromatic 16 ,, Argus ... 13 ,, Holoscopic 12-14 ,, Parachromatic 18 ,, Quartz ... 93 ,, Tank ... 16 ,, Variable Power 16 Oil Immersion Condenser 27 Optical Bench ... ... 38 Oil of Cloves ... ... 241 Oil Lamps ... ... 214 Osmic Acid ... ... 241
    • Packing ... ... ... 3 Paraboloid ... ... 29 Parabolic Reflector ... 218 Parachromatic Condenser 27 ,, Objectives 14 - - — 241. 66 3 241 ... 229 Ob-... 16 ... 249 207 233
    • Patna Microscope
    • Payment
    • Peptone Water ... Photomicrographs Photomicrographic jectives
    • Pinhole Eyepiece Pipettes, Blood ... Plane Irons
    • P—continued PAGE Pocket Spectroscopes ... 250 Polarisers & Analysers... 245 Pond Collecting Stick ... 249 Porro Prism Erector ... 202 Portable Microscope 100—102 Premier Camera ... 257 Prism Reflector ... 219 Projection Eyepiece ... 19 ,, Prism ... 225 Projector, Micro ... 251 Publications ... ... 259
    • Q
    • Quartz Condensers ... 93 ,, Eyepieces ... 93 ,. Objectives ... 93 ,, Slips and Covers 93
    • R
    • Rackwork Drawtube ... 51
    • Ramsden Micrograph ... 95 Razors ... ... 204—253 Reading Microscope ... 96 Reagents... ... 239—240 Refractometers ... ... 247 Research Outfits ... 72 Research Microscope ... 72 Research Substage ... 43 Reversible Compressor 226 Rheinberg’s Discs ... 222 Rotating Stage ... ... 49 Rousselet Compressor ... 226 ,, Live Box ... 226 Roval Microscope ... 77 ,, Outfit ... ... 78 Rings, Mounting ... 238
    • S
    • Sayce-Watson Camera... 256
    • Scale Reading Micro
    • scopes ... ... ... 96 Scalpels ... ... ... 204 School Micro-projector ... 251
    • Schultz Solution ... 241
    • Scop Condenser ... 216
    • S—continued PAGE
    • Section Knives ... ... 204 Section Lifter ... ... 204 Selenite Stage ... ... 246 Selenites... ... ... 246 Service Mechanical Stage 48 Service Microscope ... 60 Shipment ... ... 3 Side Silver Reflectors ... 218
    • Simplex Dissecting Microscope ... 202
    • Sir Herbert Jackson Corrector ... ... 107 Slide Boxes ... ... 242 Slide Cabinets ... ... 242 Slides 3" x 1", etc. ... 238 Slips, Mounting ... 238 Soloid Stains ... ... 240 Spectroscopes ... ... 250 Speera Binocular Magnifiers ... ... ... 231 Spot Lens ... ... 25 Stage Condensers ... 218 ,, Forceps ... ... 248 ,, Rotating ... 49 ,, Standard Mechanical ... ... 75 ,, Tilting ... ... 255 Stages Heating ... 228 „ 46-50 ,, Murray’s Long Range... 49—50 Stainless Steel Mirror ... 222 Stains ... ... 239-240 Stand Condensers 216-217 Standard Oil Lamp ... 214 Stereophotomicrographic Stage ... ... ... 255 Sterilized Tubes & Phials 241 Strops ... ... ... 204
    • Student’s Mechanical Stage ... ... ... 49 Styrax 241
    • Substage Condenser Mount... ... ... 31
    • Substage Macrograph ... 221
    • Tank Objectives
    • Telescopes Tilting Stage Troughs....
    • Turntables
    • PAGE
    • ... 16
    • ... 258
    • ... 255 226-227
    • ... 248
    • Tube Length Corrector 107
    • U
    • Ultra Violet Light ... 90
    • Underfitting with Spiral Focussing Screw ... 42 Universal Binocular ... 104 Universal Condenser ... 26
    • Universal Dissecting Microscope ... ... 201
    • V
    • Van Heurck Microscope— Grand Model ... 81—89
    • Variable Power Objectives ... ... ... 16 Vernier Microscope ... 97
    • Vertical Illuminator Combined ... ... 221
    • Vertical Illuminators 219-221
    • Vertical Illuminator, Watson Conrady ... 220
    • W
    • Watching Eyepiece ... 254
    • Watson Conrady Stan Condenser ... ... 216
    • Watson Conrady Vertical Illuminator ... ... 220
    • Wenham Binocular Microscope ... ... 103
    • Works, Illustration of... 45
    • Z
    • Zinc White Cement ... 241
    • Zonal D.G. Condenser ... 31
    • SANA & 3 1$! hl IP 88 PI 21
    • 1 O 82 80s k^ H^
    • Us
    • V wxw^
    • yw/^^/^^^/^^/^/^^/^/y^^^
    • 1 313 HIGH HOLBORN, W.C. |
    • ^Z/Z/Z//ZZZZ/Z/ZZZZ//ZZZZZ/Z////Z//Z//ZZZ////Z/Z//Z/Z///ZZZZZ//////Z//Z4'//Z///ZZ/Z////zi'
  • n.n. - vue 64/65
  •  
  •  
  •  
    • WATSON’S PUBLICATIONS
    • MICROSCOPES AND ACCESSORIES.
    • Catalogue of Microscopes and Accessories :
    • Part 1. STUDENT AND RESEARCH Microscopes.
    • Parts 1 and 2. Student and Research Microscopes and Accessories.
    • Part 3. Objects for the Microscope.
    • Part 4. Metallurgical Microscopes And Accessories.
    • Part 5. PHOTO-MICROGRAPHIC Cameras and Accessories.
    • Part 6. Petrological Microscopes and Accessories.
    • Part 7. Microscopes for Industrial Purposes and Specialised Apparatus.
    • Supplementary Catalogue:
    • Secondhand Microscopes and Accessories.
    • Booklet:
    • The Book of the Watson Microscope.
    • Booklet:
    • Microscopes for Students And Research.
    • Journal:
    • Watson’S Microscope Record, January, May and September.
    • PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS.
    • Catalogue of Photographic Cameras.
    • Catalogue of Photographic Lenses.
    • Supplementary Catalogue :
    • Secondhand Cameras and Lenses.
    • TELESCOPES AND BINOCULARS.
    • Catalogue of Astronomical Telescopes.
    • Catalogue of Binoculars and Terrestrial Telescopes.
    • Supplementary Catalogues :
    • Secondhand Astronomical Telescopes.
    • Secondhand Binoculars and Terrestrial Telescopes.
    • OPTICAL AND METEOROLOGICAL INSTRUMENTS.
    • Optical Utilities.
    • Dictionary of British Optical Instruments. Price 2s. 6d.
    • This is a most complete List of Modern Optical Instruments with definitions and illustrations
    • Leaflet:
    • The Oxford Astrolabe.
    • Leaflet:
    • New Selenium Density Meter or Photometer.
    • SPECTACLES AND EYEGLASSES.
    • Booklet:
    • Spectacles and Eyeglasses.
    • Beautiful and Better Aids to Vision.
    • Spectacle Frames.
  • n.n. - vue 65/65
  •  
  •